Gecdis v8

Gecdis v8
GECDIS v8
User’s Manual
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Revision History
Identification
Ed.
Date
Products release
Note
ISD M 038 A EN
A
12/07/2013
Gecdis v8
ECDIS software user manual
ISD M 038F EN
B
01/01/2013
Gecdis v8
Appendix D rewrited.
ISD M 038F EN
C
11/12/2013
Gecdis v8
Update of the
documentation
ISD M 038 D EN
D
24/01/2014
Gecdis v8.1.3
Application of the iXBlue charter. Addition
of chapters VIII to XIX.
ISD M 038 E EN
E
19/03/2014
Gecdis 8.2.1
ISD M 038 F EN
F
24/06/2014
Gecdis 8.3.1
backup
/
restore
Update of chapters I.3.1, I.4.2 and II
Addition of chapter I.4.6
Update of sections: I.3, I.4.6, V.2.12.4,
V.2.13, VII.1, VII.3.1, VIII.3.1
Update of appendices: B.2, E.
Addition of section V.2.15 Universal Polar
Stereographic Projection.
ISD M 038 G EN
G
17/09/2014
Gecdis 8.4.1
Update of Import bathy - Section XIII.3
Seapix Update - Chapter XVIII
Addition of Biomass menu - chapter XVII
Copyright
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form
or by any means, whether electronic, printed manual or otherwise, including but not
limited to photocopying, recording or information storage and retrieval systems, for any
purpose without prior written permission of iXBlue.
Disclaimer
iXBlue specifically disclaims all warranties, either expressed or implied, included but not
limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with
respect to this product and documentation. iXBlue reserves the right to revise or make
changes or improvements to this product or documentation at any time without notify any
person of such revision or improvements.
In no event shall iXBlue be liable for any consequential or incidental damages, including
but not limited to loss of business profits or any commercial damages, arising out of the
use of this product.
Trademarks
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and Celeron is a trademark of Intel
Corporation.
ii
ISD M 038G EN – September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Software license agreement
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE
INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE.
BY CLICKING ON THE "ACCEPT" BUTTON, INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE, OR USING
THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, CLICK THE
"DO NOT ACCEPT" BUTTON AND THE INSTALLATION PROCESS WILL NOT
CONTINUE, RETURN THE PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL
REFUND.
Grant of
license
iXBlue grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to use the enclosed iXBlue
software in the manner provided below:
• the number of software users depends on the licenses agreed by iXBlue. The user is
able to connect with a security key provided by iXBlue for use on a single computer;
• you may couple multiple iXBlue licenses on a single computer;
• you may make up to two (2) copies of the software for archival or backup purposes,
provided that you reproduce proprietary notices.
Restrictions
• You shall not share by any means, other than by agreement with iXBlue, the software
licenses between multiple computers.
• You shall not copy the software except as set forth in the section above. Any copy of
the software that you make must contain the same copyright and other proprietary
notices that appear on or in the software.
• You shall not modify, adapt or translate the software. You shall not reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble or otherwise attempt to modify or discover the source code of
the software.
• You shall not install, neither operate the software on virtual machines.
• You shall not, rent, lease, sublicense, assign or transfer your rights in the software
without prior written authorization from iXBlue.
Copyright
The software (including any images, animations and text incorporated into the software) is
owned by iXBlue and protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Maintenance /
Data update
iXBlue offers software maintenance during the warranty period. This maintenance
includes the delivery of minor documentary and software licenses. The major or
intermediary updates are not included and shall be dealt with in a separate agreement. If
the software supplied under license is an updated version, the licensee will only be
allowed to use the software in order to replace versions of the same software previously
and duly acquired under license.
Extended
Maintenance
Extended Maintenance Agreements – E.M.A. – may be purchased to extend the product
maintenance after the warranty period. An E.M.A. shall be applied to every software
license that will be maintained and upgraded.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
iii
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Technical
support
Technical support is available free of charge during the warranty period:
• On iXBlue website: http://www.ixblue.com/contact-ixblue-support-representative
• By dedicated e-mail box: [email protected]
• By hotline: +33 1 30 08 97 11, available Monday to Friday, 09.00 – 17.00
Price
The price comprises the main product together with accessories: grant of license and
accrued expenses (as referred to in the order, contract, or in the manufacturer or supplier
price list).
The user license is considered to be granted when iXBlue acknowledges reception of the
whole price paid by the Buyer. Payment is made by means of a secure electronic payment
system or by any other means authorized by iXBlue.
iXBlue will notify reception of payment by electronic mail.
Termination
In case of non-payment and/or non-respect of the present terms, all rights of the license
and the use of software will be terminated, without prejudice to any legal action iXBlue
may carry out against the defaulting party.
The Buyer will be obliged, at its own expense and risk, to return to iXBlue all copies of the
software under license in its possession together with physical protection keys, or to
confirm in writing that all software copies under license in its possession have been
destroyed.
iXBlue reserves the right to proceed to all the necessary verifications in order to be
assured of the buyer’s observance of the aforementioned conditions.
Out-of-court
settlement,
choice of
jurisdiction
Both parties will do their utmost to bring an end to disputes relative to the interpretation
and/or the execution of this document by settling an agreement between their respective
management. If an agreement has not been reached within three months, the dispute will
be decided by the Paris tribunal jurisdiction.
iv
ISD M 038G EN – September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Limited Warranty
Warranty
period
iXBlue guarantees that the software will perform substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of
shipment.
Customer
Remedies
iXBlue’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at iXBlue’s option, repair or
replacement of the software that does not meet iXBlue’s Limited Warranty. Warranty
service is F.O.B. iXBlue France. All shipping and insurance costs to iXBlue are paid for by
the buyer; shipping and insurance costs returning to the buyer will be paid for by iXBlue.
On-site Customer Service and Warranty Repair may be provided by iXBlue, at its own
discretion. Travel and accommodation (including travel hours, transportation, lodging and
meals) will be charged by iXBlue to the Buyer at cost plus ten (10) per cent. However,
actual labor hours to provide this service or repair will be free of charge to the Buyer. This
Limited Warranty is void if failure of the software or hardware has resulted from accident,
abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement software or hardware will be guaranteed for
the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.
Limitations
iXBlue makes no other warranties than the above limited warranties. iXBlue makes no
warranties, expressed, implied, statutory, or in any communication with you, and iXBlue
specifically disclaims any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose. iXBlue does not warrant that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted
or error free. The buyer agrees that the responsibility, without tort liability, or the
responsibility related to the warranty shall not exceed the price paid for the acquisition of
the product.
Liability
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event shall iXBlue be liable for
any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages for loss of business
profits, business interruption, loss of business information, or any other pecuniary loss)
arising out of the use of or inability to use this iXBlue product, even if iXBlue has been
advised of the possibility of such damages.
This application program is only to be used in order to help optimize fishing and shall not
exempt the skipper of his responsibilities in terms of navigation security and respect for
law enforcement.
Dongles
iXBlue will not replace lost dongles free of charge, neither offer discounted pricing terms
for replacement dongles.
iXBlue strongly recommends that you insure your iXBlue products against loss, theft or
damage where applicable.
iXBlue will propose the replacement of damaged dongles only for a limited fee, provided
that the damaged dongle units are returned to iXBlue. All shipping and insurance costs
are paid for by the buyer.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
v
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Text Usage
Bold
Bold text is used for items you must select or click in the software. It is
also used for the field names used into the dialog box.
Courier
Text in this font denotes text or characters that you should enter from the
keyboard, the proper names of disk Drives, paths, directories, programs,
functions, filenames and extensions.
Italic
Italic text is the result of an action in the procedures.
Icons
The Note icon indicates that the following information is of particular interest and should
be read with care.
Important
THE IMPORTANT MENTION INDICATES THAT THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION SHOULD BE READ TO
FORBID OR PREVENT A PRODUCT DYSFUNCTION OR A FAULTY OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
The Caution icon indicates that the following information should be read to forbid or
prevent product damage.
The Warning icon indicates that possible personal injury or death could result from failure
to follow the provided recommendation.
vi
ISD M 038G EN – September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Table of Contents
I
GETTING STARTED ....................................................................................................... 1
I.1
WELCOME ................................................................................................................................ 1
I.1.1
I.1.1.1
I.1.1.2
Requested Configuration ..................................................................................................... 1
Computer ............................................................................................................................. 1
Screen .................................................................................................................................. 2
I.1.2
Installation/uninstallation ...................................................................................................... 2
I.1.3
Launching and Closing Gecdis ............................................................................................ 4
I.2
HOW TO USE THE EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 6
I.2.1
I.2.1.1
The Keyboard Shortcuts ...................................................................................................... 6
Gecdis Standard Shortcuts: ................................................................................................. 6
I.2.2
I.2.2.1
Entering Texts ...................................................................................................................... 8
Geographic Editor ................................................................................................................ 9
I.2.3
The Mouse ........................................................................................................................... 9
I.3
GECDIS OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................. 10
I.3.1
I.3.1.1
I.3.1.2
I.3.1.3
I.3.1.4
I.3.1.5
I.3.1.6
I.3.1.7
I.3.1.8
I.3.1.9
I.3.1.10
The Screen ........................................................................................................................ 10
The Main View ................................................................................................................... 10
The Menu Bar .................................................................................................................... 11
Title Bars ............................................................................................................................ 12
Status Bar .......................................................................................................................... 12
Toolbars ............................................................................................................................. 13
Information Windows ......................................................................................................... 13
Secondary Windows .......................................................................................................... 15
Information about Chart/Cell .............................................................................................. 16
Pop-up Menus .................................................................................................................... 16
Dialog Boxes .................................................................................................................. 17
I.3.2
The Cursor ......................................................................................................................... 17
I.3.3
Using Views ....................................................................................................................... 18
I.3.4
Accessing Commands ....................................................................................................... 18
I.4
IMPORTANT FEATURES TO KNOW ............................................................................................ 19
I.4.1
The Own Ship .................................................................................................................... 19
I.4.2
ECDIS and ECS Modes ..................................................................................................... 19
I.4.3
Man Over Board................................................................................................................. 20
I.4.4
Printing the Screen ............................................................................................................ 21
I.4.5
The modules ...................................................................................................................... 21
I.4.6
I.5
Back-up .............................................................................................................................. 22
WHAT TO DO BEFORE DEPARTURE ......................................................................................... 23
I.5.1
I.5.1.1
I.5.1.2
Customizing ....................................................................................................................... 24
Configuring your Screen Size ............................................................................................ 24
Customizing Gecdis Screen .............................................................................................. 24
I.5.2
I.5.2.1
I.5.2.2
I.5.2.3
I.5.2.4
Checking ............................................................................................................................ 24
Datum ................................................................................................................................ 24
Sensors .............................................................................................................................. 24
Implementing Alarms ......................................................................................................... 24
Route Management ........................................................................................................... 24
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
vii
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.5.2.5
I.6
Charts.................................................................................................................................25
NAVIGATION TASKS ................................................................................................................25
I.6.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................25
I.6.2
I.6.2.1
I.6.2.2
I.6.2.3
Voyage Planning ................................................................................................................25
Route Planning ..................................................................................................................25
Route Calculation ...............................................................................................................26
Chart Planning ...................................................................................................................26
I.6.3
I.6.3.1
I.6.3.2
I.6.3.3
Positioning .........................................................................................................................26
Direct Positioning of Sensors .............................................................................................26
Dead Reckoning Equipment ..............................................................................................26
Manual Correction ..............................................................................................................27
I.6.4
I.6.4.1
I.6.4.2
I.6.4.3
Steering Modes ..................................................................................................................27
Hand Steering ....................................................................................................................27
Trackpilot Steering .............................................................................................................27
Waypoint Approach Mode..................................................................................................27
I.6.5
I.6.5.1
I.6.5.2
I.6.5.3
I.6.5.4
I.6.5.5
Monitoring ..........................................................................................................................27
Display of Electronic Sea Chart .........................................................................................28
Display of Conning Information ..........................................................................................28
Alarms ................................................................................................................................28
Man over Board .................................................................................................................28
Data Logging ......................................................................................................................28
II
GENERAL CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ 29
II.1
IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................................................29
II.2
DISPLAY .................................................................................................................................29
II.2.1
Screen Size ........................................................................................................................30
II.2.2
Color Modes .......................................................................................................................30
II.2.3
Motion Control ....................................................................................................................31
II.3
CONFIGURING THE UNITS ........................................................................................................32
II.4
THE DATUM ............................................................................................................................34
II.5
THE TOOLBAR ........................................................................................................................35
II.5.1
Inserting a New Button.......................................................................................................35
II.5.2
Controls ..............................................................................................................................36
II.6
ALARMS .................................................................................................................................37
II.7
THE USERS ............................................................................................................................38
II.7.1
Adding a User ....................................................................................................................38
II.7.2
Configuring Users’ Rights ..................................................................................................39
II.7.3
Opening a New Session ....................................................................................................40
II.8
DANGER DETECTION ...............................................................................................................41
II.9
SYNCHRONIZATION .................................................................................................................43
II.10
USER INTERFACE ....................................................................................................................45
II.10.1
Tooltips in chart views ........................................................................................................46
II.10.2 General Parameters...........................................................................................................47
II.10.2.1
Active Window ...............................................................................................................47
II.10.2.2
TurboWin Mode .............................................................................................................48
II.11
viii
THE INFORMATION WINDOWS ..................................................................................................51
ISD M 038G EN – September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
III
GECDIS DISPLAY ........................................................................................................ 54
III.1
THE SCALES .......................................................................................................................... 54
III.2
COLOR MODE......................................................................................................................... 55
III.3
CENTRING ON A PLACE ........................................................................................................... 57
III.4
CENTRING ON A MOBILE ......................................................................................................... 59
III.4.1
On Own Ship...................................................................................................................... 59
III.4.2
On Any Mobile ................................................................................................................... 59
III.4.3
Motion Control.................................................................................................................... 60
III.4.3.1
Relative and True Motion ............................................................................................... 60
III.4.3.2
Main view orientation ..................................................................................................... 61
III.5
III.5.1
ALARMS ................................................................................................................................. 63
The Alarm Window............................................................................................................. 63
III.5.2
The Black Box .................................................................................................................... 64
III.5.2.1
Overview ........................................................................................................................ 64
III.5.2.2
Configuring the Display of the Events............................................................................ 65
III.6
THE VIEW MENU ..................................................................................................................... 67
III.7
THE DISPLAY CONTEXT .......................................................................................................... 69
IV MOBILES AND FLEETS ................................................................................................ 72
IV.1
IV.1.1
IV.1.2
IV.2
NAVIGATION ........................................................................................................................... 72
Mobiles’ Vectors................................................................................................................. 72
Apparent Wind and True Wind .......................................................................................... 73
THE OWN SHIP ....................................................................................................................... 74
IV.2.1
Sizes .................................................................................................................................. 74
IV.2.2
Heights ............................................................................................................................... 75
IV.2.3
Navigation parameters ....................................................................................................... 76
IV.3
THE MOBILES LIST ................................................................................................................. 76
IV.4
ALARMS ................................................................................................................................. 78
IV.4.1
Own Ship Specific Alarms ................................................................................................. 78
IV.4.1.1
Anti-Collision .................................................................................................................. 78
IV.4.1.2
Inconsistent Positions .................................................................................................... 79
IV.4.1.3
Inconsistent Depths ....................................................................................................... 80
IV.4.2
Target/AIS alarms .............................................................................................................. 81
IV.4.2.1
High speed ..................................................................................................................... 82
IV.4.2.2
AIS Detection ................................................................................................................. 82
IV.4.2.3
AIS Message Filtering .................................................................................................... 84
IV.5
IV.5.1
REPRESENTATION .................................................................................................................. 84
Defining a Mobile Appearance........................................................................................... 84
IV.5.2
Standard Representation ................................................................................................... 87
IV.5.2.1
Own Ship ....................................................................................................................... 88
IV.5.2.2
AIS and ARPA Mobiles .................................................................................................. 88
IV.5.2.3
ARPA symbols ............................................................................................................... 88
IV.5.2.4
AIS symbols ................................................................................................................... 89
IV.5.2.5
Advanced ....................................................................................................................... 90
IV.5.3
IV.6
Defining a Specific Appearance for a Mobile or a Fleet .................................................... 90
CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................... 94
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
ix
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.6.1
Information .........................................................................................................................94
IV.6.1.1
System Information ........................................................................................................94
IV.6.1.2
Mobiles’ Information .......................................................................................................97
IV.6.2
Streams ............................................................................................................................100
IV.6.2.1
Adding and Configuring a Communication Port...........................................................100
IV.6.2.2
Adding and Configuring a NET stream ........................................................................101
IV.6.2.3
Adding and Configuring a FILE Stream .......................................................................105
IV.6.2.4
Spying Input and Output Data......................................................................................106
IV.6.2.5
Transmitting Sentences via a Stream ..........................................................................107
IV.6.2.6
Checking Transmitted Sentences ................................................................................109
IV.6.3
Creating Mobiles and Fleets ............................................................................................109
IV.6.4
Assigning Information to a Mobile ....................................................................................111
IV.6.5
Configuring Information....................................................................................................112
IV.6.5.1
Source Tab...................................................................................................................112
IV.6.5.2
Checking Tab ...............................................................................................................113
IV.6.5.3
Corrections Tab ...........................................................................................................114
IV.6.5.4
Filtering Tab .................................................................................................................115
IV.6.6
Inheriting Information .......................................................................................................116
IV.6.7
Sensor Synthesis .............................................................................................................117
IV.6.7.1
Synthesis in Basic and Advanced Modes ....................................................................117
IV.6.7.2
Displaying Real-Time Information ................................................................................118
IV.6.7.3
Printing the Summary Window.....................................................................................119
IV.7
DEAD RECKONING ................................................................................................................120
IV.8
FIX POSITION ........................................................................................................................121
IV.8.1
Fixing Position ..................................................................................................................121
IV.8.2
Display of Fix Positions ....................................................................................................121
IV.8.3
Fix Position Settings ........................................................................................................121
V
CHARTS .................................................................................................................. 122
V.1
V.1.1
Displaying the Chart Coverage ........................................................................................122
V.1.2
List of Charts ....................................................................................................................123
V.1.3
Filtering Charts .................................................................................................................124
V.1.4
Displaying the Planisphere in Background ......................................................................125
V.2
x
CHART CATALOGUE .............................................................................................................122
ENC CHARTS (IXBLUE FORMAT) ...........................................................................................126
V.2.1
V.2.1.1
V.2.1.2
Introduction ......................................................................................................................126
Launching the ENC Module .........................................................................................127
Default Configuration ...................................................................................................127
V.2.2
Chart Database Presentation ..........................................................................................128
V.2.3
V.2.3.1
V.2.3.2
V.2.3.3
Managing the Chart Database .........................................................................................129
Importing a Set of Encrypted ENC Cells ......................................................................129
Importing a Catalog of non Encrypted ENC Cells........................................................130
Importing One or Several ENC Cells ...........................................................................131
V.2.4
Getting an Import Report .................................................................................................132
V.2.5
Getting Information on the Cells ......................................................................................133
V.2.6
Resetting the Database ...................................................................................................133
ISD M 038G EN – September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.7
Centring the Chart Area on a Cell.................................................................................... 134
V.2.8
Importing/Deleting User Permits ...................................................................................... 134
V.2.9
Loading Certificates ......................................................................................................... 136
V.2.10
Chart Loading Modes ...................................................................................................... 136
V.2.11 Updating ........................................................................................................................... 138
V.2.11.1
Semi-Automatic Updating ............................................................................................ 138
V.2.11.2
Manual Updating .......................................................................................................... 139
V.2.12 Chart Presentation ........................................................................................................... 145
V.2.12.1
Simplified and Traditional Display ................................................................................ 145
V.2.12.2
Detail Level of Chart Objects ....................................................................................... 146
V.2.12.3
The Presentation Library ............................................................................................. 148
V.2.12.4
Security Options ........................................................................................................... 149
V.2.13
Danger Detection or Anti-Grounding ............................................................................... 152
V.2.14 Consulting Information on an Object ............................................................................... 155
V.2.14.1
Consulting Information on a Cell .................................................................................. 156
V.2.15
V.3
Universal Polar Stereographic Projection ........................................................................ 157
ARCS CHARTS .................................................................................................................... 162
V.3.1
V.3.1.1
V.3.1.2
V.3.1.3
ARCS Overview ............................................................................................................... 162
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 162
Registering ARCS Charts ............................................................................................ 162
Launching ARCS Module ............................................................................................ 163
V.3.2
V.3.2.1
V.3.2.2
V.3.2.3
V.3.2.4
Charts .............................................................................................................................. 166
The Chart Database..................................................................................................... 166
Installing/Uninstalling Charts ....................................................................................... 167
Updating Charts ........................................................................................................... 168
Using ARCS Charts ..................................................................................................... 170
V.3.3
V.3.3.1
V.3.3.2
Consulting Information about Charts ............................................................................... 170
Chart General Information ........................................................................................... 170
Mariner’s Notes ............................................................................................................ 172
VI NAVIGATION ............................................................................................................ 174
VI.1
BEARING LINES AND BEARING RANGE LINES......................................................................... 174
VI.2
CLEARING LINES .................................................................................................................. 175
VI.3
GEOGRAPHIC CALCULATIONS ............................................................................................... 177
VI.4
PILOTING FIX ........................................................................................................................ 179
VI.4.1
Overview .......................................................................................................................... 179
VI.4.2
Using Piloting Fix ............................................................................................................. 180
VI.5
SAR DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................... 182
VI.5.1
Overview .......................................................................................................................... 182
VI.5.2
Square Spiral Route ........................................................................................................ 183
VI.5.3
Sector Route .................................................................................................................... 184
VI.5.4
Parallel Route .................................................................................................................. 185
VII USER OBJECTS........................................................................................................ 188
VII.1
DATABASES AND FOLDERS ................................................................................................... 188
VII.2
M ANAGING USER OBJECTS................................................................................................... 189
VII.2.1
General Operation on User Objects ................................................................................ 189
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
xi
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.2.2
List of User Objects ..........................................................................................................189
VII.2.3
Configuring the Filters ......................................................................................................190
VII.2.4 Importing User Objects ....................................................................................................190
VII.2.4.1
TurboWin/Turbo2000 Import ........................................................................................191
VII.2.4.2
Gecdis Import ...............................................................................................................191
VII.2.4.3
Turbo Tactic Import ......................................................................................................192
VII.2.4.4
MaxSea Import .............................................................................................................192
VII.2.4.5
QuodFish Import ..........................................................................................................192
VII.2.5
VII.3
VII.3.1
Exporting a User Object ...................................................................................................193
ROUTES ...............................................................................................................................194
Creating a Route ..............................................................................................................194
VII.3.2 Route Properties ..............................................................................................................196
VII.3.2.1
Route Fields .................................................................................................................196
VII.3.2.2
Waypoints Fields ..........................................................................................................196
VII.3.2.3
The toolbar Commands ...............................................................................................197
VII.3.3
Planning a Route .............................................................................................................199
VII.3.4
Duplicating a Route ..........................................................................................................200
VII.3.5 Representation of a Route ...............................................................................................200
VII.3.5.1
Alternative Route .........................................................................................................201
VII.3.5.2
Planned Route .............................................................................................................201
VII.3.5.3
Alternative Route that is Highlighted ............................................................................201
VII.3.5.4
Planned Route that is Highlighted ...............................................................................202
VII.3.6
Switching in Route Monitoring .........................................................................................202
VII.3.7
The Pilot View ..................................................................................................................203
VII.3.8
Autopilot Control ..............................................................................................................204
VII.3.9
The channel View ............................................................................................................206
VII.3.10 Channelling ......................................................................................................................207
VII.3.11 Importing/Exporting Routes .............................................................................................207
VII.4
TRACKS ...............................................................................................................................209
VII.4.1
Starting/Stopping a Track ................................................................................................209
VII.4.2
Track Templates ..............................................................................................................209
VII.4.3
Track Color Filters ............................................................................................................210
VII.4.4
Displaying the Track Profile .............................................................................................211
VII.4.5
Changing the Track Properties ........................................................................................212
VII.5
M ARKS AND EVENTS.............................................................................................................212
VII.5.1
Creating Marks .................................................................................................................212
VII.5.2
Configuring Mark Display Options ...................................................................................215
VII.6
AREAS .................................................................................................................................216
VII.7
CIRCLES AND SECTORS ........................................................................................................218
VII.8
TEXT ....................................................................................................................................219
VIII THE RADAR MODULE ............................................................................................... 221
xii
VIII.1
CONFIGURING THE RADAR SOURCE.......................................................................................221
VIII.2
TURNING THE RADAR ON/OFF ...............................................................................................221
VIII.3
CONFIGURING INFORMATION OF THE RADAR SOURCE ............................................................222
ISD M 038G EN – September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VIII.4
CUSTOMIZING RADAR DATA DISPLAY .................................................................................... 228
VIII.4.1
Choosing the Colors ........................................................................................................ 228
VIII.4.2
Adjusting the display in the view ...................................................................................... 229
VIII.4.3
Controlling Radar Data Display ....................................................................................... 229
VIII.4.4
Optimizing the Radar Video Display ................................................................................ 230
IX REPLAY MODULE ..................................................................................................... 232
IX.1
X
CONFIGURING/LAUNCHING THE REPLAY MODULE .................................................................. 232
TIDE MODULE .......................................................................................................... 234
X.1
CONSULTING TIDAL GAUGES AND TIDAL STREAMS ................................................................ 234
X.2
TIDAL CURVES ...................................................................................................................... 235
X.3
CONFIGURING THE TIDAL STREAM DISPLAY ........................................................................... 237
X.4
CONTROL OF TIDAL STREAM DATE ......................................................................................... 238
X.5
REFERENCE STATION ........................................................................................................... 240
X.6
SHIP ‘HEIGHT OF TIDE’ INFORMATION .................................................................................... 240
XI WEATHER MODULE .................................................................................................. 242
XI.1
DATA DOWNLOAD ................................................................................................................ 242
XI.2
PRESSURE ........................................................................................................................... 242
XI.3
WIND ................................................................................................................................... 244
XII SEDIMENTS MODULE ............................................................................................... 245
XII.1
DISPLAY............................................................................................................................... 245
XII.2
CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................... 245
XIII BATHYMETRY MODULE ............................................................................................. 248
XIII.1
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 249
XIII.2
BATHYMETRY DATA TO DISPLAY ........................................................................................... 250
XIII.3
DATABASE ........................................................................................................................... 250
XIV 3D VIEW .................................................................................................................. 254
XIV.1
REPRESENTATION OF 3D VIEW ............................................................................................. 254
XIV.2
3D TOOLS ............................................................................................................................ 255
XV WASSP .................................................................................................................. 257
XV.1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 257
XV.2
CONFIGURING AND USING WASSP WITH SEAXPERT ............................................................. 257
XV.2.1
Creating a stream dedicated to Wassp data ................................................................... 257
XV.3
CONFIGURING WASSP MODULE ............................................................................................. 258
XV.4
CONFIGURING BATHYMETRY AND SEDIMENT MODULES .......................................................... 259
XV.4.1
Bathymetry Module (when available)............................................................................... 259
XV.4.2
Sediment Module (when available).................................................................................. 260
XV.5
USING WASSP MOBILE ....................................................................................................... 260
XVI SIMRAD ES70 .......................................................................................................... 264
XVI.1
CONFIGURING THE INPUT STREAM ......................................................................................... 264
XVI.2
USING THE SIMRAD MODULE ................................................................................................. 265
XVII BIOMASS MODULE ................................................................................................... 268
XVII.1.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 268
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
xiii
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVII.1.2 Biomass Display ..............................................................................................................269
XVIII
SEAPIX MODULE ............................................................................................... 271
XVIII.1 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................................271
XVIII.2 CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................................273
XVIII.2.1 Creating a Stream Dedicated to SeapiX Communication................................................273
XVIII.2.2 Configuring SeapiX Module .............................................................................................273
XVIII.2.2.1 Step 1: Stream Configuration .....................................................................................273
XVIII.2.2.2 Step 2: Installation Configuration ...............................................................................274
XVIII.2.2.3 Step 3: Database Configuration .................................................................................274
XVIII.2.2.4 Step 4: Check SeapiX Mobile Availability ..................................................................274
XVIII.2.3 Configuring Bathymetry and Sediment Modules .............................................................275
XVIII.2.3.1 Bathymetry Module.....................................................................................................275
XVIII.2.3.2 Sediment Module (when available) ............................................................................275
XVIII.3 USING SEAPIX ......................................................................................................................276
XVIII.3.1 Overview of SeapiX Fire Modes ......................................................................................276
XVIII.3.2 SeapiX Menu and Dedicated Toolbars ............................................................................277
XVIII.3.3 Start sounder acquisition .................................................................................................279
XVIII.3.4 Use Echogram View ........................................................................................................280
XVIII.3.4.1 Echogram Construction Angle ....................................................................................280
XVIII.3.4.2 Echogram Display ......................................................................................................281
XVIII.3.5 Record and Display Seabed Data in Real Time ..............................................................282
XVIII.3.6 Recording Options ...........................................................................................................284
XVIII.3.6.1 Overlap Management in Real Time Database ...........................................................284
XVIII.3.6.2 Height of Tide Correction ...........................................................................................284
XIX STATISTICS MODULE ................................................................................................ 285
XX CABLE AND PIPELINE MANAGEMENT MODULE ........................................................... 287
XX.1
PRESENTATION .....................................................................................................................287
XX.1.1 Provided Functions ..........................................................................................................287
XX.1.1.1
SML Management Database .......................................................................................287
XX.1.1.2
Bathymetric Data Management ...................................................................................287
XX.1.2
XX.2
XX.2.1
Functions not Included (as compared to MMS-DOS version) .........................................288
IMPLEMENTATION .................................................................................................................288
UTM Management ...........................................................................................................288
XX.2.2 SML Database Management ...........................................................................................289
XX.2.2.1
General Overview of Access to Functions ...................................................................289
XX.2.2.2
Library Management ....................................................................................................290
XX.2.2.3
Cable Link and Pipeline Selection ...............................................................................291
XX.2.2.4
Displaying Items Rules ................................................................................................292
XX.2.2.5
Querying.......................................................................................................................293
XX.2.2.6
SML Properties Window ..............................................................................................294
XX.2.2.7
SML creation ................................................................................................................306
XX.2.2.8
SML removing ..............................................................................................................306
XX.2.2.9
SML shifting .................................................................................................................306
XX.2.2.10 SML export ..................................................................................................................307
XX.2.2.11 SML import ..................................................................................................................307
XX.2.3
xiv
Bathymetric data management ........................................................................................308
ISD M 038G EN – September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XX.3
DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................................... 308
IXBLUE CONTACT - SUPPORT
24/7 CUSTOMER SUPPORT HELPLINE ................ 309
IXBLUE CONTACT - SALES .......................................................................................... 310
APPENDICES................................................................................................................... 311
A
GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................................... 311
B
ECDIS INFORMATION M ANDATORY ....................................................................................... 320
B.1
B.2
C
Links Table....................................................................................................................... 320
Applied Standards............................................................................................................ 320
THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY, CHART 1................................................................................. 321
C.1
Information about the Chart Display (A, B) ...................................................................... 321
C.2
Natural and Man-Made Features (C, D, E) ...................................................................... 322
C.3
Port Features (F).............................................................................................................. 322
C.4
Depths, Currents, etc.(H, I) .............................................................................................. 323
C.5
Seabed, Obstructions, Pipelines, etc. (J, K, L) ................................................................ 323
C.6
Traffic Routes (M) ............................................................................................................ 324
C.7
Special Areas (N) ............................................................................................................. 324
C.8
Aids and Services (P, R, S, T, U) .................................................................................... 325
C.9
Buoys and Beacons (Q) ................................................................................................... 325
C.10
Topmarks (Q) ................................................................................................................... 326
C.11
D
Color Test Diagram .......................................................................................................... 326
EQUIPMENT THAT CAN BE INTERFACED WITH GECDIS ............................................................ 327
D.1
List of NMEA Sentences Used ........................................................................................ 327
D.2
List of binary AIS Messages Used ................................................................................... 328
D.3
D.3.1
D.3.2
D.3.3
D.3.4
Fleet: Mobile, Buoy, Target .............................................................................................. 329
Summary Table................................................................................................................ 329
NMEA Information Table ................................................................................................. 330
AIS-VDM Complementary Information Table .................................................................. 330
IXMIoFormatEx Module Information Table ...................................................................... 330
D.4
D.4.1
D.4.2
D.4.3
D.4.4
D.4.5
System, Own Ship and Trawl Net .................................................................................... 331
System Information .......................................................................................................... 332
Own Ship System Information ......................................................................................... 332
Own Ship Information ...................................................................................................... 333
Trawl Net Information ...................................................................................................... 335
GEONET Trawl Net ......................................................................................................... 335
E
SHIP OUTLINE ...................................................................................................................... 338
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
xv
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I
GETTING STARTED
For simplicity in this manual, the term Gecdis is used as a generic name to identify the
name of the software, which has several product name: SeaXpert, Gecdis-C, SeaPix.
I.1
Welcome
Gecdis is a navigational aid system with a geographic information system, working on
standard computers fitted with Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows Seven.
Navigational aid is given by displaying electronic charts, on which information from the
ship equipment and sensors connected to Gecdis are shown, such as: GPS,
gyrocompass or depth-sounder navigation tools.
Gecdis fits IMO regulations for cartographical data storage (SP52) and their displaying
(SP57).
Gecdis is fitted with in-line and independent tools, allowing system customization
according to three levels: the ship's equipment, the user and his practices, hierarchy and
access rights.
Furthermore, Gecdis provides independent back-up arrangements to ensure safe
navigation in case of a failure. So if your machine suddenly malfunctions, the parameters
the equipment does not need to be reinitialized manually, and operator settings, do not
change.
I.1.1
I.1.1.1
REQUESTED CONFIGURATION
Computer
Component
Minimum request / advisable
Operating system
Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows Seven
Processor
Intel Pentium 4 or more
RAM
1GB
Hard disk
1GB (10GB advisable)
CD/DVD drive
One unit for installation
Pointing device
Mouse or Trackball
Input device
Keyboard
Video card
3D graphic card
USB port
One for HASP key
COM and NET ports
As many communication ports as connected devices
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
1
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.1.1.2
Screen
Gecdis has been designed to be used with one or several screens, a minimum of two is
recommended.
Here are the necessary criteria of the screen to be consistent with the ECDIS standard:
• The operational display area of the chart presentation for route monitoring shall be at
least 270 mm × 270 mm.
• For ECDIS back-up arrangements, the effective size of the chart presentation shall be
not less than 250 mm × 250 mm or 250 mm diameter.
• Operational display equipment including multifunction displays (for example, conning
displays) shall provide a minimum screen resolution of 1280 × 1024 pixels, or
equivalent for a different aspect ratio, except where permitted or not required by the
IMO, or when used for a single specific purpose (for example, speed log, echosounder).
• Display equipment intended to support the presentation of electronic chart information
shall provide a maximum pixel pitch of 0,29 mm/m of nominal viewing distance (1 min
of arc), for example, 0,36 mm at 1 237 mm viewing distance.
I.1.2
INSTALLATION/UNINSTALLATION
Figure 1 - CD-ROM AutoPlay Menu
To install Gecdis into your hard disk:
Step
Action
1.
Connect the HASP key on the USB port of your machine.
2.
If Windows asks you to install a new device, cancel the procedure, the pilot of the dongle
will be installed with the installation of Gecdis.
3.
2
Put the iXBlue’s CD-ROM into the appropriate drive.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
4.
Action
Select the first line of the autoplay menu (with product name reference), or if the
installation does not start automatically, double-click on the .exe file in the setup folder.
5.
Select the language for installation.
6.
An install wizard guides you through the steps of Gecdis installation:
Note: You can, if you want, use « Turbo Win » menus and shortcuts. To do so, check
the option Turbowin Mode in the Wizard Preconfiguration Choice page. However we do
not recommend using this mode. Indeed it has limits related to Gecdis interaction
modalities. For those who are using TurboWin, it is only intended to help them use
Gecdis ergonomics. See 0, page 48 for an overview of this mode.
7.
The CD-ROM content is then copied into your hard disk, and you can eject at the end of
the procedure.
8.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
3
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To uninstall Gecdis from your hard disk:
Step
I.1.3
Action
1.
Open Windows Control Panel.
2.
Select Add/Remove Programs.
3.
Select Gecdis in the list of programs and click Uninstall.
4.
An uninstallation wizard will guide you through the required steps.
5.
End of procedure.
LAUNCHING AND CLOSING GECDIS
1
2
Figure 2 - Launching Gecdis
Gecdis launching and closing are quite typical of Windows applications, but you must be
sure to have connected the dongle software on the computer.
4
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To launch Gecdis:
Step
1.
Action
On the desktop system, there is definitely a shortcut to launch Gecdis. Or otherwise, in
the Windows taskbar, click Start, Programs, iXBlue, then click the line corresponding to
the product name (as SeaXpert, Gecdis-C...) to open the last menu and click again on
the line product name.
The welcome dialog box opens.
2.
In the list of the User field, select the user you want to log on and enter the password for
this user in the Password field:
3.
Click OK.
Note: At first start or if you have set a password or more users, you will identifier just
after the splash screen to continue launching the software. Otherwise, the identification
step is ignored.
4.
End of procedure.
To close Gecdis:
Step
1.
Action
Click System and then Exit.
A confirmation window is displayed.
2.
Click Yes.
Note: Before closing, the software saves all the parameters necessary to restart in the
same state.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
5
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.2
How to Use the Equipment
I.2.1
THE KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
Shortcut keys offer you another way to accomplish common tasks. In many cases,
shortcut keys help you to work faster. Using a shortcut key usually consists in pressing
and holding one key while pressing a second key.
Important
Important
THE CONCEPT OF ACTIVE WINDOW IS IMPORTANT FOR MANAGING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS,
PARTICULARLY WITH DEAD RECKONING CONTROLS ON A MOBILE ARE INTERCEPTED ONLY BY THE
MAIN VIEW.
SEE II.10.2.1, PAGE 47 TO CONFIGURE THE ACTIVE WINDOW.
I.2.1.1
Gecdis Standard Shortcuts:
The following is a list of the shortcut keys currently available in Gecdis. In the following
keyboard picture, shortcuts numbers have been assigned to keys. Each number
corresponds to a shortcut key combination.
1
2/3 4/5 6/7
8
9
10
11/12
13/14 15
23/29
38
22/28
30
31
32/35
33/36
14
24-29
34-37
3/5/7
12
17-29
37
16
Figure 3 - Keyboard
Table 1 - Shortcuts
Nb
To
1
Access online help.
2
Centre on Own Ship.
3
4
6
Press
+
Skip to relative motion mode.
Zoom up.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
25-27
39
16
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Nb
5
Press
To
Select the best scale.
+
6
7
Zoom down.
Close view that has focus (with the exception of the main view).
+
8
Skip to North-up mode.
9
Skip to Head-up mode.
10
Create a Man Over Board event.
11
Select the next color mode.
12
Select the previous color mode.
+
13
Acknowledge an alarm.
14
15
Maximize or restore the size of the main view.
16
Validate (left click).
17
Switch between mouse centre or chart consultation modes.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
Show/Hide the alarm menu.
+
1
2
Reduce the mobile’s SOW .
+
Increase the mobile’s1 SOW2.
+
Reduce the mobile’s1 COW2.
+
Increase the mobile’s1 COW2.
+
Reduce the mobile’s1 depth2.
+
Increase the mobile’s1 depth2.
+
+
+
+
+
Reduce the mobile’s1 drift speed2.
Increase the mobile’s1 drift speed2.
This mobile is one that is currently selected or the ownship if none is selected.
Only if the information is configured on an estimated source.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
7
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Nb
26
27
28
29
Press
To
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Reduce the mobile’s1 drift course2.
Increase the mobile’s1 drift course2.
Reduce the mobile’s1 height of tide2.
Increase the mobile’s1 height of tide2.
30
Divide the zoom by 10.
31
Raise the zoom by 10.
32
Zoom down.
33
Zoom up.
34
Window zooms.
35
Reduce the window zoom.
+
36
Enlarge the window zoom.
+
37
Inverse the zoom window.
+
38
39
I.2.2
Print the main view.
or
or
or
Move the mobile position of the relative motion.
ENTERING TEXTS
Text can be entered to define several elements:
• A position
• Numerical characters (heading, speed, distance, date)
• Free text
In some cases, text is entered “in a controlled way”. So when a specific kind of character
is to be entered, it is not possible to enter another one. For example, if the character
should be a number, it is not possible to enter an alphabetical character. Likewise, while
editing a heading, you will not be able to enter a value which is superior to 359.9°.
8
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.2.2.1
Geographic Editor
As this editor allows you to enter a position in any format, the validity of characters
entered is not monitored in real time, but at the end of the entry.
The geographical editor is special because it has a button (with a cross) to use the mouse
in a geographic view to set the new position.
Figure 4 - Geographic editor
It also has a contextual menu to initialize the text in another format:
Figure 5 - Geographic editor contextual menu
I.2.3
THE MOUSE
Figure 6 - Using the Trackball
The mouse is a pointing device allowing you to operate almost any action on the software.
It consists of a ball that allows moving the cursor on screen and two or three buttons, each
of them having a specific use.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
9
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.3
Gecdis Overview
I.3.1
THE SCREEN
Figure 7 - The Workspace
Gecdis consists of several windows and bars:
• The main view
• The menu bar
• Title bars
• Toolbars
• Information windows
• Secondary windows (Chart Overview, Pilot, consultation, etc.)
• And other specific windows (Alarms, dialogs, information about charts/cells...)
I.3.1.1
The Main View
This is the area's largest map display application.
Allows displaying several layers of information the user can select (e.g.: chart, user
objects, mobiles, radar data).
The main view enables to display several types of information layers that the user can
select:
• Chart,
• User objects,
10
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Mobiles (ownship, target...), data provided by the sensors available onboard (radar,
trawl system sensors...),
• Additional data provided by commercial databases (current, bathymetry, sediments,
oceano...).
I.3.1.2
The Menu Bar
Gecdis is a Windows based software containing different menus.
Figure 8 - The menu bar
Here is the list of the basic menus and their use. This list can increase depending on your
options (Radar, Oceanography, etc.).
Figure 9 - An example menu - the Display menu
The Windows type menu bar lists all software menus. A menu is a list of commands that
have in common the action they allow to do. It consists of:
• Submenus allowing you to access another menu (example: Orientation). Those kinds
of submenus are followed with an arrow;
• Commands allowing you to open dialog boxes (example: Centre on Place…). Those
commands are followed with suspension points;
• Commands running directly an action (example: Ecdis Mode).
Selecting a command highlights it in blue. When it is not possible to use a command, this
one is grayed (example: Best Scale).
The menu bar includes the following menus:
• System, mainly manages the configuration, print, user change and exit application.
• Display, allow you to use some ECDIS main functions (zoom, colour modes, etc).
• Mobile, manages the main controls for fleet of mobile.
• Navigation, manages navigation elements and autopilot.
• User Object, creates and manages the user objects.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
11
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• View, enables the display of the different windows on the screen and allows you to
configure display contexts.
• ?, displays information about the software.
Some other menus may be added depending on the current Gecdis version. These
menus are as follows:
• Radar allows you to use Gecdis as a radar
• Bathy allows you to configure and display the bathymetry. You can display a colored
layer representing charted depth and also isolines
• AMLs presents the commands required to use additional data layers that have been
designed to satisfy maritime defense requirements
• Weather allows you to display wind and pressure parameters at a particular day and
time.
• Tide allows you to display and configure the display of tides.
• ...
Important
THE DISPLAY OF THE MENU BAR DEPENDS ON USER RIGHTS LOGGED ON, FOR EXAMPLE BY
DEFAULT NAVIGATORS AND GUESTS USERS DO NOT HAVE ACCESS.
I.3.1.3
Title Bars
Each window or dialog box contains a title bar. Some of them display a title; others display
several pieces of information that cannot be modified, which is the case for the title bar of
the main view.
Figure 10 - Main view bar title
The pieces of information are as follows:
• The motion control type (TM or RM),
• The chart type (ENC, ARCS…),
• The projection,
• The scale,
• The datum,
• And possibly other information provided by the cartographic module.
I.3.1.4
Status Bar
This is an area at the bottom of the software window dedicated to the display of system
information and waiting messages.
Figure 11 - The status bar
It is mainly composed with information in order:
12
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Local time (with time zone letter),
• Cursor position or screen center,
• Bearing Ownship-Cursor,
• Distance Ownship-Cursor,
• TTG Ownship-Cursor,
I.3.1.5
Toolbars
The toolbar serves as an easy-to-use interface for performing common functions. It
enables you to speed up the implementation of specific actions by a single click on a
button.
Figure 12 - Upper toolbar
There are 2 main toolbars:
• The upper toolbar (horizontal) with functions for navigation and security navigation,
• And the lateral toolbar (vertical) displaying the main functions for fishing operation and
the access to optional expert modules.
As for specific requirements, the skipper (or the operator when installing the application)
can create/modify the commands for each toolbar.
Important
W HEN THE MENU BAR IS NOT DISPLAYED (E.G.: IF A GUESTS-TYPED USER IS LOGGED ON), YOU
CANNOT CLOSE THE TOOLBAR.
I.3.1.6
Information Windows
Critical
information
The banner with critical information enables to display data types that have been
previously selected. They are related to the ownship or to the cursor and are provided by
the sensors or computed.
To display the critical information window, you must select the corresponding command in
the View menu.
When a piece of information is not available (incorrect or nonexistent), the corresponding
field is filled with red ‘?’ character.
Information is displayed with different colors depending on their accurateness:
• High and normal quality information is displayed in green.
• Invalid information is displayed in red.
• Undefined information is displayed in gray.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
13
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 13 - Critical information window
This information bar can be displayed either on the chart, or in the information bar in the
right hand side of the screen. When displayed on the chart, you can move it to any
position on the chart area with the mouse.
Important
IN ECDIS MODE, THIS WINDOW IS AUTOMATICALLY FORCED INTO THE RIGHT HAND SIDE OF THE
SCREEN
The
information bar
Allows you to display previously selected pieces of information that are computed or that
come from sensors.
To display the information bar, you must select the corresponding command in the View
menu.
You can superpose several bars, creating bars by themes (for example, one bar may
stand for Own Ship’s information and another one for information about a route that is
monitored).
When a piece of information is not available (incorrect or nonexistent), the corresponding
field is not filled in.
Pieces of information are displayed with different colors depending on their accurateness:
• High-quality pieces of information are displayed in blue (e.g.: a position acquired in
differential mode)
• Normal quality pieces of information are displayed in black/white.
• Invalid pieces of information are displayed in red (e.g.: a piece of information whose
acquisition maximum timeout is over).
Figure 14 - Default information bar 1 (Ownship)
Figure 15 - Default information bar 2 (System)
To skip from a bar to another, click on it.
To configure a bar, right click on it and then click Customize… (see section II.11 page 51).
Information
pages
14
Information pages allow you to display previously selected pieces of information in
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
another form than information bars.
To display information pages, you must select the corresponding command in the View
menu.
Three tabs are present by default, each of them displaying pieces of information by
theme: about the Own Ship, the system and route monitoring.
You can add or delete tabs and/or pieces of information to create themes. For this, right
click on the window and click Customize… (see section II.11 page 51)
Figure 16 - Information pages
I.3.1.7
Secondary Windows
Secondary windows (General view, Channel view, Pilot View, etc.) correspond to a
specific use of Gecdis. Their common characteristics are as follows:
• They can be displayed from the View menu, except the Object information window,
which is displayed after selecting an object in the main view.
• By default they are docked (most of the time), i.e. they are “fixed” in a location of the
screen that has been previously defined. They can be moved outside the area; then
they are in floating mode and it is possible to resize them. You can also locate several
views side by side or one above the other. In the latter case, the first view is displayed
above the second one.
• They can be part of a display context. A display context is a configuration of the screen
layout that contains, amongst other things, windows that have been previously
selected by the user. You can save this configuration, to use and display it later (see
III.7, page 69).
Object
information
windows
When selecting an object in the geographic view, a window is displayed on the right of the
screen (by default). It can be moved outside the area by clicking on the white arrow tip
.
In the upper part of the window, the selected object is described. In the lower part of the
window there are buttons to perform different actions based on the selected object.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
15
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 17 – Object information window
Those buttons are not identical; they depend on the selected object. For example a route
will be the only object with an available button called Planned Route, this button allows to
select the route as the one to be monitored.
List windows
The list windows (e.g., list of user objects) allow you to manage lists that are sorted out in
a hierarchical way. Generally they consist of:
• A menu bar (above),
• A tree that gathers all the folders of the lists (on the left),
• The contents of the element which is selected in the tree.
The contents of these kinds of windows are more likely to fit across widthways. That is
why they default below in the screen.
I.3.1.8
Information about Chart/Cell
Information about the chart and/or the cell can be found in the bottom right side of the
screen:
• Click on this area to display the whole message:
• Click again to close the whole message.
I.3.1.9
Pop-up Menus
A pop-up menu is a menu that appears on the screen when you right click, and whose
options correspond to the current clicked object.
When you right click the main view on empty area, a pop-up menu displays; this menu
includes some commands such as the ability to change user. Other pop-up menus can be
displayed, depending on the part of the screen in which you have clicked (e.g., in the
Channel window) or circumstances (right click on a selected user object).
16
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.3.1.10
Dialog Boxes
A dialog box is a specific area of the screen that is displayed after a user’s action – when
the user gives an order to the software that requires further information or to make choices
between several options before running.
There are two kinds of dialog boxes:
• Modal dialog boxes (e.g.: System, Setting, General configuration…): this kind of dialog
box requires that the user gives the adequate information before he can continue to
work.
• Modeless dialog boxes (e.g.: Mobile, Own Ship Dead Reckoning…): this kind of dialog
box is left open as long as the user does not close it; it can then be used several times
for different purposes, because the user can work while this dialog box is open.
I.3.2
THE CURSOR
In main view, the cursor appears in different forms and reflects a current action:
ECS
ECDIS
mode
mode
Action
Default mode, center with left click and consultation with right click.
Chart consultation mode by pressing the Ctrl key.
Object move in progress.
Geographic scrolling in any direction by pressing the left mouse button.
Geographic scrolling to the east (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
Geographic scrolling to the north (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
Geographic scrolling to the north-east (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
Geographic scrolling to the north-west (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
Geographic scrolling to the south (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
Geographic scrolling to the south-east (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
Geographic scrolling to the south-west (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
Geographic scrolling to the west (when the cursor is near the edge of the view).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
17
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
ECS
ECDIS
mode
mode
Action
Window zoom in by pressing Shift key.
Zoom out by pressing [Ctrl]+[Shift] keys.
I.3.3
USING VIEWS
Gecdis screen includes three default locations for views and windows: above, on the right
and below.
When you display a view or a window for the first time, it is located by default on one of
these three locations.
You can then move and resize it in order to match with your needs (displaying specific
views on specific locations).
You can locate two views side by side or one above the other. In the latter case, the first
view is displayed above the second one.
This window management is handled by the display contexts in View menu (see III.7,
page 69) and all positions of the windows are saved.
To move a view:
Step
1.
Action
Click the blue title bar of the view you want to move and drag it holding down the left
button of the mouse.
2.
If you drag the view outside the location in which it should be docked; the view is
displayed without icons, in floating mode.
Note: If you move the location of a view and then you close it, the next time you will
display it again it will be located on the new location.
3.
I.3.4
End of procedure.
ACCESSING COMMANDS
Gecdis is a Windows-based software, and like any Windows-based software, it allows
you to access commands in different ways:
• In the menu bar.
• With Shortcuts.
• With the toolbars.
• With contextual menus.
• With context-sensitive buttons that appear on the right of the screen when you select
an object.
18
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• In the dialog boxes and windows.
I.4
Important Features to Know
I.4.1
THE OWN SHIP
Own ship in Gecdis associated with one or more mobile. The Own Ship (with initial
uppercase) is the main vessel and is the basis for many treatments (information relative
to, alarms, route monitoring, man over board ...).
Several secondary vessels can be added, their goal is to represent other sources of
information to compare to that of the main vessel (Own Ship). For example, the Own Ship
can be acquired from a GPS and a secondary vessel can be estimated. In this example, if
at a given time, the GPS fails, the user can reverse the ship and have therefore estimated
Own Ship.
To differentiate vessels in views, the Own Ship is drawn in black/white, the secondary
vessels in gray.
When launching Gecdis for the first time, the Own Ship is created with a set of information
(position, SOG, COG, SOW, true heading, depth) configured on an automatic source.
Generally to receive data, the stream where the sensors are connected must be added,
configured and checked.
Figure 18 - Default Own Ship configuration
I.4.2
ECDIS AND ECS MODES
By a single mouse click, Gecdis allows you to skip from ECS (Electronic Chart System),
which is a non ECDIS mode, to ECDIS mode. For this, you can use the command in the
View menu, or use the default button sets in the horizontal toolbar.
The status of ECDIS mode is given in the bottom left corner of the screen.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
19
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 19- ECDIS mode selected
In this case, indication is displayed with
green color
Figure 20- ECDIS mode not selected
In this case, indication is displayed with red
color and the text is crossed out in red
When ECDIS option is not included in the license, no indication is given.
Switching to ECDIS mode brings several changes in the display of geographical views
and several functionalities:
• If the current chart provider is not compliant ECDIS, no map data will be displayed.
• The cursor has the same shapes as those defined by the ECDIS (see I.3.2 page 17).
• The user objects follow ECDIS appearance: they are orange.
• The symbol of event objects is drawn with special icon (MOB for example).
• Some settings that relate to ships’ appearances cannot be performed (see IV.5 page
117). So ship’s appearance and the representation of its vectors, labels, etc. may be
different.
• The critical information window is docked if it were floating on the main view (chart
display mode only).
• The inconsistent position alarm is forced to activate if it was inactive.
Figure 21- ECS mode
Figure 22- ECDIS mode
In this case, mobile appearance is non ECDIS, user
In this case, mobile appearance is ECDIS forced,
objects have their own colors.
and user objects are always drawn in orange.
I.4.3
MAN OVER BOARD
Man Over Board is a very important command in Gecdis.
This command is available in different ways:
• In the menu Navigation by selecting the first line Man Over Board !
• In the horizontal toolbar by default, there is an assigned button.
20
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• With the shortcut [F8] key.
This command is not confirmed, a man overboard is created just after validation.
A visible symbol corresponding to the event is created at the Own Ship position and
bearing-range line is added.
I.4.4
PRINTING THE SCREEN
Anytime, the software allows you to print the main view, as shown in the screen provided
with mobiles and user objects. Everything outside the main view (views, bars, and even
dialog boxes) does not appear in the printout.
This function is included in the System menu. For greater convenience, you could press
the [Print Screen] key of your keyboard. This key allows you to access directly the
Windows print dialog box.
The default orientation of the print is always fixed in landscape mode.
Figure 23 - Printing example
I.4.5
THE MODULES
It should be understood that Gecdis is modular software, i.e., that its features will be
dependent on the number of installed and loaded modules according to the license
provided with the software.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
21
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
As its features are not fixed in advance, its interface is evolving accordingly. It is for this
reason that the sample screens in this manual may not always be in accordance with your
system.
Two types are distinguished module:
• The cartographic modules that are providers of chart data. They are responsible for
their own menus to manage their various parameters and display their data. There can
only be one active cartographic module. In this category are such basic module
Planisphere which manages the display of a world map, and ENCs evolved module
that manages the ECDIS charts.
The available sub-menu System, Settings, Charts, Chart Provider allows you to
control the cartographic modules installed and possibly change the module to use.
• The modules performing various tasks ranging from database management to the
management of I/O, mobile, navigation tools, special views, etc ... Unlike the
cartographic modules, Gecdis can load as much as the license allows. Some are
dependent on the other, such as Route module does not load if the User module does
not. The vast majority of Gecdis menus are built entirely by these modules.
The About Gecdis window allows you to check the number of modules used by clicking
in the window and using the mouse wheel
I.4.6
BACK-UP
The backup functionality allows you to backup, into your desired location (the hard disk, a
removable disk, etc.), Gecdis settings and data.
Important
SOME FILES ARE EXCLUDED FROM BACKUP:
• THE LICENSE FILES
• BATHYMETRIC DATABASES IN USE FOR RECORD OR DISPLAY
This backup may be useful in the following cases:
• For a specific reason, Gecdis suddenly stops and configuration data have not been
saved
• A unit into your hard disk has a breakdown
22
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To run a backup:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Run backup.
The Backup window opens:
2.
Choose to backup only the settings or settings +data by clicking or not the Backup only
settings option box.
If you select settings+ data, the duration of the backup can be long.
3.
Click
button to select the directory to save the backup file.
The backup file will be saved in the folder you have selected. The backup file name will
be GecdisBack_yyyymmdd-hhmmss.gbk, where yyymmdd means year month day
and hhmmss means hour minute second.
4.
End of procedure.
To restore a backup:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, select Restore a backup and select the backup file to be restored.
2.
Click Open.
Once a backup file is selected to be restored, Gecdis stops, after you have confirmed
you agree to exit the program. The selected backup file will be automatically restored on
the next Gecdis start.
3.
I.5
End of procedure.
What to Do Before Departure
The following describes some operations you should do before your departure and where
you could find information about them in this manual.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
23
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.5.1
I.5.1.1
CUSTOMIZING
Configuring your Screen Size
Configuring your screen size is a very important step. If it is not correctly configured,
objects of the main view may be disproportionate.
See section II.2.1, page 30 to configure your screen size.
I.5.1.2
Customizing Gecdis Screen
You can customize some parts of the Gecdis screen. For example, you can optimize the
placement of the various windows that you need, define what own ship information and in
what order you want to view or select the commands you use most often.
See section II.5, page 35 to configure the toolbar.
See section II.11, page 51 to configure information windows.
See section III.7, page 69 for more information about Gecdis customization.
I.5.2
I.5.2.1
CHECKING
Datum
You must check that your system is configured with the correct datum to avoid errors
while positioning.
See section II.4, page 34 to select the current datum.
I.5.2.2
Sensors
Check the configuration of your sensors. Each sensor must be connected to a
communication port of your machine. You add these communication ports to Gecdis and
configure them to acquire specific sentences.
See section IV.6.2, page 100 to configure a stream.
See section IV.6.5, page 112 to configure information.
I.5.2.3
Implementing Alarms
Many alarms are managed in Gecdis. Here are some links to set some alarms.
See section II.6, page 37 to configure alarms display.
See section III.5, page 63 to consult alarms.
See section II.8, page 45 to configure the danger detection.
See section IV.3, page 76 to manage specific alarms to Own Ship.
See section VII.5, page 212 to assign to an area an alarm when a ship enters or leaves.
I.5.2.4
Route Management
Routes are a very important step to navigation. You will certainly need to create routes
before any departure with a new itinerary.
See section VII.3.1, page 194 to create a route.
See section VII.3.6, page 202 to skip to route monitoring.
24
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
See section VII.1, page 188 to learn more about user database.
I.5.2.5
Charts
Check that you have imported all the charts you need for your voyage in the chart
databases.
See section V.2.3, page 129 to manage the ENC chart database.
See section V.2.12.4, page 149 to set values for different water contours and depths that
will ensure safe navigation.
See section V.3.2.1, page 166 to manage the ARCS chart database.
I.6
Navigation Tasks
I.6.1
OVERVIEW
Navigation consists in four basic tasks:
• Voyage planning,
• Positioning,
• Steering,
• Monitoring.
I.6.2
VOYAGE PLANNING
When you plan a voyage, you prepare it i.e., you define, calculate and optimize the route.
You also have to prepare your charts (insertion, updating):
• Route planning,
• Chart calculation,
• Chart planning.
I.6.2.1
Route Planning
Route planning allows you to modify an existing route or create a new one.
A route is defined by the following elements:
• Position of each waypoint,
• Turn radius for each waypoint,
• Safe water calculation based on Safety limits,
• Lane for each leg (cross track error).
Information is available:
• Alarm window to alert operator,
• The object information window to have information on the route, when selected,
• Pilot window.
Customization:
• Information windows allow to display your desired pieces of information,
• The toolbar allows you to insert the buttons that correspond to your needs.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
25
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.6.2.2
Route Calculation
Route calculation for voyage planning includes the following:
• Calculation of the profile of the route:

Distance between consecutive waypoints,

Course between waypoints,

Wheel-over calculation,

Total distance,

Estimated time for voyage.
• Check of the route:

Check of the dangers of the route.
• Voyage optimization:

Time table optimization,

Optimization based on economical factors,

ECDIS processor calculates optimum speed and course between each waypoint,
and the ETA following specified data.
I.6.2.3
Chart Planning
• Loading of new ENC charts,
• Updating existing ENC charts,
• User generated safe water areas.
I.6.3
POSITIONING
Positioning is the way to calculate and keep updated the position of the ship during a
voyage.
The calculation of the position of the ship is based on available navigation sensors:
• Direct positioning of sensors,
• Dead reckoning,
• Manual correction.
I.6.3.1
Direct Positioning of Sensors
Satellite navigation systems:
• GPS navigator,
• GPS navigator with a differential correction facility, DGPS.
I.6.3.2
Dead Reckoning Equipment
Ship’s heading measurements devices:
• Gyro compass (one or two),
• Magnetic compass,
• GPS gyro compass,
• Inertial unit.
Speed measuring devices:
26
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Single axis speed logs,
• Dual axis speed logs,
• Radio navigation equipment,
• Satellite navigation equipment.
I.6.3.3
Manual Correction
User inputs corrections for the position to adjust the position of the antennas relative to
conning.
I.6.4
STEERING MODES
Steering includes all the different operation modes for steering in order to turn the ship
through planned voyage (harbor to harbor):
• Hand steering,
• Trackpilot steering,
• Waypoint approach mode.
I.6.4.1
Hand Steering
Hand steering mode:
• Steering wheel.
I.6.4.2
Trackpilot Steering
• Operator sets the required heading of the vessel,
• Turn radius is also set by operator,
• Turn is initiated by operator,
• The navigation system displays required heading, radius, rate of turn and predicted
turn.
I.6.4.3
Waypoint Approach Mode
• The system will follow the planned track to next waypoint,
• When reaching the next wheel-over the system alerts operator,
• The system performs the turn at planned radius.
I.6.5
MONITORING
Monitoring is a continuous check of navigation data, user actions and performances of the
system.
Part of the monitoring is also the display of electronic sea chart and conning information:
• Electronics sea charts,
• Conning information,
• Alarms,
• Man over board,
• Data logging.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
27
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
I.6.5.1
Display of Electronic Sea Chart
• Own ship position,
• Planned track,
• Grounding alarm,
• Chart information.
I.6.5.2
Display of Conning Information
• Ship’s heading,
• Speed (single or dual-axis),
• Rate of turn order and direction,
• Depth,
• Wind speed and direction,
• Waypoint bearing,
• Waypoint ETA,
• Speed order,
• Steering mode.
I.6.5.3
Alarms
• Route monitoring,
• Position calculation,
• Position monitoring,
• Waypoint approach,
• Sensor failure,
• System failure,
• Incorrect operator action,
• Unsafe water areas.
I.6.5.4
Man over Board
• Built-in function for man over board.
I.6.5.5
Data Logging
• History book,
• Voyage recording.
28
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
II
GENERAL CONFIGURATION
II.1
Identification
The Identification tab display ship name and station name defined during installation.
If several Gecdis are installed on the same ship and if synchronization is used, the name
of the station must be different for each installation.
The Identification tab allows you to change ship name and station name.
To access the Identification tab:
Step
II.2
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, and General configuration…
2.
In the Configuration dialog box, select the Identification tab:
3.
End of procedure
Display
The Display tab allows you to configure the main display properties: color modes, motion
control and screen size.
To access the Display tab:
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, and General configuration…
2.
In the Configuration dialog box, select the Display tab:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
29
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
3.
II.2.1
End of procedure.
SCREEN SIZE
Important
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONFIGURE THE EXACT DIMENSIONS OF YOUR SCREEN. IF YOU
DO NOT CONFIGURE THEM, THE MAIN VIEW AND ALL OF ITS ELEMENTS MAY BE DISPROPORTIONATE
Two possibilities to adjust the screen size:
• Automatic: in this case, the screens dimensions are determined automatically based
on the placement of windows on the screens. This is the most accurate and safest
choice, especially when changing or multi-screens. Displays connected and
recognized by the system are listed in the upper area specifying their dimensions.
• Fixed size: in this case, the dimensions of the screen are entered manually. This is
useful if the connected display is not recognized by the system or if its size cannot be
known automatically (e.g. with a video projector).
Note on ECDIS compliance: when the size of your screen is correctly configured,
Gecdis displays the cartographic texts (ENC) with a height of 3.5 mm, which
corresponds to a nominal viewing distance of one meter.
II.2.2
COLOR MODES
In ECDIS Calibrated display topic, you can automatically calibrate screen connected to a
serial port. In this case, you must select the type of display connected in the combo box.
30
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
The Black background in day mode option enables to display the cartographic in day
mode with black background. Normally, the background is white (default configuration).
The White background in dusk mode option enables to display the cartographic in dusk
mode with white background. Normally, the background is black (default configuration).
Overview of Color modes:
Colour mode
Result
Day with white background (default)
Day with black background
Dusk with black background (default)
Dusk with white background
Night with always black background
II.2.3
MOTION CONTROL
Motion control manages how the main view follows a mobile (Own Ship or any mobile).
You should know that the motion control has two modes: true and relative motion. See
III.4.3.1 page 60 for more information on these modes.
In true motion mode, a control area depending on the surface of the view is used to
confine the ship inside.
In addition to these modes, you can adjust motion control placement mode:
• The centered mode uses the center of the view to manage the motion control. In this
case, you can adjust the surface of the control area from 50% to 90%.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
31
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• The anticipated mode uses the course and speed over ground to determine the ideal
placement of the view to see as much as possible to the trajectory of vessel. In this
case, the surface of the control area is fixed to 50%.
Figure 24 - True motion control anticipated mode
Figure 25 - True motion control centered mode (area to 70%)
In the Motion Control topic, you can set the placement mode:
• Check Automatic off-centering depending on course over ground to select the
anticipated mode.
• Uncheck to select the centered mode. You can adjust the area ratio from 50% to 90%.
II.3
Configuring the Units
The Format tab allows you to choose the unit you will define for some parameters
(position, distance, speed, size, height, temperature, pressure and angular velocity), and
the number of figures after the decimal point. For example, if 1 (.x) has been configured
for the Height field, 20.44 knot will be rounded up to the first figure after the decimal point
(20.4 knot).
32
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To access the Format tab:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, and General configuration…
2.
In the Configuration dialog box, select the Format tab:
3.
End of procedure.
The configuration of the position is particular. Five formats are available:
• Geographic – Degree (°): Representation of the position in degrees, example :
43°610N – 007°265E
• Geo – Degree/Minute (DM): Representation of the position in degrees/minute,
example : 43°36'585 N – 004°15’902E
• Geo
–
Degree/Minute/Second
(DMS):
Representation
of
the
position
in
degrees/minute/second, example : 43°36’35’’109S – 007°15’54’’122E
• UTM – Standard (m): Representation of the position in UTM, example : 29L 388780
8374767
• UTM – Signed northing (m): Representation of the position in UTM signed northing,
example : 29L 388780 -1625233
You can select a default zone for formatting positions in UTM coordinate. In this case
Gecdis will format any angle to ± a zone rapport in the specified area. Outside this range,
the coordinates are expressed with the area assigned to the position.
If you select <Automatic> in Distance, distances will be measured in meters until
reaching 1 nautical mile.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
33
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
II.4
The Datum
The datum is a science that offers amongst other things constants that define the
relationship between a coordinate system and the real Earth (the geoid). There are many
different geodetic datum systems, depending on the country or region in the Earth. That is
why you may receive data (symbols, routes, etc) with another geodetic system than your
traditional system. You will then prefer to change the datum to have a perfect
representation of the position of this object.
By default, Gecdis uses the WGS84.
The acronym of the selected datum is indicated in the main view title bar.
To change the datum:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, and General configuration…
2.
In the Configuration dialog box, select the Datum tab.
3.
In this tab, you can see a short list of the main datum systems (ED50, ETRS89, NAD27,
NAD83 and WGS84). If you want to display all existing datums, uncheck the Short List
box.
4.
You can sort the datums in alphabetical order by acronym, name, country and ID clicking
the column headings.
5.
Click your desired datum and click OK.
The acronym of the datum you have just selected is indicated in the main view title bar.
6.
34
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
All parameters datum are from the special publication of the IHO S-60 (id, name,
values...)
II.5
The Toolbar
By default, the toolbar contains several icons associated with major commands (man over
board, zoom+, zoom-, centre on Own Ship...), but with Gecdis, you are not limited only to
these actions, you can add any button representing the actions you use more frequently.
So you can create a toolbar customized to your activity and your needs.
II.5.1
INSERTING A NEW BUTTON
Figure 26 - Configuring the Toolbar
To create a shortcut button in the toolbar:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Settings and General Configuration…, or right click directly
on the toolbar and then select Customize....
2.
On the Toolbar page, select the button where you want insert after your new button.
3.
After selecting the emplacement, click Insert Button.
The new button is added to the desired location.
4.
You need to select, in the tree structure of the menus, the associated command for the
new button. Items already in the toolbar are automatically disabled.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
35
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
5.
Action
Select an icon from the library by clicking the button Image or browsing the hard drive for
the desired image by clicking “...” button:
II.5.2
6.
Validate by clicking OK.
7.
End of procedure.
CONTROLS
The following list describes the various controls used to manage the configuration of
toolbars:
• Use large buttons, allows the use of large buttons (64x64) or small (32x32). This
parameter affects the size of the toolbar (and possibly the information bar).
• Show tooltips, controls whether a tooltip is displayed or not when the cursor hovers
over a button.
• Toolbar 1, Toolbar 2, allows you to select the toolbar to change.
• Insert Button, adds a button based on the location of the selected.
• Delete, deletes the current button.
• , moves to the left or right current button.
• Button – Menu Command, selects the associated command with the button.
• Button – Image, selects the image associated with the button from the library or
browsing the hard drive.
• Button – Tooltip, allows entering the tooltip associated with the button.
• Button – With Separator, adds a separator before the button.
36
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
II.6
Alarms
Configuring alarm display consists in choosing in the list of alarm groups the ones you
want to display in the alarm window.
Regardless of the alarm window, all alarms are archived and consultable in the black box.
This configuration is made with checkboxes. By default some alarms are unchecked.
Alarm groups are gathered, depending on the modules they belong to (System, Routes,
ENC Charts, etc.). So this is easier to select them.
Figure 27 - Configuring Alarms
To configure alarm display:
Step
Action
1.
Click the System menu, click Settings and then General Configuration…
2.
In the Configuration dialog box, click the Alarms tab.
3.
Check the alarms you want to display in the alarm bar.
4.
To go back to the default configuration, click Default button.
5.
Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK, or just validate by clicking Apply.
6.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
37
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
II.7
The Users
Gecdis can be used by many different kinds of users, each one having specific needs. By
default, four groups of users are defined: Administrators, Captains, Navigators and
Guests.
On one hand, the Administrators group can use all Gecdis functionalities, without any
limitation. On the other hand, the other groups are associated to specific access rights you
can configure with a checkboxes system.
The three groups have different access rights to commands. So when you will assign a
command to the Supervisor group, only this group will be able to use it. However, if you
assign one of them to the Navigator group, the Supervisor group will also be able to use it,
and assigning one of them to the Guest group will allow the Captain and Navigator groups
to use it as well.
II.7.1
ADDING A USER
Figure 28 - Adding a user
To add a user to the list of users:
Step
38
Action
1.
Click System, Settings, General Configuration... and then the Users tab.
2.
Click the New User button. The Name field is filled out with the New User label.
3.
Enter the name of the new user in this field.
4.
In Group field, select to which group you want the new user to belong.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
5.
Action
Enter a password in the Password field and confirm this password in the Confirm
password field.
6.
Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK, or just validate by clicking Apply.
The user has been added.
7.
You can now open a new session with this new user. You can also delete a user by
selecting it and clicking the Delete User button
8.
End of procedure.
Important
IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DELETE THE ADMINISTRATOR USER.
II.7.2
CONFIGURING USERS’ RIGHTS
Almost every command of the software is assigned to access rights. This configuration
only concerns Captain, Navigator and Guest groups, the Administrator group can use all
the commands without any limitation.
If a user is not allowed to use a command, he will not be able to open the corresponding
dialog box, tab, etc.
This command is allowed for all users
Captains, Navigators and
Administrators can use this command
No user can use this command
(except Administrator)
Captains and Administrators can use
this command
Figure 29 - Configuring Access Rights
To configure access rights:
Step
Action
1.
Click System, Settings, General Configuration... and then the Users tab.
2.
Click Configure Rights… button.
The User Rights window is displayed (see Figure 29). This window allows you to select
the access rights for the Captain, Navigator and Guest types of users.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
39
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
Action
Do one of the following:
• To make an action available for the Captain types of users, check the box that
crosses the action and the Captains column.
• To make an action available for the Captain and Navigator type of users, check the
box that crosses the action and the Navigator column. Both types of users are
selected.
• To make an action available for all types of users, check the box that crosses the
action and the Guests column. All users are selected.
4.
You can delete an access right granted to a user by clicking on the corresponding
checkmark.
5.
II.7.3
End of procedure.
OPENING A NEW SESSION
While using Gecdis, it is possible to open a new session with a new user. This way, a new
user can log in without needing to close and re-open Gecdis. When a user logs in, his own
configuration is reloaded, with his specific rights (see section II.7.2).
To open a new session:
Step
1.
Action
Click System and Log Off x... (where x is the type of user that is currently connected),
or right-click on the chart and select the Log Off... command:
or
A message asks you to confirm that you wish to change session.
40
2.
Click Yes.
3.
In the User field, select the name of the user you want to log in.
4.
Enter the password in the Password field.
5.
Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK, or just validate by clicking Apply.
6.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
II.8
Danger Detection
The danger detection or anti-grounding option enables to detect any danger the ship may
encounter when following its route.
When the ship encounters an object considered as dangerous, an alarm is generated to
inform the mariner. Currently, only user objects and those of ENC chart can be detected.
To do this, you must first select one of these objects will be those dangerous. For this, see
section V.2.13 on page 152 to select ENC objects.
Two forms of detection are possible:
• A guard sector, defined by an angle and a distance limit.
Figure 30 - Guard sector
• A security polygon, defined by safety distance and a distance limit.
Figure 31 -Security polygon
The distance limit in both cases may be defined by:
• Simply by a distance value.
• By a time which is automatically converted by a distance depending on the speed of
the Own Ship in real time.
To configure danger detection:
Step
Action
1.
Click System, Settings, General Configuration... and then the Safety tab.
2.
Check radio button corresponding to Maximum distance or time to danger.
3.
Enter the value of the maximum distance or time.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
41
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
4.
Action
Check Use Guard Sector if you want a guard sector, otherwise, a security polygon is
used.
5.
Enter the Angular width of sector to watch for the guard sector or the Safety
Distance for the security polygon.
6.
Eventually, check Display zone to watch to see the representation of the safety area on
the screen.
7.
42
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To activate danger detection:
Step
II.9
Action
1.
Check the Danger Detection option in Navigation menu:
2.
End of procedure.
Synchronization
It is possible to synchronize data between several stations.
Two modes of synchronization are available:
• Distributed: each station checks whether changes have been done on the other
stations, and if needed, automatically duplicate changes in its own data.
Figure 32 – Synchronization: distributed mode
• Centralized: when a change is made on a station, this station update a copy of the data
on a network shared folder localized on a server. The other stations check changes
done on the shared folder, and if needed, automatically duplicate changes in its own
data.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
43
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 33 – Synchronization: centralized mode
• Data folder sharing
When distributed mode is selected, each station must share its local data folder.
The sharing is automatically done when this mode is selected. The default name of the
sharing is GecdisShare. If this sharing name is already used for another folder, the name
is modified 9 times until an available name has been found (GecdisShare1 to
GecdisShare9)
When centralized mode is selected, there is no need to share the data folder on each
station. The network shared folder must be manually shared with “read” and “write” rights.
Figure 34 - Synchronizing data
44
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To configure synchronization:
Step
1.
Action
Click the System menu, Settings, General Configuration... and then the
Synchronization tab.
2.
Select the mode of synchronization.
3.
In distributed mode, select the shared folders on the other stations and click the checkbox.
In centralized mode, select only the common shared folder on network and click the
check-box
4.
Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK, or just validate by clicking Apply.
5.
End of procedure.
The check-boxes can be unchecked to invalidate the synchronization with the
corresponding stations or with the server.
Please, ensure that each station has a different name in Identification tab.
II.10
User Interface
The User Interface tab allows the user to configure the software interface.
Figure 35 - User interface configuration
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
45
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To configure the user interface:
Step
1.
Action
Click the System menu, Settings, General Configuration... and then the User
Interface tab.
II.10.1
2.
Check the parameters you want to use (see section II.10.2).
3.
Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK, or just validate by clicking Apply.
4.
End of procedure.
TOOLTIPS IN CHART VIEWS
You can define rules to display a tooltip when you pass over an object with the mouse in
the chart views.
Figure 36 - Tooltip in chart view
Main parameters:
• Enable tooltips in chart views, enable or disable the automatic display of the tooltip.
• Do not display tooltips for areas, enable or disable the display of the tooltip when
the mouse cursor is inside the area, if the cursor is on an area point or border, the
tooltip will be displayed independently of this parameter.
Figure 37 - Tooltip with commands
46
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Display commands in tooltips parameters:
• Never, commands are never displayed in the tooltip.
• When mouse is inside, commands are displayed in the tooltip when mouse is inside
(the tooltip).
• Always, commands are always displayed in the tooltip.
II.10.2
GENERAL PARAMETERS
II.10.2.1 Active Window
In the Windows ® environment, there is always only one active window at any given time.
This is the window that receives events such as pressing a key or moving the mouse.
In Gecdis, as there may be several windows displayed at the same time, it is advisable to
set the automatic activation of the window under the mouse cursor by checking the box
Activate window under cursor. Otherwise, the last active window will remain as the
operator will designate a not clicking.
Important
THE CONCEPT OF ACTIVE WINDOW IS IMPORTANT FOR MANAGING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS,
PARTICULARLY WITH DEAD RECKONING CONTROLS ON A MOBILE THAT ARE INTERCEPTED ONLY BY
THE MAIN VIEW.
Figure 38 - Active window, example with the main view
The active window is identified with the color of the title bar that is different from others.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
47
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
II.10.2.2 TurboWin Mode
The TurboWin mode enables to activate an interaction mode close to the mode used by
TurboWin software.
This mode is very special because it attempts to replicate the old ergonomics TurboWin
(and Turbo2000) with a horizontal menu bar at the bottom of the screen where the mouse
cursor is locked.
Figure 39 - TurboWin mode
In this mode, the top menu bar and toolbars are hidden.
Controls
This bottom menu is controlled by the mouse and keyboard:
Mouse
Keyboard
Horizontal
displacements
or
To...
Change the menu selection.
Perform the selected command or call another menu (if the text is
underlined).
Left button
Exit the menu to perform an action with the mouse in another window
(acknowledge an alarm for example).
Middle button
48
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Mouse
Keyboard
To...
Change the current menu, by returning to the previous or jumping to the
next if the first level.
Right button
Following are the item states:
State
Example
Details
Unselected
Here is unselected command.
Unselected
Here is unselected command with a long description.
Selected
If the operator presses Enter, the associated command is executed.
Disabled
Here is disabled command, nothing will happen if selected.
Underlined
An underlined command indicates calling a submenu.
Checked
A frame indicates a checked command.
Figure 40 - Inactive menu, after pressing Home
Figure 41 - Inactive menu, after opening a dialog
When the menu loses focus (if the operator presses the Home key, or a command opens
a dialog box, for example), it changes appearance to indicate inactivity.
In this case, to return to the menu, press the Home key, the middle click or close the
dialog box.
Main menus
Important
W ARNING, THESE MAY CHANGE DEPENDING ON THE MODULES AND SOFTWARE LICENSE
PROVIDED.
Following are the main menus:
No.
Menu
st
1 menu
nd
2 menu
rd
3 menu
Settings
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
49
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
No.
Menu
Navigation
Create
Mobile
Route
Library
Views
How to stop
using the
TurboWin
mode
Here's how to deactivate the TurboWin mode:
Step
50
Action
1.
In the first menu, select and validate SETTINGS command:
2.
In the SETTINGS menu, select and validate GENERAL command:
3.
Select the User Interface tab.
4.
Uncheck TurboWin mode check-box:
5.
Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK, or just validate by clicking Apply.
6.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
II.11
The Information Windows
Gecdis gives you the possibility to configure the information bar (see the Information bar)
and pages (see Information pages) displayed on the screen.
To access the dialog box that allows you to modify them:
Step
1.
Action
Right-click in the information bar or in the Information pages then select Customize…:
The Information windows displays:
2.
End of procedure.
The Information Windows dialog box allows you to change the information you will display
in the information bar and pages. You can add several types of information about the
system or a specific mobile.
The information is organized by category identified by a symbol:
•
, main information,
•
, auxiliary information,
•
, ship handling information,
•
, weather information,
•
, seabed information.
•
, target/buoy information,
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
51
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
•
, property information,
•
, route information,
•
, main information system,
•
, cursor information system,
•
, auxiliary cursor information system,
The dialog box of the configuration consists of two parts:
• Windows, area corresponding to the information bar or pages to configure.
• Information, area corresponding to the list of pieces of information from the bar or
pages.
Each area has its own toolbar to:
• Add (a bar, page or information) after the selected item, if no item is selected, the item
is added to the beginning.
• Delete the selected item.
• Edit the properties of the selected item: the title for a bar or page, the label for
information.
Editing properties of geographic position information is used to select the display
format: geographic format with specific datum or UTM format for example.
• Move the selected item.
Important
TITLES AND DEFAULT LABELS CANNOT BE TRANSLATED INTO THE APPROPRIATE LANGUAGE, THE
DEFAULT TERMS HAVE BEEN TRANSLATED INTO THE LANGUAGE OF THE FIRST EXECUTION OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS IS BECAUSE THE OPERATOR CAN CHANGE THE TERMS AS HE WANTS, WHICH
MEANS THAT THE SOFTWARE DOES NOT TRANSLATE.
52
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To add a piece of information:
Step
1.
Action
Select in the left window, the name of the bar or pages to which you want to add a piece
of information.
2.
Select the item in the right part where your new information will be inserted.
3.
Click the
button, or click right on the list and select Add information command.
The Add information dialog box opens, displaying the available pieces of information.
4.
Select a parent (i.e. to which element information you will add must be related).
Note: When you select *OWN SHIP* as the parent, the piece of information you will add
will always concern the Own Ship, even if you change it afterwards.
5.
The list of pieces of information is made with those on the parent and those absent from
the window. If you want to display all pieces of information, check the Display all
information box
6.
Select the piece of information you want to add.
7.
Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK, or just add by clicking Add.
8.
Optionally change the label by double clicking on it or using the property button.
9.
Repeat the same steps anytime you want to add a piece of information.
10. When finished, click OK on the first dialog box.
11. End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
53
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
III
GECDIS DISPLAY
The section I.3.1 (page 10) provides a detailed content of the Gecdis screen description.
This chapter presents different concepts to work properly with Gecdis.
III.1
The Scales
Gecdis gives you the possibility to change the scale of the main view, which default
ranges from 1/100 to 1/100 000 000. This range may change depending on the chart
module.
Important
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONFIGURE THE EXACT DIMENSIONS OF YOUR SCREEN (SEE
II.2.1 PAGE 30). IF YOU DO NOT CONFIGURE THEM, THE MAIN VIEW AND ALL OF ITS ELEMENTS MAY
BE DISPROPORTIONATE AND THE SCALE WILL NOT BE ACCURATE.
You can either change progressively the scale or assign directly a new scale.
Figure 42 - Default scales menu
To change the scale, you can:
• Use the Scale menu from Display menu directly to select the scale.
• Use the Display menu with scale command:

Best scale, selects the most appropriate scale for the current chart.

Window Zoom, focuses the view on a rectangle around the cursor (equals to
holding a left click holding the Shift key). When the rectangle is visible, you can
change its size with the + and - keys.

54
Zoom x10, multiplies the display by ten.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual

Zoom +, skips to the following scale (is roughly equivalent to double the scale).

Zoom -, skips to the precedent scale (is roughly equivalent to divide the scale by 2).

Zoom ÷10, divides the display by ten.
• Use the toolbars.
• Use the shortcuts, for that, see section I.2.1 page 6.
The scale is accurate at the center of the screen (it is adapted to the average latitude)
and is less accurate to the vertical edges, especially at very small scales.
III.2
Color Mode
Color graphics and text on the screen is dependent on the ambient light so as not to blind
the operator or be unreadable.
Important
USE OF THE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL MAY INHIBIT VISIBILITY OF INFORMATION AT NIGHT.
MOREOVER IT MODIFIES THE CURSOR AND THE COLORS OF THE SYSTEM EVEN WITH OTHER
APPLICATIONS THAN GECDIS.
Gecdis uses three color modes to be ECDIS compliant. These modes have been
specifically designed to be used at some point in the day:
• Day
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
55
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Dusk
•
Night
By default the background Day mode is white and Dusk mode is black. See section
II.2.2 page 30 to change this behavior.
To change the color mode, you can:
• Use the Colour Mode menu from Display menu and select the mode.
Figure 43 - The color modes menu
• Use the shortcuts, for that, see section I.2.1, page 6.
56
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
III.3
Centring on a Place
Wherever your main view is you can centre it on a specific place anywhere on Earth. The
places can also be edited, deleted, etc.
Centring on a place disable the motion mode on a mobile if it was active.
To centre the main view on a place:
Step
1.
Action
Click Display menu and then Centre on Place…
The following dialog box appears:
2.
In the Centre on Place dialog box, some default places are specified. Select the place on
which you want the main view to be centred.
3.
Optionally, in the Scale field change the scale you want to display the place with. This
main view will be centred on this place with the scale you have just specified.
4.
Click OK.
5.
End of procedure.
Important
IF YOU HAVE SPECIFIED A SCALE, ALL FUTURE PLACES YOU WILL CENTRE ON WILL HAVE THE SAME
SCALE IF YOU DO NOT CHANGE IT.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
57
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To add a place to centre on:
Step
1.
Action
Click Display menu, Centre on Place... and then New....
The following dialog box appears:
2.
In the Geographic Place dialog box, enter the Name of the new place, its Position and
choose your desired Scale.
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
To edit a place:
Step
Action
1.
Click Display, Centre on Place... and select the place you want to edit.
2.
Click Edit and change your desired settings in the Geographic Place dialog box.
3.
When finished, click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
To remove a place:
Step
58
Action
1.
Click Display, Centre on Place... and select the place you want to remove.
2.
Click Delete and Yes in the warning message.
3.
In the Centre on Place dialog box, click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
III.4
Centring on a Mobile
Centring on a mobile is to move the main view but also to enable the motion control on
this and update the orientation if head-up mode is enabling.
Centring command on a mobile is a flip-flop command, i.e., it is reversed depending on
the current state of the object: with a mobile already centered with motion control, this
command stop the motion control.
III.4.1
ON OWN SHIP
To centre on Own Ship, do one of the following:
• Click the Centre on Own Ship line in the Display menu.
Figure 44 - Display menu
• Use the toolbars.
Figure 45 - Default horizontal toolbar
• Use the shortcuts, for that, see section I.2.1 page 6.
III.4.2
ON ANY MOBILE
To centre on a mobile, do one of the following:
• In mobile list (see section IV.3 page 76), select the mobile and click Centre button.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
59
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 46 - Centre command in mobile list
• In mobile list (see section IV.3 page 76), double click on the mobile. This action is
special not only because it will centre the screen but also add mobile services in the
Object Watch window. This case is particularly interesting to follow the mobile (and
other).
• In the main view if the mobile is displayed, select it with right click. Then, click on the
Centre button in the Object Information window. This case is particularly interesting to
follow the mobile.
Figure 47 - Centre command in the Object information window of the mobile
III.4.3
MOTION CONTROL
Motion Control manages how the main view follows a mobile (Own Ship or any mobile).
When centering on a mobile is activated, the motion control of the main view has too. You
should know that the motion control is configurable, see section II.2.3 page 31 for more
details.
III.4.3.1
Relative and True Motion
The motion control keeps the mobile in the main view. Two modes are possible:
• Relative motion. In this mode, the mobile is at a fixed position in the view, and all
other objects are moving when the mobile moves. You can adjust the mobile position
in the view with the keyboard arrows.
60
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 48 - Relative motion
• True motion. In this mode, mobile movements are visible in the view as the fixed
objects remain in the same place.
Figure 49 - True motion
True motion mode is more powerful than relative motion.
To change the motion control mode, do one of the following:
• Click the Relative motion line in the Display menu. The state of this line indicates the
current mode.
• Use the shortcut, for that, see section I.2.1 page 6.
III.4.3.2
Main view orientation
There are three different orientations:
• North-up, the view is oriented according to the geographic north. It is the default
mode.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
61
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 50 - North-up orientation
• Head-up, the view is oriented according to the mobile true heading.
Figure 51 - Head-up orientation
• Leg-up, the view is oriented according to the current leg route. It is strongly
recommended to use this mode only with route monitoring enabled.
Figure 52 - Leg-up orientation
North-up orientation is more powerful.
62
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To change the orientation, you can:
• Use the Orientation menu from Display menu and select the mode.
Figure 53 - The orientation menu
• Use the shortcuts, for that, see section I.2.1 page 6.
III.5
Alarms
Alarms are used to draw the user’s attention to an abnormal modification in the system
status and/or its content.
Alarms aim at alerting you when:
• The system has been altered.
• Data have been modified.
• Information has been taken into account.
All alarms are gathered into three main categories, depending on their effect on the use of
the software:
General information (e.g.: when Gecdis starts).
Warnings (e.g. when no Own Ship is defined).
Errors. This kind of message is displayed when a malfunction has occurred (e.g., if
an error has occurred on a communication port).
These alarms can be displayed:
• In the Alarm window.
• In the black box.
III.5.1
THE ALARM WINDOW
The alarm window is resizable and it is located by default above the screen.
You can see this window as the first alarm is displayed; the last received alarm is
constantly displayed. This alarm blinks as long as the user has not clicked above.
List of alarms
Button that allows
you to check all
alarms
Alarm counts
The last warning
Button that allows you to
check one alarm
Figure 54 - The Alarm Window
See section II.6, page 37 for further information on how to configure the alarms to be
displayed in this window.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
63
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To check the last alarm:
Step
Action
1.
Click ACK button in the status bar or press [F11] shortcut (see section I.2.1, page 6).
2.
Do the same thing as many times as there are alarms. Warning messages are the first
messages to be removed, error messages are the second ones and information
message are the last ones.
3.
End of procedure.
To check all alarms at the same time:
Step
III.5.2
III.5.2.1
Action
1.
Click the window that displays the last alarm.
2.
Click on Check All Alarms button
3.
End of procedure.
THE BLACK BOX
Overview
The black box is a database that stores all alarms and other events, for informative use.
As it offers a history of the software use, it will mainly be used to analyze its behavior if a
problem occurs.
Figure 55 - The Black Box
Above this window, the table gathers all error messages and characteristics as follows:
64
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Type, the type of the message: Information, Warning or Error.
• Alarm, specifies whether the message is an alarm.
• Date, the date of the event. This is the default sort column (newest to oldest).
• Receipt Date, the date when the event has been acknowledged.
• Id, the identifier of the event, i.e., the code identifying it and differentiating it from the
other events for a specific module (source).
• Source, the module of the event.
• Title, the title of the event.
• Text, the description of the event.
• User, the user that was logged in when the event occurred.
You can use any column to sort the list in one way or another.
Below the window a pane shows the message, and a second pane explains this message,
when required.
Each event has its own life. The default lifetime is 7 days. Some have very short as
one hour (error input / output, for example) or very long as 3 months (position report to
multiple 4 o'clock).
Bottom-right of the window, six commands are available:
•
Allows you to move up and down in the list of events.
•
Allows you to move in the events that specify that Gecdis has been
launched.
•
Allows you to pause the list. Any new events will not be displayed,
which can be useful when analyzing when events are added.
Allows you to print the black box with the events and the order of
presentation on the screen.
•
To open the black box:
In the View menu, select Black Box…
III.5.2.2
Configuring the Display of the Events
The black box has three levels of event display that have been previously set:
• Base level displays the ECDIS-type events, such as chart databases or position report.
• Standard level displays the base events, alarms and some particular events, such as
Gecdis launch, autopilot mode, user log on, etc...
• Full level displays all events.
Using them allows you to display only a part of all events that have been generated while
using Gecdis, to print only interesting events for example.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
65
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 56 - Levels of event display
However, if none of them meets your needs and you want, for example, to display some
additional events of the Full level, but not all of them, you can customize the display of
events. To do so, you need to check your desired events and uncheck the other ones.
In the Filter dialog box, events are displayed as a list. For each of them, the ID and source
are indicated. You can only select the events that have already appeared in the black box.
If a new type of event occurs after the filter has been configured, this event will be
displayed by default in the black box. You will be able to remove it from display later.
To select a level of event display:
In the Black box dialog box, click the desired level in the Display group zone.
To customize the display level of events:
Step
Action
1.
In the Black Box dialog box, click the Filter… button.
2.
Select the events to be displayed.
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
For example, if you want to control the geographical positions of the last 12 hours, you
can filter the events required by ECDIS standard, to do this:
Step
Action
1.
Deselect all the events by clicking the Unselect All button.
2.
Check the box corresponding to the event 40008 of the IXMIoMobile source (see the
window displayed in step 1 of the above procedure).
66
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 57 - Filtered Black Box
III.6
The View Menu
Gecdis screen consists of many different windows: the information bar, the information
pages, etc. Most gathered in the View menu. This menu allows you to choose to display
or not each one of them.
Figure 58 - The View Menu
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
67
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Here are the main commands:
• Close, allows you to close the window that has focus except for the main view. Please
note that this command cannot be the desired result when the software is configured to
automatically activate the window under the mouse cursor (see section II.10.2.1 page
47).
• Chart in Full Screen, allows you to maximize or restore the size of the main view
(toggle command).
• Display Contexts, allows you to display a configuration of Gecdis display that has
been previously set (see section III.7 page 69).
• Toolbar 1, allows you to display/close the horizontal toolbar (toggle command). See
section I.3.1.5 page 13.
• Toolbar 2, allows you to display/close the vertical toolbar (toggle command).
• Black Box..., allows you to display/close the dialog box (toggle command) to check the
event history. See section III.5.2 page 64.
• Chart Overview, allows you to display/close the chart overview (toggle command).
This view is the perfect complement to the main view to geographically locate. The
context menu for this view can make it on the main view or ship and set its scale
(respectively relative or absolute).
Figure 59 - The Chart Overview
• Chart 2, allows you to display/close another main view with the same scale (toggle
command). You can resize this second window, and it can be used to display another
type of information (e.g.: for oceanographic use). When your cursor moves into this
window, its position is represented in the main view.
68
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Critical Information, allows you to open a submenu to critical information window
management. See I.3.1.6 page 13.
• Custom Information, allows you to open a submenu to display/close the information
bar and pages windows (toggle command). See I.3.1.6 page 13.
• Channel View, allows you to display/close a leg-up window (toggle command) to have
a better appreciation on route monitoring or track keeping. See section VII.3.9 page
206.
• Pilot View, allows you to display/close the pilot view (toggle command). Similarly to
channel view but with a 3D aspect, it is an example of a view added by an external
module (IXMRoutes). See section VII.3.7 page 203.
III.7
The Display Context
A display context is a screen configuration identifying a specific use of the software. It is
possible to save this specific configuration to display it later. To give an example, you may
have decided to display the information windows but no chart overview, in case you want
to have maximum available space on screen. Anytime you wish to skip to this
configuration, you will have to load the corresponding display context.
Channelling is a specific use of display contexts. A leg can be assigned to a specific
display context. For more details, see VII.3.10 page 207.
The management menu display context is composed of two parts:
• The first part consists of only one command that allows you to manage contexts.
• A second part that is automatically constructed according to the contexts added. Each
line of this part corresponds to a command to recall a context.
The new commands of the menu second part can be added when customizing the
toolbar (see II.5.1 page 35).
Figure 60 - Display contexts menu
To create a display context:
Step
1.
Action
Define what window and views are present. You can set the zoom factor that will be also
recorded in the display context.
2.
Click View, point to Display contexts and click Define…
The Display Contexts dialog box opens:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
69
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
Action
On the Display Contexts dialog box, click New Context… and enter a name for the new
display context in the Save current views configuration as field of the Save
Configuration dialog box. The current configuration of the software (display context,
display of windows, zoom factor) is saved.
4.
If you further change the general display context of the software and you want to display
this display context, you just have to select it.
5.
End of procedure.
To select a display context you have already defined:
Step
1.
Action
Click View menu and point to Display contexts.
A new menu opens. If you have already defined display contexts, the list of the display
contexts is displayed in this menu.
2.
Select your desired display context.
3.
End of procedure.
To update a display context:
Step
Action
1.
Click View menu, point to Display Contexts and click Define…
2.
In the left list of the Display Contexts dialog box, select the display context you want to
update and click Update. The selected display context has been updated to the current
configuration of the software.
70
3.
To close the dialog box, click Close.
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Important
DO NOT CONFUSE UPDATED WITH THE SELECTION OF A DISPLAY CONTEXT.
To delete a display context:
Step
Action
1.
Click View menu, point to Display contexts and click Define…
2.
In the left list of the Display contexts dialog box, select the display context you want to
delete and click Delete.
3.
To close the dialog box, click Close.
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
71
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV
MOBILES AND FLEETS
IV.1
Navigation
IV.1.1
MOBILES’ VECTORS
A heading defines how the centre line of a ship is oriented compared with the
geographical north. It does not deal with drift notion – a ship berthed has a course. When
the ship moves, the heading becomes a course.
Course value may be quite different from heading one. Two elements may change the
course of a ship: wind and current.
Figure 61 - Ship's Vectors
Wind makes the ship drift and vary. Wind drift is expressed with an angle, i.e., leeway
angle. When added to true heading, this angle is the angle of the route in relation to sea
(leeway track).
Course make good, which is the movement of a ship in relation to the bottom of the water,
is the result of leeway track and the water that bears it (the current drift). So:
• Leeway track = true heading + leeway
• Course make good = Leeway track + current drift
Figure 62 - ECS vectors representation
Figure 63 - ECDIS vectors representation
Gecdis allows you to configure information about leeway track, course make good and
drifts.
Leeway track represents COW and SOW. It needs true heading to be added.
Current set and speed generate current drift. If both of them are not available, current drift
will not be displayed and will be considered as nil.
72
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Course make good’s vector is generated by SOG and COG .
Swaying vector is generated by swaying course and speed information. This vector is the
lateral projection of the course make good.
Finally vectors will not be represented in the same way, whether in ECDIS or ECS mode,
as described in the figure above.
IV.1.2
APPARENT WIND AND TRUE WIND
True wind defines the wind that would be felt if the ship would be motionless on the
ground. Apparent wind is the wind that a person feels on a moving ship, i.e., the wind that
is acquired by an anemometer and a weather vane.
It is the result of two motions, the real motion of the air (true wind) and the ship (relative
wind):
• Apparent wind = True wind + Relative wind.
So if a ship is motionless on the ground, apparent wind is the same as true wind.
While navigating, apparent wind is not so useful, except concerning aircrafts; the true wind
is more important and is annotated in log books. It can be computed in relation to wind, as
well as ship’s COG and SOG.
Relative wind has the same speed as the ship, but its direction is the opposite of the ship:
• True wind = Apparent wind + Ship’s speed.
Wind configuration is performed in the Input/Output & Mobiles Configuration dialog box.
You can add:
• True wind speed
• True wind bearing
• Apparent wind speed
• Apparent wind bearing
Each of them can be dead reckoned, computed by the software or acquired. However to
compute true wind, the software requires that information on apparent wind be dead
reckoned or acquired. The same process occurs to compute apparent wind.
The following shows how to compute true wind and apparent wind:
• Example 1: If the vessel is heading west at 7 knots and the wind is from the east at 10
knots, the relative wind is 3 knots at 180 degrees. In this same example, the theoretical
wind is 10 knots at 180 degrees (if the boat suddenly stops, the wind will be at the full
10 knots come from the stern of the vessel 180 degrees from the bow).
• Example 2: If the vessel is heading west at 5 knots and the wind is from the southeast
at 7.07 knots, the relative wind is 5 knots at 270 degrees. In this same example the
theoretical wind is 7.07 knots at 225 degrees (if the boat suddenly stops, the wind will
be at the full 7.07 knots come from the port-quarter of the vessel 225 degrees from the
bow).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
73
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.2
The Own Ship
You can assign several mobiles to your ship (e.g. the one representing your GPS and the
other one dead reckoning). The Own Ship (with upper cases) is the main representation of
this ship that will be taken as the reference. For example, when a mobile is defined as the
Own Ship, you will only be able to create an event for this one.
To assign a mobile as the Own Ship:
Important
YOU CAN DEFINE SEVERAL MOBILES FOR YOUR SHIP, BUT ONLY ONE MOBILE WILL BE DEFINED AS
THE OWN SHIP.
Step
Action
1.
Click Mobile menu and then Open Mobile List…
2.
In the list of mobiles, select a mobile then click on
3.
End of procedure.
.
To set the parameters of your Own Ship:
Important
IT IS IMPORTANT TO SET THE CHARACTERISTICS OF YOUR SHIP.
Step
Action
1.
Click System, Settings, I/O and Mobiles and then Own Ship Characteristics….
2.
In the Own Ship Characteristics dialog box, set the parameters to change the default
information with information relative to your ship.
3.
IV.2.1
End of procedure.
SIZES
The Sizes tab allows you to configure the size of the Own Ship.
If you click Outline Filename…, a list of example files is displayed. An example file can
define very accurate measurements for your ship. You can change an outline file.
If you want to create a ship’s outline, refer to appendix E page 338 that describes the
fields (parameters) to enter in order to create an outline.
74
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 64 - Own Ship’s sizes
(L) Length
Represents the total length of your ship.
(B) Beam
Represents the total beam of your ship.
Conning Position
This position is the reference position of the Own Ship and not necessarily the
reference position of the positioning system. The difference between both must be
specified in the Corrections tab of the Position piece of information (see IV.6.5
page 112).
Pivoting Position
Lp
Defines the distance between the rear of the ship and the conning
Bp
Defines the distance between the axis of the ship and the conning.
The pivoting position defines the position in which the ship will pivot.
Lp
The distance between the rear of the ship and the pivoting position
Bp
The distance between the axis of the ship and the pivoting position
(used in dead reckoning mode)
IV.2.2
HEIGHTS
The Heights tab allows you to configure the height of the ship, and its draught.
Figure 65 - Own Ship's heights
T (Total height)
The total height of your ship.
B (Bridge/Keel
The height between bridge and keel of your ship.
height)
D (Extreme draught) The maximum value you can assign to your ship’s draught. If draught is superior to
the one specified, an alarm is generated.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
75
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.2.3
NAVIGATION PARAMETERS
The Navigation tab changes some of the routes’ parameters.
Figure 66 - Own Ship's navigation parameters
Turn radius
The radius of the Own Ship when it turns while in route monitoring..
Economic speed
The default speed of the Own Ship for each leg of a route.
Maximum Speed
The maximum speed that cannot be exceeded, in route planning matters.
Maximum XTE
The maximum error that defaults on the legs of a route.
Explanatory and cinematic pieces of information about the Own ship are available and
can be observed in a resizable HTML-typed window. For this, click More... button.
Normally information comes from the ship’s RPC (Registre de préparation au combat,
register
of
preparation
to
fighting).
It
is
summed
up
in
the
ixm\IXMIoMobile\Ownship.html file.
IV.3
The Mobiles List
The mobiles list displays the list of all mobiles and fleets, and allows you to manage them.
The corresponding dialog box consists in three parts:
• Above, a menu bar allows you to manage mobiles
• On the left, the list of all kinds of mobiles, i.e. Ships and each fleet
• On the right, the mobiles and possibly the trawl net, of the selected element in the lefthand pane and information about them. The pieces of information are gathered into
several columns. You can sort them out either in ascending or in descending order.
The menu bar allows you to hide/display objects, and open the dialog boxes about mobile
and fleet dead-reckoning, appearance, and configuration. You can also select a mobile,
centre and display its related information in the Object information window, on the right of
the screen. To do so, you must double click the desired mobile.
76
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 67 - List of Mobiles
Centre on
Centres and controls a mobile on the main view. The Centre on button is then
pressed.
Display
Displays the selected mobile, if hidden. When a mobile is displayed, its specific pieces
of information are displayed in black.
Hide
Hides the selected mobile in the main view. When a mobile is hidden, its specific
pieces of information are displayed in grey.
Dead Reckoning
Opens the Dead Reckoning dialog box (see section 0 page 120).
Appearance
Opens the mobile or fleet appearance dialog box (see section IV.5.1 page 84). If you
click this command after selecting Ships, in the left-hand pane, the mobile general
appearance dialog box is displayed. If you select a mobile, the specific appearance
dialog box of this mobile is displayed.
Configuration
Opens the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box. See section IV.2 page 74.
Own Ship
Gives the Own Ship status to the selected mobile (see section IV.2 page 74). The
button is pressed if the Own Ship is selected.
Select with cursor
Allows to select several mobiles close the ones from the others, by dragging the
mouse in the main view.
To open the list of mobiles:
Click Mobile and then Open Mobile List…
To hide a mobile:
Step
Action
1.
Click Mobile menu and then Open Mobile List…to open the Mobiles list.
2.
In the left-hand pane, select the category to which the mobile you want to hide belongs.
3.
In the right-hand pane, select your desired mobile.
4.
In the menu bar, click Hide.
5.
End of procedure.
You can hide all the mobiles of a category selecting the category and clicking Hide.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
77
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To centre a mobile:
Double click a mobile, in the right-hand pane. The mobile is then centred on the main
view. Would it had been hidden, it had become visible.
To sort out a column:
On the right-hand pane, click the column header of the piece of information you want to
sort out. An up or down arrow indicates whether the column is sorted out in descending or
ascending order.
IV.4
Alarms
IV.4.1
OWN SHIP SPECIFIC ALARMS
IV.4.1.1
Anti-Collision
Anti-collision allows to compute how lucky the Own Ship is to strike other mobiles (that
belong to fleets) and react from this.
Several notions are implied by anti-collision:
• Allowed Closest Point of Approach (Allowed CPA), which is the minimum distance
from which the captain lets the officer of the watch pass from a ship (if sea traffic or
proximity of dangers makes it impossible to operate to respect the Allowed CPA, the
officer of the watch gives notice of it to the captain);
• Minimum Time to Closest Point (Minimum TCPA), which is a user-defined duration
to specify the Minimum TCPA to reach the Allowed CPA.
• CPA and TCPA between the Own Ship and the other mobiles computed from the real
time navigation parameters.
For a collision risk to occur, the following things must be gathered:
• CPA between the dangerous mobile and the Own Ship is inferior to the Allowed CPA
• TCPA is a positive value – if TCPA is negative, there is no more collision risk
• TCPA is inferior to the Minimum TCPA
For example, if Allowed CPA is 5 nm and Minimum TCPA is 15 minutes, the mobile of a
fleet will be considered as dangerous if TCPA between it and the Own Ship ranges from 0
to 15 minutes before reaching a 5 nm radius around the Own Ship.
On screen, a circle is drawn around the Own Ship to symbolise to the Allowed CPA with a
red colour in Non ECDIS mode and an orange color in ECDIS mode.
When a mobile is dangerous, it is surrounded by a red and blinking triangle that points at
the top. The following alarm is displayed first, and then each 30 seconds in the alarm bar:
Collision risk with x : CPA=y, TCPA=z
where x is the dangerous mobile, y is the CPA and z is the TCPA between the Own Ship
and the dangerous mobile.
You can decide not to generate this alarm, neither in the alarm bar nor in the black box.
To do so, uncheck Periodic report (30 s) in the Own Ship Specific Alarms dialog box.
When the danger is passed, the following alarm is generated, only in the black box.
78
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Collision risk avoided with x: CPA=y, TCPA=z,
Where x is the dangerous mobile for the Own Ship, y is the CPA and z is the TCPA
between the Own Ship and the former dangerous mobile
Figure 68 - Anti-collision alarm
To use anti-collision:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Settings, I/O and mobiles, and then Alarms…
The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed.
2.
Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab.
3.
In Anticollision area, check Enable and then specify a DMP and a TDMP in the
corresponding fields.
4.
Check Periodic report (30 s) to generate an alarm each 30 seconds in case of a
collision risk.
IV.4.1.2
5.
Click OK.
6.
End of procedure.
Inconsistent Positions
Several mobiles can be assigned to your ship: a main one (the Own Ship) and other
secondary ones. Inconsistent positions aim at telling the user when the Own Ship’s
conning position is too different from secondary ships. To do so, you must enter an ELP
(Ecart Limite de Position, Maximum difference between positions), if the distance between
positions of conning is superior or equal to ELP, the following alarm is generated:
Inconsistent position with x, difference=y where x is the mobile that is too far from the Own
Ship and y is the difference between positions.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
79
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 69 - Inconsistent position alarm parameters
Important
ELP IS COMPUTED BETWEEN CONNING POSITIONS, AND NOT SENSORS, IN CASE OF OFFSETS WITH
THE GPS ANTENNA (SEE SECTION IV.6.5, PAGE 112).
To define inconsistent positions:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Settings, I/O and mobiles, and then Alarms…
The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed.
2.
Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab
3.
In Inconsistent Position area, check Enable and then enter a value in Maximum
distance between ships (ELP).
4.
Check Periodic Report (30s) to generate an alarm each 30 seconds in case of
inconsistent positions.
IV.4.1.3
5.
Click OK.
6.
End of procedure.
Inconsistent Depths
Inconsistent depths allow to show when there is too much difference between an acquired
depth and the depth that is computed with bathymetry and is relative to the position of the
ship. To do so you must enter an ELS (Ecart Limite de Sonde, Maximum difference
between depths), in meters or with a percentage. If the value is specified in meters, an
alarm is generated when the difference between both depths is superior to this value; if
the value is specified in percentage, an alarm is generated when the difference between
both depths is superior or equal to (in percentage) the acquired depth. The first time this
occurs the following alarm is displayed:
Inconsistent depths, difference = x, where x is the difference, in meters or in percentage
depending on the selected option, between ship’s and chart’s depths. If you have chosen
to display this alarm each 30 seconds (Periodic Report (30s) check box), the
Inconsistent depths alarm is displayed the other times.
For example, if the acquired value is 50 meters and the computed value is 55 meters, the
alarm is generated when there is an allowance of 10%, the alarm is generated because
the difference between both values (5 meters) is exactly equal to 10% of the acquired
value (50 meters).
80
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 70 - Inconsistent depth alarm parameters
To use inconsistent depth:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Settings, I/O and mobiles, and then Alarms…
The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed.
2.
Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab.
3.
In Inconsistent Depth area, check the Enable box and then do one of the following:
• To enter a difference in meters, click Maximum Depth Difference - Value (ELS)
and then enter a value in the corresponding field.
• To enter a difference in percentage, click Maximum Depth Difference - Percentage
(ELS) and then enter a value in the corresponding field.
4.
Check the Periodic Report (30s) box to generate an alarm each 30 seconds when there
is an inconsistence in depths.
IV.4.2
5.
Click OK.
6.
End of procedure.
TARGET/AIS ALARMS
A page allows configuring specific alarms to mobile AIS and ARPA targets.
Important
NOT TO BE HAMPERED BY AN EXCESS OF ALARMS, BUT ONLY THE MOST RELEVANT, THESE
ALARMS DO NOT APPLY TO SLEEPING MOBILE.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
81
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 71 - Target/AIS alarms page
IV.4.2.1
High speed
This alarm is intended to alert the user to a mobile above a set value speed.
A hysteresis of 1% is applied to stabilize the state to a value close to a threshold.
To enable high speed alarm:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Settings, I/O and mobiles, and then Alarms…
The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed.
IV.4.2.2
2.
Click the Target/AIS Alarms tab.
3.
Check the Enable box in the High Speed area.
4.
Set value in the corresponding field.
5.
End of procedure.
AIS Detection
This alarm is intended to alert the user that AIS mobile identified by MMSI was detected
during the acquisition.
Operation
The principle is simple, just check the numbers in the list to detect moving up the base
and ensure that the Enable box of AIS Detection area is checked. The selection of mobile
monitoring is stored in database and is persistent.
The management of the AIS alarm detection needs a Gecdis internal database. In fact,
this database is used to provide AIS static information in the first reception of the
dynamic information of the mobile, and in this way, a mobile is now filled in with many
82
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
details (name, size, etc ... ). Conversely, when static information is received, Gecdis
updates the database entry corresponding to the mobile being acquired.
Although brief, the list of mobiles shown in the configuration of the AIS detection is
updated in real time, and is indeed the contents of the database. Checked, the numbers
still appear in the list.
The comment field is used to build the alarm text.
To enable AIS detection alarm:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Settings, I/O and mobiles, and then Alarms…
The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed.
Import
TvswMMSI
2.
Click the Target/AIS Alarms tab.
3.
Check the Enable box in the AIS Detection area (the list becomes active).
4.
Check the mobiles in the list you want to detect.
5.
End of procedure.
The Import TvswMMSI.ini button aims to import all mobile in database from those
reported in the ini file and activate their alarms. Historically, this file is used to manage
AIS detection by TurboWin before implementation of the database.
Besides being able to operate the old file in Gecdis, its import into Gecdis has three
advantages:
• To define the comment field
• To add mobiles never acquired
• To massively activate detection on a set of mobiles
During import, mobile not involved are not so far off, and mobile already involved in the
database have their fields activated alarm and commentary updated.
The list of mobiles to be detected must be defined by a section named WarningList. Then,
each handset is registered by the couple, MMSI-Comment using the key for the MMSI and
value for comment.
[WarningList]
MMSI Number=Warning Comment
232316000=FPV NORNA
232435000=FPV SULISKER
232514000=FPV VIGILANT
Figure 72 - TvswMMSI.ini example
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
83
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.4.2.3
AIS Message Filtering
Receiving a message not related to security (AIS protocol messages 6-addressed and 8broadcasted) is treated as other messages relating to safety, namely through an alarm
and an event in the black box. It is not possible to disable the alarms, against an optional
filter on the alarm text messages has been introduced to limit their number.
Upon receiving a text message, an event will always be added to the black box, by cons, if
filtering is active, the alarm will not be generated if at least one of following conditions is
satisfied:
• The recipient of the addressed message does not match the MMSI of the ship,
• The content of the last message received is identical to the previous message
received,
• The received message does not contain space (usually coded message).
To enable filtering of AIS messages:
Check the Enable AIS Messages Filter box.
IV.5
Representation
You can create different types of mobiles or fleets. You can also configure them. We
remind you that a fleet is a group of mobile elements (buoys, targets, etc.) and a mobile
can either represent your ship or a mobile in a fleet.
IV.5.1
DEFINING A MOBILE APPEARANCE
First you have to configure the general appearance of mobiles. The appearance you will
define for mobiles will be later considered as the default one for any mobile you will insert
(except if this mobile is included in a fleet).
Figure 73 - Configuring the Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Symbols
84
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To define the mobile and fleet general appearance:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Settings, I/O and mobiles, and then Appearance…
The Mobile Appearance dialog box is displayed. You have to use it in a progressive way.
Indeed, you will have to check or not boxes and each choice you will make will have
consequences on your future choices. The following is an example of the complete
thought you may have.
2.
In the Symbol tab, click Visible if you want your mobile to be visible in the main view.
• If you have not checked Visible: you will not be able to see the mobile.
• If you have checked Visible:
3.
Select ECDIS representation if you want the mobile to be represented as indicated in the
ECDIS standard.
• If you have checked ECDIS representation: the mobiles will be represented as
indicated in the ECDIS standard.
• If you have not checked ECDIS representation:
4.
Select a color and a symbol clicking on the arrow of these zones, and check the
Expanded box if you want your mobile to be expanded (see section IV.5.2 page 87).
Note: SCAMIN is the abbreviation for “scale minimum”. When you check this box, you
indicate that the mobile or fleet will not be displayed after the scale that is defined in the
zone below this check box. For example, if 100000 is indicated, you will not be able to
see your mobile or fleet if the scale is inferior to 1/100000.
5.
Click the Label tab. This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the Symbol tab.
6.
Check the Visible box if you want the label of your default mobile to be visible in the
main view.
• If you have not checked Visible: you will not be able to see the label of your ship in
the main view.
• If you have checked Visible:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
85
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
7.
Action
Choose whether you want your label to be transparent or not (if you don’t check
Transparent, the label will be highlighted).
8.
Click the Past track tab. This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the other
tabs.
9.
Check Visible if you want the past track of the default mobile to be visible.
• If you have not checked Visible: you will not be able to see the mobile past track.
• If you have checked Visible:
10. Select ECDIS representation or not depending on whether you want the display of your
mobiles to follow or not the ECDIS standard representation.
• If you have checked ECDIS representation: the past track will be represented in
black.
• If you have not checked ECDIS representation: the past track will be represented in
grey.
11. Configure the Duration (min) field to indicate the time represented in the past track and
Time tag rate (min) field to indicate the interval between two time tags. If you check the
Long time tags box, hour minutes are displayed for each tag whereas if you uncheck
this box, only minutes are displayed. In the above dialog box, the past track will have a
new tag each minute, during 15 minutes. The time will be indicated with minutes and
hours.
12. Click the Vectors tab and check the Visible box depending on whether you want to
display or not the vectors and the headline.
86
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
13. The Duration (min) field allows you to define the period, in minutes, during which the
vectors will be represented.
• If you have not checked Visible: you will not be able to see the vectors of your
mobile.
• If you have checked Visible:
14.
Select ECDIS representation if you want the vectors of your mobiles to follow the ECDIS
standard representation.
• If you have selected ECDIS representation: you will only be able to define the
headline, the SOG and SOW vectors, as indicated in the ECDIS standard.
• If you have not selected ECDIS representation: You can also display the drift and
swaying vectors.
Note: A vector can’t be displayed if the piece (s) of information defining it have not been
added to a mobile. These pieces of information are as follows:
• Headline: True Heading
• On Ground: SOG –COG
• On Water: SOW – COW
• Drift: Drift (speed) – Drift (course)
• Swaying: Lateral speed – Lateral course
15. When finished configuring the default mobile appearance, click OK
16. End of procedure.
IV.5.2
STANDARD REPRESENTATION
Here is the standard representation of symbols without vectors and past track.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
87
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.5.2.1
Own Ship
Symbol
Description
True scaled outline.
True scaled precise outline (sample).
Secondary positioning true scaled precise outline (sample).
ECDIS simplified symbol (when the outline is too small).
ECDIS simplified symbol with heading and beam lines.
ECDIS Secondary positioning simplified symbol with heading and beam lines.
ECS simplified symbol (when the outline is too small).
IV.5.2.2
AIS and ARPA Mobiles
Some mobiles are different from the others, by their appearance and/or function. This is
the case for the AIS and ARPA mobiles. The AIS is an automated message exchange
system between ships. With it, neighbour ships can have information on their journey.
A mobile is considered as an AIS whenever it is associated with the MMSI piece of
information.
The difference in the representation between ECDIS and ECS mode only play on
color. Whatever the method, a dangerous mobile will always drawn in red.
IV.5.2.3
ARPA symbols
ECS mode
88
ECDIS
mode
Dangerous
Mobile type
Status
ARPA target
To be followed (query)
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
ECS mode
IV.5.2.4
ECDIS
mode
Dangerous
Mobile type
Status
ARPA target
Followed (tracking)
ARPA target
Lost
Mobile type
Status
AIS symbols
ECS mode
ECDIS
mode
Dangerous
AIS target
Sleeping
AIS target
Lost sleeping
AIS target
Sleeping with neither reported heading nor
COG
AIS target
Activated
AIS target
Lost activated
AIS target
Activated with neither reported heading nor
COG
Real AIS AtoN
“Off position”
Real AIS AtoN
“On position”
Virtual AIS AtoN
“Off position”
Virtual AIS AtoN
“On position”
AIS AtoN
Lost “off position”
AIS AtoN
Lost “on position”
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
89
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
ECDIS
mode
ECS mode
IV.5.2.5
Dangerous
Mobile type
Status
AIS SART
Activated
AIS SART
Loste activated
AIS Station
Activated
Advanced
Symbol
Description
Activated AIS with true scaled outlines, ECDIS mode.
Activated AIS with true scaled outlines, ECS mode.
Lost activated AIS with true scaled outlines, ECDIS mode.
Dangerous activated AIS with true scaled outlines.
IV.5.3
DEFINING A SPECIFIC APPEARANCE FOR A MOBILE OR A FLEET
The appearance of a fleet is configured the same way as the appearance of a mobile.
To define the appearance of a fleet, you must first access to the ‘x Appearance’ dialog box
(x defining the name of your fleet).
This option is only possible in ECS mode.
To do so, you have two possibilities:
Step
1.
Action
Either click Mobile, Open Mobile List…, select the fleet whose appearance you want to
define and then click Appearance… and select Symbol tab.
2.
Or in the System menu, click Settings, I/O and mobiles, I/O and mobile
Configuration select a fleet in the list, click the Appearance… button then select
90
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
Symbol tab.
3.
Check or uncheck the Uses default appearance box depending on whether you want to
use or not the default appearance that you have defined for the mobiles (see section
IV.5.1 page 84).
• If you have selected the Uses default appearance box: The appearance that have
been defined in the sub-menu Appearance… (Mobiles  Appearance… Symbol
tab) will be defined.
• If you have not selected the Uses default appearance box:
4.
Click Visible if you want the default mobile appearance to be visible.
• If you have not checked Visible: you will not be able to see the mobiles contained in
your fleet.
• If you have checked Visible:
5.
Select ECDIS Representation or not depending on whether you want the appearance of
your fleet to follow the ECDIS standard representation.
• If you have selected ECDIS representation: the mobiles of the fleet will be
represented as defined in the ECDIS standard.
• If you have not selected ECDIS representation:
6.
Select a color and a symbol clicking on the arrow of these fields, and check the
Expanded box if you want the fleet to be expanded (its size will be twice larger).
7.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
91
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
The list of symbols is as follows:
Symbol Name
Symbol Name
Target Number
Drift Buoy
Manuel Buoy
Unknown Argos
Known ARGOS
Link ARGOS
PIRATE Vessel
Shoal
Airplane
Submarine
Sailboat
Windsurfing
Fishing Boat
Life-buoy
Reference Point
Datum
AIR – Hostile
AIR –Neutral
AIR – Friendly
AIR – Unknown
SURFACE – Hostile
SURFACE – Neutral
SURFACE – Friendly
SURFACE – Unknown
SUB-SURFACE – Hostile
SUB-SURFACE – Neutral
SUB-SURFACE – Friendly
SUB-SURFACE – Unknown
• If you choose
as the symbol for a mobile and that mobile has identification
information, the identification number will be indicated instead.
• The symbol will not be drawn if the mobile or fleet length is superior to 12 mm.
92
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
1.
Click the Label tab. This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the tab Symbol:
2.
Check or uncheck the Use default appearance box depending on whether you want to
use or not the default appearance that you have defined for the mobiles.
• If you have checked the Use default appearance box: The default appearance that
you have defined in the Appearance… sub-menu will be defined.
• If you have not checked the Use default appearance box:
3.
Check the Visible box if you want the label of the mobile of your fleet to be visible.
• If you have not checked Visible: you will not be able to see the label of your ship.
• If you have checked Visible:
4.
Check the Transparent box if you want labels to be transparent (if you do not select
Transparent, the label will be highlighted).
5.
When finished configuring the fleet, click OK.
6.
End of procedure.
You can follow the same steps to create a specific appearance for a mobile clicking
Mobile, Open Mobile List…, selecting the mobile and clicking Appearance.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
93
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.6
Configuration
IV.6.1
INFORMATION
IV.6.1.1
System Information
System information is data concerning elements that are related to your machine. The
cursor information, the stream information and the UTC are defined as system
information.
• System gives you data about your machine.
• UTC identifies the date-time piece of information that is used by Gecdis. This piece of
information can be obtained:

by Windows selecting a software source. In this case, ensure that Windows time
zone has been correctly set.

With a NMEA sentence of your GPS selecting one of your desired NMEA sentences
in the
scrolling list.
To access system information:
Click Mobile and then Configuration. The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box
opens.
To configure your time zone:
Step
1.
Action
For example, under Windows Seven, click the clock, in the far right-lower part of your
screen.
2.
In the windows that appears, click Change date and time settings…
The Date and Time dialog box opens:
94
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
Action
Click Change time zone…, select your desired time zone in the scrolling list and then
click OK.
4.
Click OK.
5.
End of procedure.
Figure 74 - Available Information about the Cursor
The default information is as follows:
• The cursor position
• The bearing from the Own Ship to the cursor
• The distance from the Own Ship to the cursor
• The TTG from the Own Ship to the cursor
• The ETA from the Own Ship to the cursor
• The CPA from the Own Ship to the cursor
You can also add information about depth and height of tide in the location of the cursor.
To do so, select one of the system’s pieces of information, click Add, select Information
and click the piece of information you want to add.
•
•
You cannot delete one of the default cursor’s piece of information.
When the cursor is outside the main view (in a dialog box or one of the bars), cursor’s
pieces of information are displayed in red and are considered as undefined, except
the position, which is considered as invalid and indicates the position of the centre of
the screen.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
95
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
System’s pieces of information are as follows:
UTC (software, acquired)
Universal Time Coordinated. This corresponds to Greenwich time, in
England. This piece of information is dependent to time lag.
Time lag (Dead reckoned,
The lag between the UTC and the local time (time of reference), that it
software, acquired)
is possible to configure. If time lag is generated from a software
source, the time of reference will be the time lag of your system. If
time lag is acquired, it will be defined by the time lag entered on the
GPS sensor.
Local time (Software)
This piece of information is displayed whenever time lag has been
added. Local time is the sum of the UTC and time lag. A letter is
specified next local time. This letter allows to reference the time lag.
For example, if the selected time zone is (GMT+01 :00) Brussels,
Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris, the letter will be B in summer and A in
winter (A=+1h, B=+2h… N=-1h, O=-2h, etc.).
Cursor position (Software)
The position of the cursor when dragged over the main view or the
chart overview. If over a dialog box or outside the main view, the
position of the centre of the screen is specified.
Bearing Own Ship – Cursor
The bearing between the Own Ship and the cursor in relation to the
(Software)
geographical north. This piece of information is invalid if the pieces of
information of the Own Ship and the cursor are invalid as well.
Distance Own Ship – Cursor
The distance between the Own Ship and the location of the cursor.
(Software)
This piece of information is invalid if Own Ship’s and cursor’s
positional information are invalid as well.
TTG Own Ship – Cursor (Software)
The Time to go. Describes the time the Own Ship would take, on the
same speed as the current one, to reach the position of the cursor.
This piece of information is invalid if Own Ship’s and cursor’s
positional pieces of information, and Own Ship’s leeway track and
course make good are invalid as well.
Height of tide – Cursor (Dead
The height of the water level on cursor’s position.
reckoned, Software)
Depth – Cursor (Software)
The depth on cursor’s position. To display this piece of information,
isolines, bathymetry or 3D must be displayed.
Charted depth – cursor (Software)
The charted depth on cursor’s position. This piece of information is
automatically added whenever the Depth Cursor piece of information
is added. If no height of tide is specified, both of them have the same
value.
96
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.6.1.2
Mobiles’ Information
The following pieces of information are used to configure mobiles:
Position (dead reckoned,
The geographical position of the mobile that corresponds to the sensor
acquired)
position (e.g. : GPS antenna) or a periodic maintenance.
Example (12°52’294 N – 115°21’150’ W)
Reference position
The last observed position (starting, setting estimated position, etc.). This
(software)
position cannot be maintained; it is added to the mobile’s list of pieces of
information whenever Position is available.
Example (32°06'01500 S.060°46'30500 E <WGS84>)
UTC of position (reference) The UTC that corresponds to the last reference position of the mobile.
– software
Example (14/12/2001 11:14:54)
Position bow (software)
The position of Own Ship’s stem, that relates to the conning position as
defined in the Sizes tab of Own Ship’s characteristics. To open this tab and
change the value, you should click the name of the desired mobile, and then
edit the L (length) field in the Sizes tab.
Example : (12°52’294 N – 115°21’150 W)
Position stern (software)
Position ship’s transom. This position is also related to the conning, which can
be modified in the Sizes tab of ship’s characteristics.
Position conning
The position of ship’s conning. This piece of information is added if position
(software)
has been adjusted in the Corrections tab of the ship’s Position piece of
information (see IV.6.5 page 112).
To compute the value, the Own Ship’s true heading must be valid.
SOG (software, acquired)
The speed over ground. The speed over ground of a ship.
Example (10.00 kn)
COG (software, acquired)
The course over ground. The “real” course of the ship.
Example (100.0°)
SOW (dead reckoned
The speed over water. The speed over the water.
acquired)
Example (2.00 kn)
COW (software)
This piece of information takes into account true heading and leeway angle
(COW = True heading + leeway angle).
Example : 185.000000°
True heading (dead
The heading that is related to geographical north. The angle is the crossing of
reckoned, software,
the axis of geographical north and ship’s centre line. When adding this piece
acquired)
of information, COW is also added. If no leeway angle is specified, true
heading has the same value as COW.
Example : 345.000000°
Leeway angle (dead
The drift that originates from the wind.
reckoned, acquired)
Example: 1.697576°
Drift speed (dead
The speed of drift.
reckoned, software,
Example: 2.00 kn
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
97
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
acquired)
Drift course (dead
This piece of information, as well as Drift speed, must be valid to modify the
reckoned, software,
COG and leeway track’s vector.
acquired)
Example : 020.0°
Depth (dead reckoned,
The distance between the seabed and the water surface. Depth is dependent
software, acquired)
to Charted depth and Height of tide.
Depth = Charted depth + Height of tide
Example : 10.00 m
Charted depth (software)
The depth that corresponds to the chart datum level.
Example : 7.0000000 m
Auxiliary information
Height of tide (dead
The difference between depth and charted depth, originated by tide
reckoned, software)
Example : 3.000 m
Submersion (dead
The depth of a submarine. This piece of information is associated to the Depth
reckoned, automatic)
below keel piece of information.
Example : 55.0000 m
Altitude (dead reckoned, The vertical elevation of a point above the water level (chart datum level).
automatic)
Example : 10000.0 m
Swaying speed (dead
The SOG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile. In other words, this is
reckoned, software)
the speed of a mobile on a virtual line perpendicular to it. This piece of
information is useful when berthing, for example.
Example : 01.334132 kn
Swaying course (dead
The COG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile. Swaying course is
reckoned, software)
computed from gyro.
Example : 15.000000°
Rate of turn (acquired)
The rate of turn is expressed in degrees per second.
Example : 5.000000 °/s.
Rolling (dead reckoned,
The rotational motion of a ship about the longitudinal axis.
automatic)
Example : 002.000000°
Pitching (dead
The rotational motion of a ship about the transverse axis. Example : 001.000000°
reckoned, automatic)
Depth below keel
The depth between the seabed and the keel of the ship. This piece of information
is displayed if the Depth and Draught pieces of information have already been
added. So:
Depth below keel = Depth – Draught
If Submersion has been added, then:
Depth below keel = Depth – Draught – Submersion
Draught (dead
The distance that is measured between water level and the keel.
reckoned, automatic)
Example : 5.000000 m
Air draught (software)
The distance between the water level and the upper point of the ship. For this
98
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
piece of information to be computed, draught must be added.
Example : 8.0000000 m
Bridge height (software) The difference between the Hp parameter in relation to the keel (it can be
configured clicking the mobile, and then the Heights tab) and draught. So this
piece of information must have been added to compute the height of the conning.
Example : 7.0000000 m
Log – distance on water
The distance that is run on water. This piece of information depends on the
(software/time,
SOW. If SOW is invalid, this piece of information is also invalid.
acquired)
If you select None as a source but you specify a calculation rate, distance on
water is computed again at any interval of this period.
Example : 406.861178 nm
Log – daily
The distance that is run on water. The value of this distance can be reset, in the
(software/time, dead
same way as an odometer (to do so, click the Mobile menu, and then Reset Daily
reckoned, acquired)
Counters). This piece of information depends on SOW.
Example : 15.265778 nm
Run distance
The distance that is run on ground. This piece of information depends on SOG. If
(software/time)
SOG is invalid, this piece of information is also invalid.
You must specify a calculation period to specify the interval between each
recalculation of the piece of information.
Example : 403.252878 nm
Run distance – daily
The distance that is run on ground and can be reset in the same way as an
(Software/time, dead
odometer (to do so, click the Mobile menu and then Reset Daily Counters).
reckoned)
This piece of information depends on SOG.
Example : 14.238458 nm
Meteo
True wind – speed (dead The true wind speed, that is computed from:
reckoned, software,
Apparent wind that comes from wind vane/anemometer,
acquired)
Speed over ground,
drift.
True wind – bearing
The wind bearing in relation to true north. The value of this piece of information is
(dead reckoned,
the one given by a fixed sensor.
software, acquired)
Apparent wind – speed
The wind speed relative to a mobile that is moving.
(dead reckoned,
software, acquired)
Apparent wind – bearing The wind bearing in relation to the ship.
(dead reckoned,
software, acquired)
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
99
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.6.2
STREAMS
A stream is a continuous series of bits being transmitted down a transmission line. In other
words, a stream allows your computer or your program to communicate with other
programs or devices passing data into and out. Gecdis includes three types of streams:
communication ports, files and networks. Each of them corresponds to a particular
communicational need: via external devices (communication ports), your own machine
(files), or other machines (network).
IV.6.2.1
Adding and Configuring a Communication Port
Usually, communication ports in your machine are linked to external devices. You can
configure Gecdis to receive data coming from these devices. The sentences are
transmitted to the software for them to be analysed.
Figure 75 - Information on Communication Ports
To add and configure a communication port:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
On the left panel, click System object in the tree then click Add button and select
Stream.
A list of all available streams is displayed.
3.
In this list, click the communication port you want to add.
The name of the communication port is displayed in the left-hand list. On the right part of
the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box the Windows default configuration
for this communication port is displayed. We advise you to change the values if they are
different from the ones in the above dialog box (Baud rate: 4800, Data Bits: 8, Parity: No
Parity, Stop Bits: 1).
4.
On the Comment field, optionally enter a comment about the communication port. For
example, if your communication port is a GPS, you can enter GPS in this field. What you
have entered will be inserted into brackets in the left-hand list, just opposite to the name
100
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
of the communication port.
5.
If you click
, data incoming from or outgoing to the communication port which has
been added are displayed. Right-click this window. The same menu as above the
window is displayed:
• Input: Displays the incoming sentences.
• Output: Displays the outgoing sentences.
• Pause: Stops displaying the sentences until you click again on it.
• Reset: Removes all displayed sentences from the window and displays the newly
received or transmitted sentences.
• Test format: Displays the sentences in text format. An example of a sentence in text
format is: $GPZDA,160044,12,12,2001,,*5B
• Hexadecimal format: Displays the sentences in hexadecimal format. An example of
a sentence in hexadecimal format is: 24 47 50 5A 44 41 2C 31 36 30 30 35 38 2C 31
32 2C 31 32 2C 32 30 30 31 2C 2C 2A 35 36 0D 0A.
6.
IV.6.2.2
End of procedure.
Adding and Configuring a NET stream
Gecdis allows you to send or receive data via two types of network streams:
• UDP (or NET),
• TCP.
IV.6.2.2.1 The UDP Stream
UDP offers a connection faster than TCP, with less reliability. However this protocol allows
you to broadcast information on several machines. So the UDP protocol will be preferred
with big-sized sentences that are sent so often that it would not be important to lose some
of them.
For any stream, you must enter the port number (input or output) assigned to the machine
that receives or sends sentences. If you enter 0 as a port number, transmission or
reception will not be enabled. If you enter another number, you will be able to transmit or
receive sentences, provided the same number is configured on the machine that receives
or transmits them. So if 1001 is entered for an input port, you will be able to read the
sentences from the systems whose output port will be set to 1001.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
101
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 76 - Configuring an UDP Stream for Reception
Figure 77 - Configuring an UDP Stream for Transmission
To add and configure a net stream:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, click Add button, Stream and
NET.
NET1 is added to the left panel list of streams, on the left of the dialog box. If this is the
first UDP stream you have added, the value of the first Port field is default set to 1001.
3.
If your machine has several network boards and you wish to receive sentences that
come from one of them, check the IP box, below Comment field and then select the
desired IP address.
4.
To receive sentences, enter in the first Port field the Port field number of the
Transmission group of the machine that sends you sentences.
5.
To transmit sentences, check Port in Transmission, and then enter the number of the
Port field of the machine that receives sentences. Whenever you specify a number for
the output port, the NMEA output branch is added to NET1, and allows you to configure
the sentences to be transmitted (see section IV.6.2.5 page 107).
6.
Optionally check the IP box. If you enter the IP address of the machine that receives
sentences, data is directly sent to a single machine. If not, transmission is in broadcast
102
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
mode.
7.
In the case that several machines transmit data on the same port, but you do not want to
receive sentences that come from each of them, filter the sentences doing one of the
following step, or both, in the Input filter group zone:
• To receive the sentences that are transmitted on a single port, check the Port box,
and then enter the appropriate port number.
• To receive the sentences that come from a single IP address, check the IP box and
then enter the machine’s IP address (to learn more about finding the IP address of a
machine, see Finding the IP Address of a Machine).
8.
Optionally fill in the Comment field.
The comment is displayed into brackets, in the left-hand list, after the name of the
network stream.
9.
If you click
, input and output data of the remote machine is displayed. For more
details about this window, please see section IV.6.2.1, page 100.
10. Click Apply.
11. End of procedure.
IV.6.2.2.2 The TCP Stream
TCP is a protocol that allows you to connect a transmitter and a receiver. This is a direct
connection between two machines. So, the sentences that will be sent to several
machines will have to be sent once for each machine. The advantage of this protocol is
that data is completely transmitted; if data is missing or erroneous, messages are
transmitted once again. TCP is then used if it is important to receive data.
To implement TCP, you should enter a stream number (Port field) on which the server and
the clients will be connected and exchange data, and optionally the IP or the server’s
name (Server Address field) for client machines (for the server, this field must be empty).
Figure 78 - TCP stream client configured with an IP address
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
103
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 79 - TCP stream client configured with a server name
Figure 80 - Configuring a TCP stream server
To use a TCP Stream:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
Select the desired TCP stream in the left-hand list of the Input/Output & Mobile
Configuration dialog box.
3.
In the Port field of the TCP Stream tab, enter the number of the port to be used.
4.
If you have a client machine, in Server Address, enter either the name of the server
machine or its IP address. To learn more about finding the IP address of a machine, see
Finding the IP Address of a Machine.
5.
Optionally fill in the Comment field. The comment is displayed into brackets, in the lefthand list, after the name of the network stream.
104
6.
Clicking
7.
End of procedure.
allows you to check incoming and outgoing data.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Finding the IP
Address of a
Machine
Figure 81 - Finding the IP Address of a Machine
To find the IP address of a machine:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, click the System object in the tree
to the left.
IV.6.2.3
3.
Click the Network tab.
4.
The addresses of your machine are shown in the field IP Addresses.
5.
End of procedure.
Adding and Configuring a FILE Stream
Gecdis allows you to receive data with a file. When you add a file as a stream, you ask
Gecdis to analyse the sentences contained in this file. The system reads them and use
them directly.
Important
AFTER PROCESSING, THE FILE INSERTED IN THE RECEPTION FOLDER IS DESTROYED.
Figure 82- Configuring File Stream
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
105
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To add and configure a FILE stream:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
On the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, click Add, Stream and then
FILE.
FILE1 is then added to the list of streams in the left hand list of this dialog box.
3.
On the Folder field of the File Stream tab, the access path that will receive and read the
positioning files is indicated. The folder defaults to …/Gecdis/Data/Receiving.
Optionally change it clicking the Browse… button, browsing to your desired folder and
clicking OK. The folder you will specify must exist (if not, first create it in your explorer)
and be empty.
4.
Optionally specify a comment in the Comment zone.
The comment you may have entered is displayed into brackets opposite to the name of
the file in the left-hand list.
IV.6.2.4
5.
Optionally scroll the File type list and select a file type.
6.
Click Apply.
7.
End of procedure.
Spying Input and Output Data
Spying consists in saving in a file input and/or output data in order to check its contents.
The files will be saved in the ...\Gecdis\Settings\Io\Mobiles folder and they will
have a .spy extension (*.spy).
Figure 83 - Spying a stream
106
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To spy input and/or output data:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the left-hand list of the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, select the
communication port whose data you want to spy.
3.
Click the Spying tab.
4.
Do one of the following, or both:
• If you want to spy incoming data, check the On Input box and click Apply.
• If you want to spy outgoing data, check the On Output box and click Apply.
A file is generated in the following access path: ..\Gecdis\Settings\Mobiles\Io.
You can open it to check data. This file is generated as the sentences come or go. To be
refreshed, it needs to be closed and re-opened.
5.
IV.6.2.5
End of procedure.
Transmitting Sentences via a Stream
Gecdis allows you to transform your PC into a sentence simulator, transmitting NMEA
sentences.
Figure 84 - Parameters of Sentence Transmission
Here is the description of the NMEA sentences transmission parameters:
• Transmit enable, This check box allows you to permit the transmission process.
• With checksum, This check box allows you to check that the transmitted sentences
are correct. The checksum calculates the value of the sentence and indicates it at the
end of the sentence with the following syntax: *x (where x defines a number). The
device that will receive this sentence will also calculate the value of the sentence. If
both values correspond the one to the other, the sentence will be accepted. Otherwise,
it will be rejected.
• Rate, Defines the transmission rate. The default value of this field is 1.0 s, which
means that sentences are transmitted each second.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
107
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Talker identifier, Allows you to indicate a specific talker to begin the transmitted
sentences.
• Precision, Defines the precision of the minutes in the position format. You can choose
to give a minute precision up to five digits. In reality this precision equals to 1.8 cm.
• Datum, Defines the datum for the position of the sentences.
Figure 85 - Selecting the Sentences to Transmit
To transmit sentences:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
On the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, double-click the stream that will
transmit sentences and click NMEA output.
3.
On the Output Parameters tab, define the parameters that are best suited to your
needs.
4.
Click the Sentences to transmit tab.
5.
Check all the boxes that represent the sentences you want to transmit.
6.
Optionally check the Detailed description box to display in the window an explanation
for all sentences.
108
7.
Click Apply.
8.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.6.2.6
Checking Transmitted Sentences
You can check the sentences transmitted by a stream at the same time they are
transmitted.
Figure 86 - Check transmitted sentences on a stream
To check transmitted sentences:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the left-hand list of the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, click the
stream whose sentences you want to check.
3.
Click
in the first tab of the stream (the left one).
A window opens.
4.
Click Output button to check the transmitted sentences.
The list of all sentences is displayed.
5.
IV.6.3
End of procedure.
CREATING MOBILES AND FLEETS
A mobile is the representation of a mobile object. With Gecdis, you can insert as many
mobiles as desired. It is possible to create different types of mobiles:
• Mobiles representing your ship. Imagine you acquire your position with a GPS but
you also use dead reckoning to estimate it. You will then create two mobiles: one
mobile will represent the GPS, and the other one dead reckoning. This way, if your
GPS experiences operating problems, you will be able to check it comparing GPS and
dead-reckoning data.
• Mobiles in a fleet. Contrary to the mobiles that represent your ship, these mobiles do
not necessarily represent ships. They define any object liable to move (buoys, targets,
etc.) and consequently needing to be followed. Before creating them, you should
create a fleet.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
109
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Specific mobiles i.e., independent mobiles (that do not belong to a fleet), that not
necessarily represent your ship.
You can create a mobile in different ways, depending on specific navigation
circumstances that is why different pieces of information are assigned to each of them,
when creating them. You can create up to three different types of mobiles:
• Dead reckoned mobiles.
• Acquired mobiles, that are intended to receive pieces of information by a sensor.
• The AIS pilot that allows you to acquire information about the NMEA – AIS VHF Own
vessel (VDO) sentence.
To create a mobile:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the left-hand list of the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, select the fleet
you want to add to the mobile (if a fleet has already been created) or click System if you
want to add a mobile representing your ship.
3.
Click Add, select Mobile, and then select the type of mobile you want to create.
4.
Optionally modify the name of the mobile (Mobile Name field) and/or enter a comment
(Comment field).
5.
Expand information about the mobile clicking the cross + in front of its name.
6.
End of procedure.
Important
A RED AND YELLOW SYMBOL (
) MAY BE DISPLAYED IN FRONT OF A PIECE OF INFORMATION.
THIS SYMBOL IS DISPLAYED WHEN THE PIECE OF INFORMATION IS INVALID.
A fleet is a group of mobiles that represent other mobile objects than your ship. For
example, you will use a fleet for ARPA tracks. There are two types of fleets:
• Dynamic fleet is a fleet that is configured with a source of acquisition to dynamically
acquire mobile that compose it. When a fleet is dynamic, there is an indicator in
brackets on the main page.
110
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Static fleet is a fleet that is configured with no source of acquisition of mobile. In this
case, the operator can manually add mobiles that compose it. These mobiles are
acquired or dead reckoned.
To create a fleet:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
Click Add and then Fleet.
3.
In the case of a dynamic fleet, set the source of acquisition.
4.
End of procedure.
Note that you cannot insert anything but mobiles into a static fleet. To insert a mobile
into a fleet, click the name of this fleet and insert the mobile.
IV.6.4
ASSIGNING INFORMATION TO A MOBILE
When opening Gecdis for the first time, a mobile is created with the same pieces of
information as default acquired mobiles (see section IV.6.3).
The pieces of information are as follows:
• Position
• UTC of position (reference)
• SOG
• COG
• SOW
• COW
• True heading
• Charted depth
• Depth
On the other hand, when you manually create a mobile, several default pieces of
information are displayed, that depend on the type of mobile you have added.
You can add information to a mobile, depending on which type of information you can
acquire with your sensors.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
111
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 87 - List of pieces of information that can be added to a ship
To add a piece of information:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
Do one of the following:
• Click Add and then Information.
• Right-click the name of the mobile to which you want to add this piece of information
and then click Add and Information in the pop-up menu.
The list of all the pieces of information that have already been added to the mobile are
displayed. Note that the pieces of information already added to the mobile are greyed.
3.
IV.6.5
End of procedure.
CONFIGURING INFORMATION
After adding pieces of information, you must configure them. Depending on those that are
selected, you can configure or not some fields.
IV.6.5.1
Source Tab
The Source tab allows you to configure the selected piece of information.
112
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 88 - Configuring the Source of a Piece of Information
Allows you to choose the source of your information. You can estimate or
acquire the major part of the information. When you select <Automatic>,
Gecdis chooses, in acquisition mode, incoming sentences that are the most
appropriate and take them into account in priority. The list of sentences is shown
in Appendix D.
Stream
Allows to choose the stream that will be assigned to the selected piece of
information only if the source is not <None>, Estimate, Software or Simulate.
If you select <Automatic>, the most appropriate stream is selected and taken
into account in priority by Gecdis.
Calculation rate
Mainly concerns the position of mobiles. When you enter 0.0 s in this field, the
position is not updated in dead reckoning mode. This field must be used if you
want to maintain your data faster than you receive it. Imagine that you receive
data every 10 seconds. If you enter 2 in the Calculation rate field, your
information will be regenerated every 2 seconds.
Important
If you have specified a calculation rate lower than the refreshing of your
data, the following blinking message will be liable to appear: Calculation
warning!
Specific header
Allows you to choose a specific header for the acquired sentences of the
selected piece of information, so that only sentences beginning with this header
are taken into account. For example, imagine you acquire $SOGGA and
$GPGGA sentences. If you enter $GPGGA in this field, you will only receive
sentences beginning with this header.
Acquisition TimeOut
Allows you to define a delay since last acquisition after which the piece of
information will be considered as invalid. If the timeout is 0, it will not be taken
into account.
IV.6.5.2
Checking Tab
The Checking tab allows you to check the informational update. When data is written in
red, this means that the piece of information is invalid, undefined or does not exist.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
113
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 89 - Controlling a Piece of Information
Is liable to change. It gives the value of the selected piece of information
and indicates the state of this data: Undefined, Invalid, Valid, High
quality.
Gives the UTC of data, provided with information or its timestamp when
the value of the information has been obtained.
Acquisition TimeOut
Gives the same value as defined in the Source tab (in the above dialog
box, no acquisition timeout has been entered).
Elapsed Time from:
- Refresh
Defines the refreshing time (i.e., the interval between two updates) of
the selected piece of information.
- Acq.
Gives the elapsed time since last acquisition of the value for this piece
of information.
IV.6.5.3
Corrections Tab
The Corrections tab allows you to locate exactly the position of your ship. Indeed, your
sensors will certainly not be located exactly at the same location as the conning position,
and the conning position is taken into account to locate the position of the ship. For a
mobile, the corrections will be used especially for the depth and position parameters. For
a fleet, the corrections may concern radars. This tab is only available when the Basic
mode button is not pressed.
Figure 90 - Applying Corrections to a Piece of Information
114
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To apply corrections to the depth parameter:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, click Depth then the Corrections
tab.
3.
On the On the length (L) and On the beam (B) fields of the Positioning adjustment
(/conning pos.) area, enter the length and beam differences between your sounder and
the conning position.
4.
In the first field of the On the value area, enter the slope ratio to correct the value if a
continuous drift of the sensor occurs. In the second field, enter a value for the offset of
the sensor (e.g. the difference between the water and the sensor for a sounder).
5.
Click Apply.
6.
End of procedure.
If you apply a correction to the position of your ship, as indicated in the above dialog box,
a blinking point is inserted in ECS mode (not in ECDIS). This point represents the position
of the antenna (see below).
Figure 91 - Ship with a corrected position
IV.6.5.4
Filtering Tab
The Filtering tab is used to reject some acquired values if they go beyond defined
thresholds.
Figure 92 - Filtering a Piece of Information
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
115
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To apply filtering to the depth parameter:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, click Depth and then the Filtering
tab.
3.
You can apply two types of filtering:
• By threshold. If the difference (absolute value) between two acquired values goes
beyond the threshold indicated, the last value will not be taken into account.
• By percentage. If the difference between two acquired values goes beyond the
percentage indicated, the last value will not be taken into account.
4.
Check the Double value reject box when you do not want to take into account an
acquired value if twice bigger than the last acquired value. This may occur if the echo of
a sounder is also acquired. This is only available for the depth piece of information.
5.
End of procedure.
For threshold and percentage filtering, if two consecutive values go beyond one of the
defined filters, they will be rejected, but the third will automatically be accepted, even if
it also goes beyond one of the filters that have been defined.
IV.6.6
INHERITING INFORMATION
Inheriting information is a process that consists in duplicating from a mobile to another
one, all pieces of information that are not already added to the latter. This process implies
a strong relationship between both mobiles. For example, as soon as a piece of
information is removed from the mobile that inherits information, the piece of information
will be inherited from the parent mobile. Also if a piece of information is not assigned to a
mobile that inherits information from another mobile, which includes this piece of
information, it will be inherited in the first mobile as well.
To inherit information from a mobile:
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles, Input/Output Mobile Configuration.
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box opens.
2.
In the left-hand panel of the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, select the
mobile you want to inherit information.
116
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
Action
In the Parent mobile scrolling list, select the mobile from which you want to inherit
information.
4.
End of procedure.
Some route or AIS system informations are automatically inherited the Own Ship.
IV.6.7
SENSOR SYNTHESIS
The Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box allows you to configure system
information, streams that allow to receive information from sensors, and mobiles and
fleets. The configuration may be complex and numerous. It is not possible to display all of
them at the same time in the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box that is why it
can be useful to sum up all of them in the same location, i.e., an HTML-based synthesis.
Figure 93 - Input/Output Summary in Basic mode
To open the summary window: In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles then
Summary…
IV.6.7.1
Synthesis in Basic and Advanced Modes
Information report is made in a table that is displayed in the Input/Output Summary
window. This window reacts in the same way as a secondary window. You can dock it in a
specific location of the screen, move it or resize it.
Likewise the Input/Output & Mobile Configuration dialog box, the display of the summary
is made of:
• In basic mode: the main parameters of system information, ships and fleets
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
117
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• In advanced mode: all configured parameters
The colour of a piece of information expresses its status:
• Red, if invalid or undefined.
• Black (or white depending on the background), if valid or of normal quality.
• Blue, if of high quality.
The first column lists all information that relates to each object. The other ones give
information about them:
• Value indicates the value of the piece of information
• Source gives the origin of the piece of information. In case of dead reckoning or
computation, either Estimate or Software are displayed. If the piece of information is
acquired, the source of acquisition is displayed;
• Stream allows you to know on what stream the piece of information is connected. The
name of the sensor is given into brackets. This name may have been filled in when
configuring the stream (Comment field);
• Calc. rate specifies the rate a piece of information is calculated.
Figure 94 - Input/Output summary in Advanced mode
Basic and advanced mode windows are similar. They consist of three parts:
• The system (general characteristics, configuration of streams, system information),
• All mobiles, and their specific pieces of information (Own Ship pieces of information
are displayed first, and they are highlighted in yellow),
• Fleets.
IV.6.7.2
Displaying Real-Time Information
Real-time information allows you to reproduce in the summary window the changes you
have made into the Input/Output & Mobiles Configuration dialog box, as soon as they are
performed, and the changes of values provoked by acquisition and computation. The
command is enabled when the corresponding button is pressed.
118
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
AS MANY CONTROLS ARE MADE TO UPDATE INFORMATION AND REPRODUCE WHAT HAS CHANGED,
THE REAL-TIME BUTTON REDUCES THE PERFORMANCE OF YOUR MACHINE. W E ADVISE YOU TO
DISABLE IT IF YOU WANT TO SPEED UP THE PROCESSES.
To display real-time pieces of information:
Step
IV.6.7.3
Action
1.
In System menu, click Settings, I/O and Mobiles then Summary…
2.
In the Input/Output Summary window, click Real time.
3.
End of procedure.
Printing the Summary Window
When printing a summary window, you reproduce on a paper the tables that are currently
displayed in the I/O Summary window. So if you are in basic mode, only the configuration
that relates to basic modes will be printed out. This operation can be performed either in
Landscape or in Portrait mode, depending on the configuration of your printer.
Printing the synthesis opens a window allowing previewing the summary. A toolbar allows
to act on this preview.
To print the summary window:
Step
Action
1.
Select the summary display mode with the Basic Mode button.
2.
Click Print…
3.
In the Print before Preview window, click Print.
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
119
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.7
Dead Reckoning
The Dead Reckoning dialog box allows you to change manually all dead reckoned pieces
of information for any ship.
Figure 95- Dead Reckoning a Mobile
To dead reckon a mobile:
Step
1.
Action
Access the Dead Reckoning dialog box, clicking Mobile and then Own Ship Dead
Reckoning…
2.
In the list of mobiles, in the upper scrolling list, select the mobile you want to dead
reckon.
3.
To assign a new position to a mobile, click
and then the main view, where you want
to locate your mobile, or enter a new position in the position editable field.
4.
In the UTC field, enter the date and time when the mobile has been dead reckoned (you
may have dead reckoned the position before entering it).
5.
Enter the SOW and true heading. To enter those values, the pieces of information must
have been added to the mobile and their source must be Estimate.
6.
Enter the drift Speed and set. To enter those values, the pieces of information must
have been added to the mobile and the source of this information must be Estimate.
7.
Optionally dead reckon the other pieces of information, selecting it in Other Information
and entering the value for this piece of information in Value.
120
8.
Click Apply to see your modifications or click OK to close the dialog box.
9.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IV.8
Fix Position
IV.8.1
FIXING POSITION
The black box generates a message that gives the current position of your Own Ship
every minute. However you can display the position of any ship at a specific time. This
position will be displayed as a target with the DR label, and the UTC that corresponds to
the fixed positionwill be displayed too. This object is only displayed for the current session.
So if you close Gecdis, all positions fixed will be removed from display for the next time
you will launch it.
To fix a position of the Own Ship:
Do one of the following:
• Click the Navigation menu and then Fix Own Ship Position.
• Select your Own Ship and click Fix Position in the pop-up menu.
To fix a position of a ship:
Select the ship and click Fix Position in the pop-up menu.
IV.8.2
DISPLAY OF FIX POSITIONS
Fix positions can be displayed from the Display menu.
To display the fix positions:
Click the Display menu and then Display Fix Position
IV.8.3
FIX POSITION SETTINGS
You can define the duration of the fix position display.
To define the duration of the fix position display:
Step
Action
1.
Click the Display menu and then Fix Position Filter.
2.
Set up the display duration with the cursor from 0 to 24 hours.
If you choose 0, only the last fix position will be displayed, whatever its creation date is.
When you open a new session, the last settings are automatically applied.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
121
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V
CHARTS
Gecdis can read several kinds of charts:
• Raster charts,
• Vectorial charts.
A raster chart is a scanned image of a paper chart whereas a vector chart is produced by
capturing the details and information on the paper chart digitally. The main advantage of
the first one is the fact they all have already been produced as paper chart, so it is easier
to get them. The second ones are more complex to produce, but they offer more
extensive possibilities, such as clicking on an object to have information on it.
Before installing any kind of charts, you must have licences or permits. To do so, you must
follow procedures that will make you contact iXBlue’s sales department.
Only the chart module that has been selected by the user can be operated at a time. This
guarantees projections and datums homogeneity, especially concerning ARCS.
HOWEVER FOR A SAFE NAVIGATION, IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED TO USE ENC CHARTS THAT ARE
CERTIFIED BY THE AUTHORITIES. THESE CHARTS OFFER A SET OF AUTOMATIC INTERACTIVE
FUNCTIONS FOR SAFETY ALERTS SUCH AS SAFETY SOUNDING LINE, DETECTION OF DANGER ON
SHIP’S ROUTE, ETC.).
ENC CHARTS ARE UPDATED REGULARLY.
V.1
Chart Catalogue
V.1.1
DISPLAYING THE CHART COVERAGE
Displaying the coverage area allows the user to view the outline of all cells available in
chart databases (ENC, ARCS, DNC, BSB), as well as the user objects and mobiles.
Each cell is symbolized with a frame. As it is noted in the legend, on the lower right part of
the main view, those frames are blue for ENC cells, yellow for DNC and magenta for
ARCS.
122
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 96 - Chart coverage
To display the chart coverage:
In the Display menu, select Charts menu, Chart Information and check Chart
Coverage.
V.1.2
LIST OF CHARTS
A table lists all available charts in all chart databases (ENC, ARCS, DNC). Each chart is
given information as follows:
• The kind of chart (ARCS, ENC, DNC)
• The producer code
• The chart name
• The chart code
• The usage (Harbour, Coastal , Approach, Berthing and General)
• The geographic coverage
• The issue date
• The update date
• The import date
The list may be organized from any of those pieces of information, except the chart code
and the geographic coverage. This operation is made by clicking the appropriate column
header. You can notice which column is sorted out with the arrow that is indicated in this
header.
IF YOU HAVE FILTERED CHARTS, ONLY THOSE THAT ARE KEPT AFTER APPLYING THE FILTER WILL
BE LISTED IN THE LIST OF CHARTS.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
123
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 97 - The charts catalogue
As for BSB charts, they are listed in a module independent of the other chart catalogue
module. In this module, each chart is presented with the following identification
parameters: name/scale/datum name/edition date/picture.
To display the list of charts:
In the System menu, select Settings menu, Charts and check Charts Catalogue....
To centre the main view on a chart:
Step
V.1.3
Action
1.
In the list of charts, click the cell you wish to centre on.
2.
Click Centre on.
3.
End of procedure.
FILTERING CHARTS
Sorting out the list of available charts allows you to organize charts with a particular
criterion. But filtering the list allows you to display in the planisphere and the cell table
some cells that correspond to one or several specific parameter(s).
They are as follows:
• The type of charts (ARCS, ENC): you can select all kinds of charts, or one in particular.
• The type of usage (Harbour, Coastal, Approach, Berthing, General): you can select all
kinds of usage, or one in particular.
• The geographic area: you can enter the points located in North – East and South –
West or drag with the cursor the desired area with
. If one of the selected points is
inside a cell, this cell will not be part of the selection.
• The route: If you choose a route in the Route scrolling list, the filtered list will consist of
the cells or charts crossed out by this route.
The Navigational Type and Usage criteria can be set at the same time, contrary to
Geographical Area and Route.
124
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 98 - Filtering Charts
To configure the filter of the charts:
Step
Action
1.
In the Charts Catalogue window, click Filter… button.
2.
In the Filter Charts dialog box, check Use a filter.
3.
To configure the Chart and Navigational Types, select the appropriate values in the
corresponding scrolling lists.
4.
If you wish to select a Geographical Area or a Route, check Geographic criteria.
5.
Do one of the following:
• To choose a geographic area, either click Geographic Area and then enter the
coordinates in From (NE) and To (SW) or select an area clicking
and dragging
the mouse on the planisphere.
• To choose a route, click Route and then select the desired route in the scrolling list.
V.1.4
6.
Optionally uncheck the Use a filter box to remove the configuration of filters.
7.
End of procedure.
DISPLAYING THE PLANISPHERE IN BACKGROUND
You can choose to display the planisphere in background or not. By displaying the
planisphere, you get a default global coverage on which can be superimposed specific
chart data (ENC, etc.).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
125
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 99 - Without the planisphere
Figure 100 - With the planisphere
To display the planisphere in background: Click the Display menu, select Charts,
Chart Display Mode, and then check Planisphere In Background or Planisphere
(depends on the cartographic module).
V.2
ENC Charts (iXBlue format)
V.2.1
INTRODUCTION
Gecdis is an ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display Information System): an informational
system for maritime navigation that is considered as the equivalent of an updated
maritime chart.
Gecdis aims at:
• Improving sea security
• Facilitating chart updates
• Reducing the bridgework
This nautical Geographic Information System (GIS) is an expert system which contains
two elements:
• A database, called ENC (Electronic Navigational Chart), containing any geographical
information that is useful to navigate safely
• Integrated equipment
Before any ENC can be used in an ECDIS, it is loaded into the hard disk and converted
into the system’s own internal formal (SENC). The ENC module aims at integrating and
displaying completely ENC charts such that sailors do not have to be preoccupied with the
format of the data to be used. Indeed, the SENC cartographic module does not display
ENCs but a system of electronic navigational charts. Moreover, the ENC standard is
considered as an exchange format, especially by the institutions that have defined it, and
it is strongly recommended to use another format to get the required performance. This
standard is an exchange format and also an independent format for the platform being
used.
Moreover, the user can profit by a presentation of his cells because the data import is
accompanied with a data sorting structure.
126
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.1.1
Launching the ENC Module
The first time you launch the ENC module, no chart is loaded and you have to import a set
of charts.
Figure 101 - Launching the ENC Module
To launch the ENC module:
Step
V.2.1.2
Action
1.
Click the System menu, select Settings, Charts and then Chart Provider.
2.
Click ENCs.
3.
End of procedure.
Default Configuration
Some commands of the ENC module allows you to choose between several options, and
other commands can be edited. Some default values or options are configured. If you
change them, your modification will be taken into account until you change them again.
Figure 102 - Default configuration
To display the options: In the System menu, select Settings, Charts, and then Objects
Detection….
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
127
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.2
CHART DATABASE PRESENTATION
The Charts Database dialog box is lockable/unlockable and allows you to manage the
cells of the chart database.
Figure 103 - ENC Chart Database
Tab
Description
Charts
Lists all available cells with a set of information :
Name: name of the cell.
An example of a cell syntax is: GB4X01NE where :
•
•
GB is the producer code.
4 is the navigational purpose (overview, general, coastal, approach, harbour or
berthing). In the present example, 4 defines the coastal navigational purpose.
•
X01NE is the area described by the cell.
Edition: the cell’s edition and update ENC’s creation, 1 is assigned as a value for this field.
Each time a cell is edited, the edition number increases by 1.
Usage: navigational purpose for which ENC data has been compiled by the IHO.
Scale: scale in which the chart objects have been compiled. When the information is
displayed at a larger scale than that contained in the ENC, the indication “Overscale”
displays.
Issue Date: date of publication and availability of a cell.
Application date: date to which the update becomes available.
History
Center on Cell…
To centre the chart area on the cell you have selected in the
list. See section V.2.7.
Import Commercial
Exchange Set…
To import encrypted ENC cells. See section V.2.3.1.
Import Catalogue…
To import non encrypted ENC cells.Importing a Catalog of
non Encrypted ENC Cells
Import Cells…
To select 1 file (1 cell) or one directory of several cells. See
section V.2.3.3.
Reset Database…
Delete all the cells. The database is thus moved to recycle
bin. See section V.2.6.
Reports the actions done on the cells. 2 points of view:
•
•
Permits
128
Cell by cell (Charts tab)
Operation by operation (Operations tab)
Enables to download a permit file, that is a .txt file required by the software to install all
purchased charts. It contains as many lines as the number of purchased charts :
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Chart Name
Code required to encrypt the chart
Figure 104 - Permit.txt
Import Permits…
To manage the acquisition of permits. See section V.2.8
Delete Permits…
Delete All Permits…
SA
Certificate
V.2.3
V.2.3.1
Presents the SA (Scheme Authority) Certificate that authenticates the origin of ENC charts.
Load Certificate…
To load a certificate. See section V.2.9
MANAGING THE CHART DATABASE
Importing a Set of Encrypted ENC Cells
Encrypted cells are provided with a set of files in an exchange set containing:
Figure 105 - Encrypted ENC Cells set of files
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
129
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
The cells of commercial distributors can be encrypted or not if they are directly provided
by your hydrographic office:
Step
Action
1.
Click Import Commercial Exchange Set…
2.
In the dialog box, select the CD-ROM that contains the desired charts and select:
• The folder containing a file SERIAL.ENC and a folder ENC_ROOT, or
• The folder containing a file MEDIA.TXT and several folders containing a subfolder
ENC_ROOT.
In our example below, the folder that must be selected is one on those entitled
BaseCD_... since it contains the file SERIAL.ENC as well as the ENC_ROOT folder. If
you had selected the ENC_ROOT, the import process would not start:
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
IF YOU IMPORT NON OFFICIAL DATA, A MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED IN THE HIGHER RIGHT SIDE OF THE
SCREEN. ALSO IF YOU LOAD THE CORRUPTED DATA, CELLS ARE REJECTED.
V.2.3.2
Importing a Catalog of non Encrypted ENC Cells
To import a catalogue:
Step
130
Action
1.
Click Import Catalogue…
2.
Locate the ENC_ROOT folder, select the CATALOG.031 file, and then click OK.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
V.2.3.3
Action
End of procedure.
Importing One or Several ENC Cells
You can import S57 file:
Step
Action
1.
Click Import Cells…
2.
Select:
• one file and click Import,
• or a folder and click Import Folder.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
131
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.4
GETTING AN IMPORT REPORT
Each time you are proceeding to an import of cells, a Last Import tab displays in the
Charts Database dialog box.
The Last Import pane describes the result of the process import and the result of an
update cell by cell.
Figure 106 - Import report
To display the detail of a cell, select a cell. The list of the cell’s user objects display with
the action that has been performed on each object. The action can be:
• Inserted : the object has been inserted
• Modified: the object has been modified. The modification can change either the
geometry of the object or its attributes.
• Deleted: the object has been deleted.
Select one of the object and the main view is centred on it. If you have selected an object
tagged Inserted, the Imported Feature dialog box displays giving details on the object.
At this step you can:
Button
Action
Accept Update or
Rejected updates are applied, but they are annotated as rejected. If you
Reject Update
have rejected an update, you can reconsider your action until the Chart
database dialog box has not been closed and no other import operation has
been launched. To do so, select the update and click Accept update.
Annotate object…
The annotation is displayed in the Imported Feature window as well as the
user who added the annotation and the date and time.
The annotation can be removed by clicking Remove Annotation.
132
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Mark as deleted
If you delete this feature, it is mentioned in the Imported Feature window as
well as the user who added the annotation and the date and time.
V.2.5
GETTING INFORMATION ON THE CELLS
In the History tab, click the Charts button to display all the cells imported and available in
the application.
Figure 107 - Information on a cell
Click a cell to get several types of information on it:
• IMPORT NO1A3000 (Edition: 1, Update: 0) on 08/26/10 at 15:05:11. This means the
th
NO1A3.000 file has been imported on the 26 of August 2010 at 15 h 05 mn 11 s. This
is a new edition (update = 0) which has been replaced by the former one.
• IMPORT GB5X01SW (Edition: 1, Update: 1) on 12/14/05 at 15:00:07. The
GB5X01SW.001 file has been imported on the 14th of December. 2005 at 15 h 00 mn
7 s. This is an update (update = 1) that changes the 1.0 cell (Edition =1 / Update=0)
that used to be in the chart database. When an update is applied, the line below is
followed by the list of modified objects with the type of modification. There are several
kinds of possible changes:

Insertion (INSERT)

Modification (MODIFY): the modification can change either the geometry of the
object or its attributes.

V.2.6
Deletion (DELETE).
RESETTING THE DATABASE
To reset database: In the Charts Database dialog box, click Reset Database to restart
with an empty database. The current database is thus sent to the recycle bin.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
133
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.7
CENTRING THE CHART AREA ON A CELL
To centre the chart area on a cell:
Step
1.
Action
In the Charts tab of the Charts Database dialog box, click the cell you wish to centre on,
and then click Center on Cell, or double click the cell.
V.2.8
2.
The chart area is then centred on the selected cell, with its compilation scale.
3.
End of procedure.
IMPORTING/DELETING USER PERMITS
The permit file (license) is a .txt file that is required by the application to install all
purchased charts. This file (via USB key, CD, mail, etc.) is delivered when purchasing
official charts.
It contains as many lines as the number of purchased chart:
Chart Name
Code required to encrypt the chart
Figure 108 - Permit.txt
Any action (importing/deleting) on the permits is done in the Permits tab of the Charts
Database dialog box:
134
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 109 - Permit tab
To import a permit:
Step
Action
1.
Click Import Permits…
2.
In the media containing the permit, select the permit.txt file.
3.
Click Import. Once imported, the permits are stored in the Settings directory of the
application, in the SdnENC.pmt file.
4.
End of procedure.
To delete one or several permits:
Step
Action
1.
Select one or several lines (pressing [Ctrl] key) and click Delete Permits.
2.
You can also delete all permits at once by clicking Delete All Permits.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
135
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.9
LOADING CERTIFICATES
The certificates, .crt files, are required to authenticate the origin of each encrypted ENC
cell. The IHO certificate is automatically loaded when installing Gecdis.
The Load certificate option can be used to:
• Replace the IHO certificate when the one installed with Gecdis is expired (in 2013).
• Load a certificate from another provider of encrypted ENC (PRIMAR for example). If
you load a certificate delivered by an organism other than IHO, the loaded certificate is
used temporarily, i.e., only for a session. If you quit and launch again Gecdis, the
application uses the official IHO certificate again.
To load a certificate:
Step
V.2.10
Action
1.
In the Charts Database dialog box, select the SA Certificate tab.
2.
Click Load Certificate….
3.
Select the certificate available in the Gecdis\SdnEnc directory and click Load.
4.
End of procedure.
CHART LOADING MODES
The ENC module allows you to use two different chart loading modes: automatic loading
and manual loading.
Automatic loading allows to:
• Load automatically all chart cells covering the area displayed on screen.
• Load only charts that correspond to a specific navigational purpose. You can either
select one out of the six navigation purposes: Overview, General, Coastal, Approach,
Harbour and Berthing. Only charts whose navigational purpose corresponds to the
option you have selected will be loaded.
Manual loading allows you to select only a specific chart.
136
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To use the chart automatic loading mode:
Step
Action
1.
Click the Charts menu and then point to Chart Loading Mode.
2.
Do one of the following:
• To load all charts automatically, click Automatic Coverage.
• To load charts with the same chart usage as ECDIS usage, point to Fixed Usage
and select one of the options.
3.
End of procedure.
To use the manual loading of a chart:
Step
Action
1.
In Charts menu, select Chart Loading Mode, and then Fixed Cell…
2.
In the Fixed Cell dialog box, select the cell to be displayed.
3.
Show only visible charts is an option allowing you to list only the charts that are
displayed in the main view. By default the window lists all the charts available.
4.
Click Select to load and display the cell.
5.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
137
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.11
UPDATING
V.2.11.1 Semi-Automatic Updating
This type of updating consists in importing, copying or updating a cell from removable
media like CDs. IHO or their distributors provide these updates. After updating one or
more cell (s), a report tab named Last Import is displayed in the Charts Database dialog
box. The dialog box lists all updates and offers you to accept or reject them.
Note that the report area is available only when importing data and remains displayed
during all the session.
Figure 110 - Accepting or denying updates
To display the detail of an update, click the Last Import tab. For further details on the
import report, refer to the section V.2.4, page 132.
To update a cell:
Step
Action
1.
Access the Charts Database dialog box.
2.
The semi automatic updating module can be used to update:
• Import Commercial Exchange Set… see section V.2.3.1.
• Import Catalogue… see section V.2.3.2.
• Import Cells… see section V.2.3.3.
3.
So, click one of the button and browse to the update files.
4.
When import is over, imported ENCs charts are listed in the Last Import tab with the
status (Inserted/Modified/Deleted).
138
5.
Select the updates you want to reject and click Reject Update.
6.
Close the Charts Database dialog box by clicking the little cross in the upper right corner.
7.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
W HEN YOU REJECT AN UPDATE, IT IS ANNOTATED WITH AN ORANGE MARK AND A TEXT THAT
INDICATES THIS HAS BEEN REJECTED. UPDATE IS APPLIED.
V.2.11.2 Manual Updating
Manual updating is the second type of updates. It consists in modifying the ENC cell by
creating a user object and modifying a chart object or a mariner’s object that has already
been created. Mariner’s objects can be either a point or an area. All the objects are
annoted with an orange mark.
You can:
• Create a point object.
• Create an area.
• Annotate an object.
• Mark a chart object as deleted. This is a specific kind of annotation.
• Move a point object of the official chart. This object is then marked as deleted and a
new identical object is created on the new position.
To consult an existing chart object: You should select it on the chart by clicking right
on it (or by clicking on it while holding the [Ctrl] key in Centre mode).
The Chart Information window shows in its lower part several buttons. The list of buttons
varies if the object is from the official chart or has been manually created.
Figure 111 - The chart information window
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
139
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To access the dialog box allowing the cells to be edited:
Step
Action
1.
Click the Charts menu, and then point to Manual Updates…
2.
Select New Ponctual Object or New Area depending on the type of object you wish to
create.
3.
End of procedure.
To annotate a chart object:
An object can have several annotations. All these annotations are listed in the Object
information window.
Step
Action
1.
Select the object in the chart.
2.
In the Object information window, click Annotate object…. button. Enter information
and click OK. An object can have several annotations. Clicking Annotate object… adds
an annotation.
3.
End of procedure.
First annonation
Second annonation
Figure 112 - Chart object with annotations
140
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To delete all annotations:
Step
Action
1.
Select the object in the chart.
2.
In the Object information window, click Remove Annotations button.
A message displays notifying that all annotations are deleted. The orange mark used to
annotate an object on the chart is removed but the annotations are still displayed in the
Object information (see Figure 113) window.
3.
End of procedure.
Figure 113 - Chart object with deleted annotations
To move a punctual object:
Step
Action
1.
Select the object in the chart.
2.
In the Object information window, click Move object… button.
3.
The window that opens allows you to enter the new position of the object or an offset in
terms of heading and distance between the current location of the object and its new
location.
4.
Once the operation done, click OK
5.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
141
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
When an object of the official chart is moved, the original chart object stays at the same
location and is crossed out with an orange dash. A new object is created at the selected
location. The new object is highlighted. When an object created manually is moved, the
object position changes. Original and new positions are mentioned in the Object
information window:
Figure 114 - Manually moved chart object
To delete a chart object that has been created manually:
Step
Action
1.
Select the object in the chart.
2.
In the Object information window, click Delete object button. This button appears in the
Object information window only if the object has been created manually.
3.
End of procedure.
Select fixed cell loading mode
If you are using the automatic chart loading mode, before creating an object, you must
first select a cell in the Fixed Cell dialog box.
142
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To select fixed cell loading mode:
Step
1.
Action
Open the dialog with Display menu and select Charts, Chart Display Mode and then
click Fixed Cell...:
2.
Select a cell and click Select.
3.
End of procedure.
To create a punctual object:
Step
1.
Action
In the Charts menu, point to Manual Updates, and then select New Ponctual object…
The Point Creation window is displayed:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
143
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
2.
Select the type of chart object you wish to create.
3.
Enter the position of the object. It is also possible to enter a name and an annotation for
the new object as well as a period of validity. It is not compulsory to fill in those fields.
4.
Click OK.
The desired objet is displayed on the chart. It is highlighted with the orange mark that
specifies the objects that have been created manually.
5.
End of procedure.
V.2.11.2.1 Creating Areas
To create an area:
Step
Action
1.
In the Charts menu, point to Manual Updates, and then select New Area…
2.
Locate the points of the are on the chart by clicking. After inserting the last point, right
click. To create an area, you should insert at least three points, which will open the Area
Creation dialog box.
144
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
3.
Select the type of chart object you wish to create.
4.
You can enter a name and an annotation as well as a period of validity for the new
object. It is not compulsory to fill in those fields.
5.
If you wish to change the position of the points that have been inserted with the mouse,
click List of Points. The locations of the mouse clicks are specified. You can remove a
point selecting it, and then clicking the Delete button. You can insert other points of the
area by entering a position in the field, in the upper part of the dialog box, and then
clicking Insert.
6.
Click Refresh view to display the area in real-time, with the deleted and inserted points.
7.
Click OK. The new area is displayed. Its borders are highlighted by small orange circles
that specify the area has been created manually.
8.
V.2.12
End of procedure.
CHART PRESENTATION
V.2.12.1 Simplified and Traditional Display
You can also change the aspect of symbols to make the consultation of cells easier.
Indeed, you can either choose to display the objects the way they are usually displayed on
a paper chart (Traditional symbols) or in a simpler way (Simplified symbols).
To choose between the traditional and simplified displays: Click the Charts menu,
point to Presentation and select your desired type of presentation.
For example, the following symbol
following
in traditional display mode will look like the
in simplified display mode.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
145
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 115 - Chart with simplified symbols
Figure 116 - Chart with traditional symbols
V.2.12.2 Detail Level of Chart Objects
Figure 117 - Chart Objects menu
The ENC module allows you to display or not many data in the chart. There are three
types of chart data display – Display Base, Standard Display and Full Display. Their
difference lies in the chart objects they allow you to display.
If you are not satisfied with a specific level, you can customize the chart display by
defining a filter, and then save the filter assigning it a name. You can save as many filters
as desired. So you can fastly change the display depending on your sailing habits.
Information to be displayed is arranged in a tree, with branches that it is possible to
expand and reduce. So some categories, such as Beacon, includes a list of object in
lower levels (Beacon, cardinal, Beacon lateral, etc.). Checkboxes are represented as
follows:
•
: The object is always displayed because it belongs to the basic mode.
•
: Displays in front of the objects that represents a category. Some objects of this
category are displayed, but not all of them.
146
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
•
: The object is displayed. If the cross appears in front of an object that represents a
category, this means that all objects of this category are displayed.
•
: The object is not displayed. If this appears in front of an object that represents a
category, this means that no object of this category is displayed.
If you check the All box, all boxes will be checked, which is the same thing as selecting
the Full display.
Figure 118 - Configuring ENC Chart Display
To select a default display: In the Display menu, select Charts, point to Chart Objects,
and then click your desired level. When you select one of the default display, a checkmark
appears in the menu, in front of the selected level.
To set a customized display:
Step
1.
Action
In the Display menu, select Charts, point to Chart Objects, and then click Custom ….
The Custom Display dialog box opens. In the tree, the currently checked objects are
those that are currently displayed on the chart.
2.
Add or remove types of objects displayed by checking or unchecking the boxes in front
of their name. You can first take a default display by clicking Base, Standard or Full.
3.
If desired, you can save the current setting by clicking Save As… . When you save a
filter, it is added to the custom ones, in the Chart Objects menu.
4.
Click OK to save this filter.
5.
End of procedure.
IF YOU SAVE A FILTER WITH A NAME THAT HAS ALREADY BEEN ASSIGNED TO ANOTHER FILTER, THE
NEW FILTER WILL REPLACE THE FORMER ONE. YOU CANNOT ASSIGN BASE, STANDARD AND
COMPLET TO CUSTOM FILTERS.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
147
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To select a custom display:
Step
1.
Action
In the Display menu, select Charts then point to Chart Display. Under the separator
that follows the three default level displayed, there is the list of the other filters you have
created.
2.
Click the desired filter. When you select a filter, a check mark is displayed in front of it.
3.
End of procedure.
V.2.12.3 The Presentation Library
Gecdis uses official S52 presentation to draw ENC charts. Used presentation library is
replaceable, but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified service personal and
type approval authorities.
As a user you can get with the used presentation by browsing IHO ECDIS Chart 1, which
is included into Gecdis. Note that it behaves as any ENC chart and it follows your
selections.
The presentation library is the list of symbols defined in the ECDIS standard that is
considered as the reference for symbols. It contains 12 screens, which are shown in the
appendix C of this manual.
To open the presentation library: in the Display menu, select Charts, point to Chart
Information and then Chart Legend (Chart 1)…. After a few seconds a new program is
launched.
148
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 119 - The Presentation Library
To skip to the next page, click with the left button of your mouse. After the last page, you
return to the first one. To scroll the pages in reverse order, right click.
To display the meaning of a symbol, place the mouse on the symbol:
Figure 120 - Tooltip information in Chart 1
V.2.12.4 Security Options
Security is an option allowing you to define different key depth levels.
There are four different depth levels: shallow contour, safety contour, safety depth and
deep contour. These levels constitute four out of the six editable fields of the Safety
Options dialog box (see Figure 121). The other fields, safety height, represents the
secured height of the ship (e.g. if it gets under a bridge) and Safe chart scale represents
the minimum chart scale to have a safe navigation. They aim at defining alarms to inform
the mariner.
Furthermore there are two different modes:
• A bicoloured mode or Safe mode – representation of the bathymetry with 2 colors:

White (maritime zones above 0).

Blue (zones between 0 and safety contour). In that mode, the following values are
equal: shallow contour = safety contour = deep contour.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
149
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• A four-colour mode or Unsafe mode – representation of the bathymetry with 4 colors:

White (the maritime zones above 0.foreshore).

Medium blue (the zone between 0 and shallow contour).

Light blue (the zone between shallow contour and safety contour).

Pale blue (the zone between safety contour and deep contour).
Safety contour: Contour above which the ship cannot navigate safely. This value is fixed
by the navigator according to the characteristics of the ship. The line appears in black and
its width is superior to the other ones. If the value the navigator has entered does not
correspond to any available contour, the safety contour will be the first deeper contour.
The value depends on the ship’s features. On the other hand, the display of the line
depends on the available safety contours.
Figure 121 - Safety contour
Safety Depth: All depths strictly superior to the value of this field are displayed in grey.
The depths that are inferior or equal to the value are displayed in black.
150
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 122- Safety depth
Shallow Contour: Represents the shallow waters value in medium blue.
Figure 123- Shallow contour
Deep Contour: Represents the deep waters value in white and pale blue.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
151
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
THE DEEP CONTOUR IS ALWAYS SUPERIOR TO SAFETY CONTOUR AND SAFETY DEPTH.
Safe chart scale: it represents the minimum chart scale to have a safe navigation. When
a route is created or modified and if that route passes through a chart, the scale of it being
inferior to the safe chart scale, this danger is listed in the associated danger list of the
route.
To define the security contours:
Step
V.2.13
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, Charts and then Objects Detection…
2.
Click the Safe mode or Unsafe mode radio button depending on your desired mode.
3.
Enter the different values in the fields, depending on your needs.
4.
Click OK. You can go back to the default values clicking Default Values.
5.
End of procedure.
DANGER DETECTION OR ANTI-GROUNDING
The danger detection option, also called anti-grounding, is used to detect dangers the ship
may cross because they are located on its way. This option is only available with the ENC
chart module.
When a danger is detected on ship’s run, an alarm is generated. This alarm is reproduced
each time the danger is present in the anti-grounding perimeter.
You can set anti-grounding selecting a limit range or period of time:
• If you select a range, danger detection is made in front of the ship according to the
range.
• If you select a period, the system computes how far from the Own Ship to detect
dangers. The maximum detection distance is 12 nautical miles and the maximum
detection time is 30 minutes.
And define a perimeter starting from the ship and defined by its angular width value.
Figure 124 - No danger detected
152
Figure 125 - Dangers detected (Depth areas)
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
3 actions are required before using this option:
Step
Action
1.
Selecting the objects setting off alarms.
2.
Configuring the danger detection parameters.
3.
Activating the option.
4.
End of procedure.
To select the objects setting off an alarm:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, Charts menu, and then Objects Detection…
2.
In the Safety Options dialogue box, select the Chart Objects Raising Alarms tab.
• Select the type of the objects to detect (Natural and Man-Made Features, Specific
Areas, Restricted and Prohibited Areas) in order to have access to the detailed
list of the objects. The type Dangerous Features lists all objects that are necessarily
detected, they are all default selected but you can unselect some or all (by clicking
on Unselect All button).
• In the list displayed on the right, check the object(s) to which an alarm is assigned:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
153
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
If one check box is unchecked, the following text is displayed in the bottom right corner
of the chart view when clicking on the Information chart area:
ENC 05 – Warning: you choose to not detect all dangers
In case of the danger detection option is not selected (see section II.8), the following text
is displayed in the bottom right corner of the chart view when clicking on the Information
chart area:
3.
For both last types,
• If you do not select Do not limit Depth Checks to the cell of best scale option, the
check will occur only in the cells with the best scale otherwise, if you select this
option, the check will occurs in all cells whatever their scales are.
• Select Check for No ENC of sufficient scale option if you want to be informed
when the selected ENC scale is not precise enough with respect to the safe chart
scale (see section V.2.12.4, page 149).
End of procedure.
To configure the danger detection option:
Step
Action
1.
Click the System menu, Settings and then select General Configuration…
2.
In the Configuration dialog box, select the Security tab.
3.
Do one of the following:
• To set a distance limit, click the Maximum distance to danger (nm), and then
154
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
select a value
• To set a time limit, click the Maximum time to danger (minutes), and then select a
value
• To define a perimeter around the ship, enter a value for the Angular width of
sector to watch.
4.
Click OK.
5.
End of procedure.
See section II.8 page 41 for more information.
To activate the danger detection option:
Step
V.2.14
Action
1.
Click the Navigation menu, and check Danger detection item.
2.
Select again Danger Detection to deactivate the option.
3.
End of procedure.
CONSULTING INFORMATION ON AN OBJECT
There are two types of ENC-related objects:
• Updated objects, which are objects created by the mariner and included on a ENC
cell as an update, and
• Chart objects which are objects already included in the ENC cell.
Clicking these two types of objects, you can display their associated information.
When you select an objet, the scrolling list of the Object information window allows to
display all punctual objects that are located near the location where you have clicked. If no
point object is located at this location, the list shows all lines in this area. If no line is
located near this position, the list shows all the areas near the position. This allows to limit
the number of objects in the list. So if you wish to consult a line or a depth area, click in
the chart in a location that is at least 1 cm far from any point object (buoy, wreck, etc).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
155
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To display information on an object:
Step
Action
1.
Select the object (in Centre mode, [Ctrl] key + clicking the object).
2.
Information about this object is displayed on the right of the screen in the Object
Information window. You can consult the other objects in the main view in the scrolling
list of the Object Information window.
3.
End of procedure.
V.2.14.1 Consulting Information on a Cell
To display information on a cell:
Step
Action
1.
Select an object of the cell.
2.
In the Object Information window, click on the area corresponding to the cell.
3.
End of procedure.
Producer
Name of the hydrographic organism that provided the cell. If the first two letters
of the cell’s name does not correspond to any of the identified organisms, the
window displays the following comment: Non official data.
Edition
The number of publication and update of the cell.
Issue Date
The date of publication.
Update application Date
Usage
Usage of the cell (Overview, General, Coastal, Approach, Harbour or Berthing).
Compilation Scale
This is the default scale of ENC charts. Data is compiled with this scale. The
compilation scale is different from the scale that is only relative to the display. So
the value of the field does not change, whereas the value of the Scale field may
change if you zoom in or out on the chart.
Vertical Datum
Chart datum level to which elevations and heights are referenced.
Sounding Datum
An arbitrary reference plan to which heights of tide and depths are referenced.
156
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.2.15
UNIVERSAL POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC PROJECTION
Optionally, universal polar stereographic projection can be used with ENC charts.
The Universal Polar Stereographic (UPS) projection is a conformal azimuthal projection,
similar in both the northern and southern polar regions. The UPS coordinates system uses
a metric-based cartesian grid laid out on a conformally projected surface.
• In the Northern polar region, the UPS projection is not enabled if the latitude is below
84°N.
• In the southern polar region, the UPS projection is not enabled if the latitude is below
80°S.
Labeling
conventions
The coordinates are expressed in meters and are preceded by a letter idenfying the zone
(see Figure 126):
• Y (West zone) and Z (East zone) at the North pole
• A (West zone) and B (East zone) at the South pole
Figure 126 – UPS coordinate systems
The origin of the UPS coordinate system is the pole (north or south), where X=2 000 000
m and Y=2 000 000 m.
The X-axis lies along the meridians 90°E and 90°W.
The Y-axis lies along the meridians 0° and 180°.
UPS
conversion
examples
•
N85°00'00.0", W45°0'0.0" = Y 1 607 232 mE, 1 607 232 mN
•
S85°00'00.0", E45°0'0.0" = B 2 392 767 mE, 2 392 767 mN
This projection is not available if ECDIS mode is selected.
To activate the UPS projection: In System menu, select Settings, Charts, Projection
then
• For a navigation at the North Pole, select UPS North.
• For a navigation at the South Pole, select UPS South.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
157
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
When UPS North or UPS South is selected, the following items are visible on the chart
(see Figure 127 and Figure 128):
• UPS grids with a spacing of 500,000 meters
• Latitude circles at 88°, 84° for the North
• Latitude circles at 88°, 84° et 80° for the South
• Longitude lines at 0°, 45°W, 90°W, 135°W, 180°, 135°E, 90°E, 45°E
Figure 127 – Example at the North pole
158
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 128 – Example at the South pole
To choose the UPS coordinates as working coodinates:
The mobile positions in the list of mobiles, for the routes, etc…will be expressed in UPS
coordinates.
Step
1.
Action
In System menu, select Settings then General configuration….
The Configuration dialog box displays.
2.
Click on Format tab, then in the Position drop-down list select UPS – Universal Polar
Stereographic (m):
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
159
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
To choose the UPS coordinates as display coordinates for the Own Ship and the
cursor:
• In the information pages
• In the information bar
• In the critical information window
Step
1.
Action
In the Information pages, right click then select Customize… option in the contextual
menu.
The Information windows dialog box opens.
2.
To display the UPS coordinate as display coordinates for the own ship: In the Windows
area of the Information windows dialog box, select the name of the Own Ship (i.e., My
ship in the example hereafter) and in the Information area, choose Position field.
Then click on
button.
The Information properties dialog box opens.
3.
Choose UPS - Universal Polar Stereographic for the Unit field then click OK.
The Own Ship coordinates in the Information window will now be expressed in UPS
coordinates.
4.
160
To display the UPS coordinate as display coordinates for the cursor: In the Windows
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
area of the Information windows dialog box, select System and in the Information area,
select Curseur.
Then click on
button.
The Information properties dialog box opens.
5.
Choose UPS - Universal Polar Stereographic for the Unit field then click OK.
The Cursor coordinates in the Information pages will now be expressed in UPS
coordinates.
6.
For displaying UPS coordinates for the Own Ship and the cursor, in the information bar:
perform the same steps 2 to 5 but firstly by selecting Information Bar in the Windows
area of the Information windows dialog box.
7.
For displaying UPS coordinates for the Own Ship and the cursor, in the Critical
information: perform the same 2 to 5 steps but firstly by selecting Critical Information in
the Windows area of the Information windows dialog box.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
161
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
8.
Click OK in the Information windows dialog box.
9.
End of procedure.
V.3
ARCS Charts
V.3.1
ARCS OVERVIEW
V.3.1.1
Introduction
ARCS (Admiralty Raster Chart Service) charts have been developed by the UKHO (United
Kingdom Hydrographic Office) to provide digitized nautical charts with notice to mariners’
updates.
iXBlue offers the ARCS Navigator licence type.
Two kinds of CD-ROMs allow you to manage ARCS charts:
• Chart CD-ROM. There are 11 CD-ROMs that gather the whole world charts. Over 2800
charts provide coverage of the world’s commercial shipping routes, main ports and
harbors at a wide range of scales
• An update CD-ROM that contains all updates managed by the UKHO. These updates
are cumulative, i.e. every week, a new CD-ROM is produced, with new updates from
the past week. At regular intervals, the chart CD-ROMs are brought up to date with
updates, resulting in a new edition.
ARCS Navigator is fully compatible with a wide range of Electronic Chart Systems (ECS)
and Electronic Chart Display & Information Systems (ECDIS).
V.3.1.2
Registering ARCS Charts
When buying Gecdis with ARCS option, iXBlue sends you a user permit, made up of 16
alphanumerical character, and a PIN code, made up of 4 numbers. To annually subscribe
to ARCS charts, you must tell your vendor which charts you want to order, and give him
your user permit. Then you will receive two files. The first one gives information about the
user and the second one deals with the charts that have been licensed to the user. Those
files will allow you to register your licenses. Note that you will also receive the chart CDROMs.
162
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To register ARCS licenses:
Step
Action
1.
Send your ARCS vendor your user permit and the charts you wish to order.
2.
Your vendor will send you two files allowing you to install permits. Now you can launch
the ARCS module (see section V.3.1.3 page 163).
3.
If you buy other ARCS chart permits, you will have to repeat the step 1.
4.
End of procedure.
For any further details on your ARCS vendor, please contact iXBlue’s sales
department.
V.3.1.3
Launching ARCS Module
Before launching the ARCS module for the first time, check that you have the ARCS
licences and ARCS chart CD-ROMs.
The first launching of the ARCS module allows you to indicate the location in the hard
drive in which charts must be loaded, and to install ARCS permits. This will be made
either when launching Gecdis, if the ARCS module is configured as the default chart
module, or when launching the ARCS module in the software.
Later, you will have to enter your PIN code when launching once again the ARCS module.
Figure 129 - Chart Permit Installation Dialog Box (Before Being Installed)
To launch the ARCS module for the first time:
Step
1.
Action
Launch Gecdis, and do one of the following:
• If SoArcs is the default chart module, skip to the following step.
• If SoArcs is not the default chart module, once you have launched Gecdis, click the
System menu, point to Settings, Charts, Chart Provider, and click ARCS Charts.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
163
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
2.
Action
An explorer window is displayed. This explorer asks you where you want to load ARCS
charts. Give a location in the tree (e.g. Gecdis root folder). Once selected the location,
an ARCS folder is created to gather all your data.
Important
If you wish to connect to an existing database through a network, please check
that the shared folder is an ARCS’s ‘upper-level’ folder. For example, if ARCS
folder is a Gecdis subfolder, you will have to share Gecdis folder and select
ARCS. A warning message will tell you whether the folder is correct or not.
3.
Click OK.
The Chart Permits dialog box is displayed. The fields of this dialog box are empty and a
message that tells you the permits need to be installed is blinking.
4.
Click the Install permits… button.
5.
Select the location of the hard drive into which you have copied the permits, and then
click OK.
The fields in the Chart Permits dialog box are not empty anymore. On the right, the
licensed charts are listed. Now you can click the Close button.
6.
If you have not already installed any chart CD-ROM on your hard drive, the Chart Disks
dialog box is displayed. To install a CD, click
, and then, in the new window, select
the folder in which there are the charts you want to install. Click Install CD.
164
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
7.
Action
When launching the ARCS module, the Pin entry dialog box is displayed. Enter your PIN
number in the the blank field and then click OK.
8.
End of procedure.
To launch the ARCS module for the second time: When launching the ARCS module,
either when launching Gecdis, or from the System menu, the PIN entry dialog box is
displayed. Enter your PIN number in the blank field, and then click OK.
Figure 130 - Managing the PIN Code
IF YOU DELETE OR MOVE THE ARCS FOLDER WHEN GECDIS IS CLOSED, YOU WILL HAVE TO
REPEAT THE FIRST LAUNCHING PROCEDURE OF THE ARCS MODULE.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
165
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.3.2
V.3.2.1
CHARTS
The Chart Database
All licensed charts are gathered within a chart database. Information about those charts
can be checked in the Chart Database dialog box. Each chart of the database is
associated with four pieces of information, in four columns that it is possible to sort:
• The chart number
• The name of the chart
• The chart CD-ROM from which the chart has been loaded
• The edition date
Each chart contains one or more panel(s). A panel is a chart or a chart part. So when you
select a chart, on the left of the dialog box, its associated panels are displayed on the
upper right part. If you select one of the panels, associated information about this panel
are displayed in the lower right part. Information depends on the selected panel.
There might be two alternatives:
• If the panel represents a whole chart, the value of the Panel Number field is 0.
• If the panel represents a part or an element of a chart, the value of the Panel Number
field is any number except 0. In that case, several panels might be listed, ranging from
1 to the number of parts of the chart (e.g.: 3 if the chart is divided into three parts).
Sometimes, a chart might not have a panel whose Panel Number is 0. In such cases, the
chart gathers independent charts. So, there is no main panel.
Figure 131 - Charts and Chart Panels
To open the Chart List dialog box: Click the System menu, select Settings, Charts
and then Chart Catalogue…
To sort a column in the list of charts: Click the name of the column you want to sort. In
the column you have just sorted, an up arrow is displayed in case of an ascending sort,
and a down arrow is displayed in case of a descending sort.
166
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To centre the main view on a panel:
Step
1.
Action
In the Chart List dialog box, select one of the charts of the Chart List pane. The first
panel of the chart is selected by default. In the Panel List pane, select the panel you wish
to display.
V.3.2.2
2.
Click OK.
3.
End of procedure.
Installing/Uninstalling Charts
Charts are gathered into 11 CD-ROMs. After installing permits, you will have to install your
desired chart CDs on your hard drive, in the same location as configured when launching
the ARCS module for the first time.When you install a new edition of a CD that you have
already copied, you do not need uninstall it before installing the new edition. The folder of
the old version is kept during the whole importation process. If importation is correct, the
previous edition is deleted and replaced by the new one. Otherwise, it is unchanged. So
you will never lose data.
Figure 132 - Importing a Chart Disk
To install a CD:
Step
1.
Action
Click the System menu, select Import, Charts and then Chart Disks…. Click the
browse button (
), and then select the folder into which you can find the charts you
want to install. If you want to install a CD, insert it in the CD-ROM drive, and then select
the unit that represents the CD-ROM drive (D in the above example). Click OK.
2.
Click Install CD. Validate the message that warns you the install process will take
several minutes.
The CD is installed in the Data folder from which you have chosen to load ARCS charts.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
167
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
Action
Once installed, a message tells you the import process is over. Click OK, and then
Close in the chart installation dialog box.
4.
End of procedure.
To uninstall a CD:
Step
1.
Action
In the Installed Disk(s) pane of the Chart Disks dialog box, select a CD.
It is impossible to delete a CD whose charts have been loaded.
2.
Click Uninstall CD. The charts of the uninstalled CD are then removed from the ARCS
folder, in your hard drive.
ARCS module cannot work without any chart. That’s why it is not possible to
delete a CD if there is only one CD in the chart database.
3.
V.3.2.3
End of procedure.
Updating Charts
ARCS charts follow updating of notices to mariners. Each week, a new CD is produced,
with all new updates made on the charts since ARCS chart CDs have been edited for the
last time. The updates are cumulative, i.e. the updates made by ARCS the last week are
added, in the same CD, to the updates that have already been added the weeks before.
Installing an update CD is the same deal as installing a chart CD. The update CD code is
WK.
When you install a new edition of an update CD that you have already copied, you do not
need to uninstall it before installing the new edition. Each update CD is kept in the
UPDATE folder of the ARCS structure. So if import is correct, the previous edition is
deleted and replaced by the new one. Otherwise, it is unchanged. So you will never lose
data.
168
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 133 - Installing a Chart Disk Update
In the main view, updates are notified with an orange-hatched square, meaning that one
or several update(s) have been made. You can decide whether you display updates or
not. Squares will be hidden, as shown in the following comparative drawings.
Figure 134 - Updates hidden
Figure 135 - Updates displayed
To display updates in the main view: Click the Charts menu, and then Show Updates.
A mark is displayed in front of the submenu, showing you that the option is enabled..
To install an update CD:
Step
1.
Action
Follow the same procedure as the chart CD installation, by clicking System menu,
selecting Import, Charts and then Chart Disks, clicking the browse button (
), and
then selecting, in the explorer, the update CD.
2.
Click Install CD.
The CD is installed on your hard drive; in the DATA folder you have created to load
ARCS charts. It is also added to the list of disks in the Installed Disk(s) pane.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
169
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
V.3.2.4
Using ARCS Charts
You can display several resolutions for the same main view. You can decide:
• To choose on your own your desired chart resolutions. The
and
icons of the
toolbar allow you to skip between these charts.
• If the
icon is enabled, you can display a chart with an even better resolution.
Likewise, if
is enabled, you can display a chart with an inferior resolution.
• To display automatically the chart with the best resolution. When charts with several
resolutions are available for the centre of the screen, the chart with the higher
resolution is automatically loaded. To select this option, click the Display menu, select
Charts, Chart Display Mode and then click Automatic Loading….
In addition, as ARCS chart are raster-typed charts, some options of the software, such as
projection and scales (in the Display menu), are not available and then disabled.
YOU CANNOT DISPLAY SEVERAL CHARTS SIMULTANEOUSLY AND ZOOM IN OR OUT A CHART. ZOOM
ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE THE CURRENT CHART.
V.3.3
V.3.3.1
CONSULTING INFORMATION ABOUT CHARTS
Chart General Information
When consulting a chart, you can consult information about it (Charts menu, Chart
Informations… option), which is split into two parts:
• General information (Chart Number, Country of Origin, Edition Date, etc.)
• Information about display (Projection, scale, Ellipsoid Name, etc.)
Figure 136 - General Information on ARCS Charts (1)
Chart Number
The number of the chart. This piece of information is also displayed in the
Chart List pane of the Chart Database dialog box.
170
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Chart Title
The name of the chart. This piece of information is also displayed in the Chart
List pane of the Chart Database dialog box.
Country of Origin
The value of this field is normally set to United Kingdom, because ARCS
charts are produced by the UKHO.
Disk Number
There are eleven chart disks. This field shows to which disk the current chart
belong, in the following format: RCx, where x is the number of the disk.
Panel Number
The number of the chart panel. 0 means that the panel is a whole chart. If the
panel is only a part of a chart, the value is different from 0.
Panel Title
The name of the panel, which is displayed in the Panel List pane of the Chart
Database dialog box.
Edition Number
The number of the edition. When the chart is edited for the first time, 1 is
displayed.
Edition Date
The edition date of the panel.
File Issue Date
The date when the file has been saved.
Raster Chart Issue Date
The date when the chart has been edited. This date should correspond to the
edition date of the file.
Latest Notice to Mariners
The code of the latest notice to mariners that has been inserted in the panel.
If 0 is displayed in this field, this means that no notice to mariners has been
found in the current panel.
Latest Correction Issue
The date when the latest notice to mariners has been edited. If 00:00:00 is
Date
displayed in this field, this means that the chart hasn’t been updated since the
last edition of the chart CDs.
Figure 137 - General Information on ARCS Charts (2)
Projection
Any systematic arrangement of Meridians and Parallels portraying the
curved surface of the sphere of spheroid upon a plane.
Each panel is assigned a projection. Projections are as follows:
• Mercator
• Polar Stereographic
• Transverse Mercator
Scale
The scale of the panel that is currently displayed on the screen. A
specific scale is assigned to each panel, depending on information and
details to be displayed.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
171
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Rotation of the panel, if north in the chart is not oriented to the upper
Rotation
part of the screen. This value makes it possible to display the north
arrow in the same direction as north in the chart.
Ellipsoid Name
Smooth mathematical representation of the geoid. Many reference
ellipsoids have been developed to adequately represent the surface of
the earth on different continents at different locations.
Horizontal Datum
Geodetic reference system of the panel. Each panel is assigned a
system, in addition with Gecdis default geodetic system (WGS84). To
make both of them correspond, you must configure Gecdis datum (see
The Datum).
Datum is unknown on several charts. In such cases, the following
message is displayed in red, in the upper centre part of the main view:
Warning! Chart has no reference. Navigate cautiously. An error message
will also be displayed in the Alarms window.
Depth Datum
Arbitrary reference plane to which both heights of tides and water depths
(soundings) are referenced on a chart.
Vertical Datum
Chart datum level to which elevations and heights are referenced.
Depth Unit
Some units are used depending on charts: meters, fathoms/feet,
Height Unit
V.3.3.2
fathoms/fractions, Fathoms, Feet, no depth.
Mariner’s Notes
ARCS charts include many notes, that are located either landward or seaward. When they
are landward, they take up more space than seaward – where you can only see their
name and the (See note) mention. Each chart is assigned a list of mariner’s note. So
when you change the current chart, you also change the list.
Wherever you are in a chart, it is possible to consult this list. Please note that the name of
the note on the chart might not be the same as the name of the note window. This window
will display more generic names (Navaids, Depths, View, etc.). So the chart’s dumping
prohibited name will be noted as Regulations in the note window.
Figure 138 - Consulting ARCS Marnier's Notes
172
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To consult chart mariner’s notes:
Step
1.
Action
Click the Display menu, select Chart Informations and then click Mariner’s Notes….
The ARCS Notes window is displayed.
2.
If you click Notes, the list of mariner’s notes is displayed. When you select a mariner’s
note, a checkmark is displayed in front of its mention.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
173
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VI
NAVIGATION
VI.1
Bearing Lines and Bearing Range Lines
You can make the bearing of an object, a seamark or more generally a position. That way,
a rudimentary trisection can be drawn. This is the same as an EBL.
Figure 139 - Bearing Lines
To make your position with bearing lines:
Step
Action
1.
Click Navigation and then Bearing Line…
2.
Click one seamark and drag the mouse until the angle displayed corresponds to the
bearing of the seamark.
3.
Follow the same steps for a minimum of two seamarks. Your position is in the point of
intersection of all the bearing lines.
4.
End of procedure.
Bearing range lines allow you to display the heading and distance between two spots,
seamarks or locations in the main view. In most cases, you will use them to estimate the
heading and distance between your ship and a particular spot in the main view.
Figure 140 - VRM/EBL
174
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To use bearing range lines:
Step
Action
1.
Click Navigation and then Bearing-Range Bearing Lines.
2.
Click the first spot of the main view of which you want to know the distance and heading
(in this example, this is the Own Ship).
3.
Drag the mouse and click the second spot. A circle is shaped and the bearing and
distance are specified in a yellow box.
4.
End of procedure.
To delete all bearings and EBL: Click the Navigation menu and then Delete All
Bearing Lines.
You can consult the distance and bearing between the cursor and the Own Ship. To do
so, click the Navigation menu and then Own Ship Bearing Range Line.
VI.2
Clearing Lines
A clearing line is a half-line, constructed from seamarks, which shall not be crossed.
Clearing lines are managed by the areas module. Such as lines, they generate alarms as
soon as they are crossed. But contrary to user lines, the alarm is generated only when it is
crossed by the own ship.
There are two types of clearing lines:
• The NMT clearing line means that in order to clear the danger, the bearing of the mark
should be “not more than” the specified value.
• The NLT clearing line means the bearing of the mark should be “not less than” the
specified value.
Figure 141 - No Less and No More Clearing Lines
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
175
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To add a clearing line (no more / no less):
Step
1.
Action
You should locate a seamark. Click Navigation and then Clearing Line (No More)… or
Clearing Line (No Less)…
2.
Click the seamark that can be used as a reference and drag down the mouse to draw a
line far enough from the dangerous point (that is at the right of the ship). The clearing
line is displayed in orange. In its middle, NMT x is displayed (where NMT means no
more or no less than x defines the bearing to the north).
The created clearing lines are stored in the List of User Objects in the Areas folder:
3.
End of procedure.
To edit a clearing line:
Step
1.
Action
Do one of the following:
• Select the clearing line you want to edit and click the Properties… context-sensitive
button on the right of the screen.
• Select the clearing line you want to edit, right click it and click Properties… in the
pop-up menu.
2.
In the Clearing Line dialog box, enter a position in the Position field and enter a bearing
in the Bearing field.
176
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To delete a clearing line: Do one of the following:
• Select the clearing line you want to delete and click the Delete context-sensitive button
on the right of the screen.
• Select the clearing line you want to delete, right click it and click Delete in the pop-up
menu.
To move a clearing line:
Step
1.
Action
Select the clearing line you want to move, right click it and click Move… in the pop-up
menu.
2.
Drag the mouse, which is located in the head of the clearing line to change its position
and bearing.
The NMT (no more than) or NLT (no less than) values change accordingly.
3.
End of procedure.
To rotate a clearing line:
Step
1.
Action
Select the clearing line you want to rotate, right click it and click Rotate… in the pop-up
menu.
VI.3
2.
Drag the mouse, which is located in the end of the clearing line to change its bearing.
3.
End of procedure.
Geographic Calculations
The Geographic Calculations module allows you to calculate the distance between two
points.
You can get:
• The distance between two defined points: Compute bearings and ranges option.
• The position of a point according to the coordinates of point of origin and a parameter
of distance and bearing: Compute B option
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
177
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 142 - Geographic calculations dialog
To get the distance between two points:
Step
1.
Action
Click Navigation and then Geographic Calculations….
The Geographic Calulations dialog box displays.
2.
Select the option Compute bearings and ranges.
3.
Enter or use the
4.
Proceed the same way to define the position of B point.
button and click the main view to define the position of A point.
The calculation result, i.e. the distances and bearings between the two points, is
automatically displayed in the dialog box:
5.
End of procedure.
To get the position of a point according to an origin and value of distance and/or
bearing:
Step
1.
Action
Click Navigation and then Geographic Calculations….
The Geographic Calulations dialog box displays.
178
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
2.
Select the option Compute B.
3.
Enter or use the
4.
Modify any value of the Rhumb Line and/or Great Circle fields, B point’s position is
button and click the main view to define the position of A point.
automatically displayed in the dialog box:
5.
End of procedure.
VI.4
Piloting fix
VI.4.1
OVERVIEW
Nowadays, GPS is often used to specify ships’ position, even if shore is in sight. But this
might fail to work, and you might wish to test the reliability of such a system comparing it
to fixes displayed with a bearing line or a range marker.
A bearing is the angle of a direction (e.g.: a landmark) to the ship’s axis. The position of
the ship can be estimated when several bearings are operated. The ship will be located in
the location where two bearings cross and in the crossing area of three bearings. You can
also estimate the position with a radar range. A circle whose centre is the position of the
landmark and the radius is the distance – measured by the radar – between the ship and
the landmark will be displayed. You can use bearings at the same as a radar range.
Bearings are often performed with landmarks, in other words near coasts. A bearing is a
half-line whose origin is the position of the landmark.
Gecdis allows you to operate bearings or radar ranges:
• From several landmarks, at different times.
• From a single landmark, at different times.
As the observations are performed at different times, they are transferred in accordance
with ship’s kinematics. The transfer starts from the reference position of the Own Ship
(from GPS or dead reckoned). Once the bearings/radar ranges performed, it is possible to
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
179
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
compute the position where the ship is more likely to be located (this is the fixed point).
This point can then be used to reset dead reckoned positions (Set EP).
VI.4.2
USING PILOTING FIX
Piloting fixes are often determined with several bearings; the position of the Own Ship is
deduced from bearings that have been made at different times. The fixes move the same
way as the Own Ship.
Figure 143 - A fix after two bearings
Figure 144 - A fix after three bearings
After two bearings, a line is displayed in the main view.
You can either:
• Validate the point and put it in the main view: Fix Point button.
• Validate the point to adjust the position of the ship on this point. The ECDIS symbol
with DR label will be displayed on the main view: Set EP button.
• Not validate the point and keep it for a moment on the screen before deleting it..
All the operations are performed with the Piloting Fix dialog box. This dialog box consists
in two parts:
• the first one allows to make fixes that correspond to a bearing and / or a radar range ;
• the second one displays information about the fix (the bearing / range between the
reference position of the Own Ship) and allows to perform several operations:
Fix point
Specifies in a graphical way a specific position, at a specific time, of the fix point.
Whenever you click the button, UTC is displayed in orange.
Reset
Removes all bearings and radar range circles that have been added with the Piloting Fix
dialog box. Other bearings, made with the Bearing option for example, are not removed.
Set EP
180
Locate the ship in the fix point. Bearings are removed.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 145 - The Piloting Fix Dialog Box
To make a fix point:
Step
1.
Action
Click the Navigation menu, and then Piloting Fix…
The Piloting Fix dialog box is displayed; the Own Ship Position field indicates the
coordinates of the Own Ship.
2.
Click Pip when you want to measure.
3.
Do one of the following:
• To make a bearing, check the Bearing box
• To measure a radar range, check the Range marker box.
4.
Click
5.
The position of the landmark and the bearing and/or radar range are specified.
, and then the main view, to specify a position for the landmark.
Optionally change those two values.
6.
Click Add to take into account the observation.
7.
Do the same for the other bearings/radar ranges.
8.
Optionally insert the fixed point, delete all bearings / radar ranges or set an EP.
9.
Click Close to close the dialog box.
10. End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
181
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To delete a bearing: Right click the bearing / radar range circle. Click Delete in the popup menu.
VI.5
SAR Diagrams
VI.5.1
OVERVIEW
The Search and Rescue (SAR) system helps navigators to search an object (ship, man
over board) lost at sea. SAR is used with three different diagrams.
Each diagram allows to display a different search route:
• By square spiral,
• By sectors,
• By parallels (from 1 to 5 ships).
Those diagrams comply with those of the IAMSAR manual, book 3.
Figure 146 - SAR Diagrams dialog box
Search routes are configured through the SAR diagram dialog box. This dialog box
contains some general information that concerns all diagrams, and information that is
specific to each diagram.
So before selecting the type of diagram to be used, general search properties should be
set:
• The initial position of search;
• The initial route, i.e the orientation of the first leg, which is generally run head wind. If
the true wind heading is available, the Initial course field is filled with the
corresponding field;
• The R radius of the route. The radius differs according to the type of diagram.
The spacing S is automatically computed according to values that are selected for
Visibility and Search object. The spacing S, i.e. the distance between each line, will be all
the wider as the visibility is better and the search object huge. So a 3 nm visibility and a
searched man overboard implies a 0,4 nm spacing S. On the contrary, a 20 nm visibility
for a 24 m searched ship implies a 18,1 nm spacing S.
182
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To open the dialog box allowing you to configure SAR diagrams: Click the
Navigation menu then click Create SAR Diagram.
W HEN WORKING IN A NETWORK, SAR DIAGRAMS ARE NOT REPRODUCED IN DIFFERENT
MACHINES. SO IT IS POSSIBLE TO PREPARE A DIAGRAM ON ONE MACHINE, WHILE WORKING ON
ANOTHER DIAGRAM ON ANOTHER MACHINE.
VI.5.2
SQUARE SPIRAL ROUTE
Square spiral route is normally used for a single ship, if the wind drift is low. Spiral is
drawn in a square, each side of which is equal to twice the specified radius in the dialog
box. When you select this type of route, the Spacing S can now be editable. This field
allows you to enter the length of the two first lines. The size of the two following lines will
be 2S, the two after will be 3S and so on. For example, if the spacing value is 1 nm, the
two first lines will measure 1 nm, the two following lines 2 nm, the two after 3 nm and so
on – adding 1 each time until reaching the limits of the square spiral that have been
defined by the radius.
Figure 147 - Square Spiral Configuration
The fist S-length line is generally run head wind. The square spiral shape is as follows:
Figure 148 - Square Spiral
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
183
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To create a square spiral SAR diagram:
Step
Action
1.
Click the Navigation menu, and then Create SAR Diagram…
2.
If not already done, check the Draw SAR Diagram box, and then fill in the General
properties and Search conditions fields.
3.
In Diagram type area, click Square spiral.
4.
Enter your desired value in Spacing S, and click OK.
The diagram is displayed in the main view.
5.
VI.5.3
End of procedure.
SECTOR ROUTE
Sector’s route is recommended when a single ship searches in a limited circular area. This
type of route is drawn in a R radius circle, which normally ranges from 2 to 5 nm. Contrary
to square spiral or parallel route, this type of route does not require specific settings; you
just have to click OK to close the dialog box and create the SAR diagram.
Figure 149 - Sector Configuration
The fist line is generally run head wind; its length is 2R. Each turn is equal to 120°, to
starboard.
184
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 150 - A Sector
To create a sector-type SAR diagram:
Step
Action
1.
Click the Navigation menu, and then Create SAR Diagram…
2.
If not already done, check the Draw SAR Diagram box and then fill in the General
properties and Search conditions fields.
3.
In Diagram type area, click Sector.
4.
Click OK.
The diagram is displayed in the main view.
5.
VI.5.4
End of procedure.
PARALLEL ROUTE
Parallel route is recommended when two or more ships take part in the search operation
on a wide area. This type of route is drawn in a R-width rectangle. Each ship implied in the
search follows a trajectory. The trajectory of your ship is drawn with a bolded orange line,
whereas this of the other ships are drawn in dotted lines.
To configure parallel route, you should specify:
• The spacing between lines (S);
• The width of the search rectangle (R);
• The length of each line (L);
• The initial position of the diagram (P);
• The number of ships that take part to the search (N), which ranges from 2 to 5;
• The number of the ship’s trajectory, that corresponds to the ship’s number.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
185
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 151 - Configuring parallel route
Depending on the number of ships, you can draw different diagrams. The number of ships
should depend on the radius and the length of the lines. This type of route is drawn in a
rectangle whose sides are l – S and R – S.
Figure 152 - Diagram with two ships
Figure 153 - Diagram with three ships
186
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 154 - Diagram with four ships
To create a parallel-type SAR diagram:
Step
Action
1.
Click the Navigation menu, and then Create SAR Diagram…
2.
If not already done, check the Draw SAR Diagram, and then fill the General properties
and Search conditions fields.
3.
In Diagram type area, click Parallel.
4.
Enter your desired values for Spacing S, and for the fields of the Parallel area.
5.
Click OK.
The diagram is displayed in the main view.
6.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
187
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII
USER OBJECTS
VII.1
Databases and Folders
A database can be compared to a cabinet in which you would store much information. All
user objects that you will create will be stored in databases.
By default a database called “IxBlue” is created while installing Gecdis. This database is a
.mdb file (the typical database files). All user objects will be added to it.
Gecdis allows you to create as many databases as desired. So you can add a new
database and change the current one.
To add or change a database:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, User Objects and then Database Management.
2.
In the dialog box that displays, do one of the following:
• If you want to change the current database, browse to your desired database, select
it and click Open Database.
• If you want to add a new database, click New Database…, enter the name and click
Create.
3.
End of procedure.
Folders can be compared to the drawers of a cabinet. They contain all the user objects
you create. You can add a folder and change the current folder.
To add a folder:
Step
Action
1.
In the User Objects menu, click Open Objects list...
2.
Click New Folder, enter the new folder name and click OK.
3.
End of procedure.
To change the current folder:
Step
188
Action
1.
In the User Objects menu, click Set Current Folder…
2.
Select a folder in the list of folders and click OK.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.2
Managing User Objects
VII.2.1
GENERAL OPERATION ON USER OBJECTS
When you select a user object, the Consultation window is displayed in the upper right
part of the screen with information about the object you have selected. Below this window
buttons are displayed.
To hide a user object:
Step
Action
1.
Click the object you want to hide.
2.
Use the context-sensitive button, on the right of the screen, and click Hide. The object is
now located with the other hidden objects.
3.
End of procedure.
To move a user object: Select the object to move, and Use the mouse to select the
object, and click Move… in the drop-down menu.
To delete a user object: Do one of the following:
• Use the list of user objects and select the object you want to delete.
• Use the Delete button of the context-sensitive buttons on the right of the screen.
To display the properties of a user object: Select a user object and click the
Properties button. You will then have the possibility to change the information relative to
the selected user object.
VII.2.2
LIST OF USER OBJECTS
The list of user objects allows you to manage the objects of Gecdis object database. It
looks like Windows Explorer, and allows you to display the hierarchical structure of folders
and user objects.
Figure 155 - List of user objects
To open the list of user objects: Click the User Objects menu, and then Open Objects
List.
This menu enables to:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
189
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Display: Centres the main view on the selected object and allows you to make visible
a hidden user object. When a user object is visible, it is displayed in black.
• Hide: Allows you to hide the selected user object in the main view. When a user object
is hidden, it is displayed in grey. If you double-click a hidden user object, it becomes
visible and the main view is centred on it.
• Delete: Deletes the selected user object. When a user objects is deleted, it is located
on the Deleted Objects folder.
• Move Objects: Allows you to change the folder of the selected user object.
• Export: Allows exporting a user object to a database.
• Restore: Restores the selected object to its original folder.
• Clean: Delete permanently the selected object.
VII.2.3
CONFIGURING THE FILTERS
Gecdis allows you to define filters for user objects:
• Filter 1 to sort out objects by date/campaign/Position…
• Filter 2 to sort out objects according to their object visual features (Symbol, colour,
etc…).
Therefore you can gather several types of parameters in one filter and you can choose
which one you want to display on the screen.
You can thus display objects having close similarities.
Figure 156 - User object filter window
To configure the filters: In the User Objects menu, click Define Objects Filter.
VII.2.4
IMPORTING USER OBJECTS
When importing an object to Gecdis, this object is converted into Gecdis format.
BE CAREFUL, THE AMOUNT OF DOWNLOADED DATA MAY INTERFERE WITH THE SPEED AND FLOW
OF THE SOFTWARE TO DISPLAY DATA.
FURTHERMORE KEEP IN MIND THAT THE NUMBER OF MARKS
IS LIMITED TO 1 MILLION.
190
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.2.4.1 TurboWin/Turbo2000 Import
You can import user data provided by TurboWin. It can be marks, areas, routes and tracks
with or without parameters.
Once the data is downloaded, it is displayed exactly like in TurboWin (position of the
objects, parameters related to each object, their colour…).
To import a TurboWin/Turbo2000 user object folder:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Import, User objects and then Turbo 2000 Directory…
2.
Click « … » to browse the database or the folder with the user object(s).
3.
In the Import area, check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import (the
number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window).
4.
End of procedure.
To import several TurboWin/Turbo2000 user objects folders:
Step
1.
Action
In the System menu, click Import, User objects and then Multiple Turbo2000
Directories...
2.
Click « … » to browse the database or the folder with the user object(s).
3.
In the Import area, check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import (the
number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window).
4.
End of procedure.
VII.2.4.2 Gecdis Import
You can import user data provided by another Gecdis application. It can be marks, areas,
routes and tracks with or without parameters.
Once the data is downloaded, it is displayed exactly like in the original Gecdis (position of
the objects, parameters related to each object, their colour…).
To import a Gecdis user object folder:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Import, User objects and then Gecdis database...
2.
Click « … » to browse the database or the folder with the user object(s).
3.
In the Import area, check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import (the
number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window).
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
191
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.2.4.3 Turbo Tactic Import
You can import user data provided by another Gecdis application. It can be marks, areas,
routes and tracks with or without parameters.
Once the data is downloaded, it is displayed exactly like in the original Gecdis (position of
the objects, parameters related to each object, their colour…).
To import a Turbo Tactic user object folder:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Import, User objects and then Gecdis database…
2.
Click « … » to browse the database or the folder with the user object(s).
3.
In the Import area, check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import (the
number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window).
4.
End of procedure.
VII.2.4.4 MaxSea Import
You can import user data provided by MaxSea. It can be marks, areas, routes and tracks
with or without parameters.
Once the data is downloaded, it is displayed exactly like in the original MaxSea (position
of the objects, parameters related to each object, their colour…).
To import a MaxSea user object folder:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Import, User objects and then MaxSea File…
2.
Click « … » to browse the database or the folder with the user object(s).
3.
In the Import area, check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import (the
number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window).
4.
End of procedure.
VII.2.4.5 QuodFish Import
You can import user data provided by QuodFish. It can be marks, areas, routes and tracks
with or without parameters.
Once the data is downloaded, it is displayed exactly like in the original QuodFish.
However you may notice that some objects can be displayed with a different symbol or a
different colour.
192
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To import a QuodFish user object folder:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Import, User objects and then QuodFish File…
2.
Click « … » to browse the database or the folder with the user object(s).
3.
In the Import area, check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import (the
number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window).
4.
VII.2.5
End of procedure.
EXPORTING A USER OBJECT
You can export your user objects to the database of one of the following systems:
• Gecdis
• TurboWin.
SINCE DATA IS ENCRYPTED, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO USE IT ON OTHER SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS.
Figure 157 - User object select
Figure 158 - Format select
To export a user object:
Step
1.
Action
Open the list of user objects (User Objects menu, and then Open Objects List…
option) select the object(s) you want to export and click Export in the menu bar of this
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
193
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
window.
2.
In the dialog box, select the format of data to export (Gecdis or TurboWin) and click
« … » to search and select the destination database.
3.
You can also create a new database by entering the access path of a file that has not
been created yet.
4.
Click Export and, once the export process is done, click Close.
5.
End of procedure.
VII.3
Routes
VII.3.1
CREATING A ROUTE
A route is a continuous itinerary followed by the ship that links two remote points and
possibly separated with intermediate points.
There are two ways of creating a route:
• With the cursor;
• With the Route Properties dialog box.
To create a route with the cursor:
Step
Action
1.
In the Navigation menu, click Create Route with Cursor…
2.
Click in the main view where you want to insert your first waypoint in the main view.
3.
Drag the mouse and click where you want to insert your second waypoint. Do the same
thing for the other waypoints.
4.
Right-click when you want to finish your route.
5.
When you right-click, the leg you have just created will be deleted if you have not first
clicked on the left button.
The Route Properties dialog box displays information about the waypoints of the route.
194
6.
To validate your route, click OK.
7.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To create a route with a list of waypoints:
Step
1.
Action
In the Navigation menu, click Create Route…
The Route Properties dialog box displays.
2.
Edit the first waypoint by entering values in the editable fields (Name and Position) and
by clicking non-editable fields to access the Waypoint n°x Properties dialog box.
Waypoint dialog box for the first waypoint
3.
Add the other waypoints clicking the
button or with the keyboard, doing the following:
• Press the [Ctrl ]+ [Enter] key combination to add a waypoint
• Press the keyboard [TAB] key to switch between the Name and the Position
columns.
4.
Click OK to save the route.
5.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
195
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.3.2
ROUTE PROPERTIES
By route properties, we mean information entered to create this route.
The Route Properties dialog box is the following:
Figure 159 - Route properties dialog
VII.3.2.1 Route Fields
• Name: Name of the route. By default the name is Route.
• Comment: Add any comment on the route.
VII.3.2.2 Waypoints Fields
Each line of the table matches a waypoint, and when you double click on a line, you can
edit the waypoint properties.
It’s equivalent to click on the
button.
• N°: Number of the waypoint. It is incremented by one for each new waypoint.
• Name: Name of the waypoint. You can edit this field by clicking the desired cell and
entering a name.
• Position: Position of the selected waypoint.
• Route: Route to follow for the previous leg. This field is not filled in for the first
waypoint because when a route is indicated for a waypoint, it concerns the leg linking
the current waypoint to the previous one.
• Range: Distance between the selected waypoint and the previous waypoint. This
distance is expressed in nautical miles.
• Remains: Distance that remains to run in the route. The first cell of the Remains
column is equal to the last cell of the Total Range column.
• Total range: Distance from the departure to the selected waypoint. The last cell of the
Total Range column is equal to the first cell of the Remains column.
• Max. XTE (Cross Track Error): Distance on each side of the route that the ship shall
not pass. If this occurs, an alarm is generated. This field is not filled for the first
waypoint.
• Turn radius: This field corresponds to the turn radius starboard (System menu,
196
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Settings, I/O Mobiles, and Own Ship Characteristics…, Navigation tab). It is not filled
for the first waypoint and the last waypoint.
• Comment: Comment of the waypoint.
VII.3.2.3 The toolbar Commands
In the lower part of the dialog box there are several icons allowing you to manage the
waypoints:
Adds a new waypoint after the selected waypoint.
Deletes the selected waypoint.
Shows the properties of the selected waypoint and allows you to configure some of
them.
Moves the selected waypoint up in the list of waypoints.
Moves the selected waypoint down in the list of waypoints.
Inverts the route so that the first waypoint of a route becomes the last one, the
second one the last but one and so on.
Prints on the default printer the route properties in the form of a table.
To add a waypoint to a route with the Waypoint Properties dialog box:
Step
1.
Action
Select a route and access the Route Properties dialog box clicking the Properties
context-sensitive button.
2.
In the table of the Route Properties dialog box, click the waypoint before which you want
to add a waypoint and then the
3.
button.
In the Waypoint Properties dialog box, enter: a name, a position, a turn radius, a max
XTE, and if you want a comment.
4.
Click the Rhumb line or Great circle radio button if you want the leg that ends with this
waypoint to be computed with rhumb line, or great circle.
5.
If you want, select a display context in the Display Context scrolling list.
6.
Click OK.
7.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
197
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To add a waypoint to a route with pop-up menus:
Step
1.
Action
Select a route and then right-click the waypoint before which or after which you want to
add another waypoint.
A pop-up menu opens.
2.
Do one of the following:
• Click Insert Wpt After if you want to insert a waypoint after the selected waypoint.
• Click Insert Wpt Before if you want to insert a waypoint before the selected
waypoint.
3.
Drag the mouse to insert the new waypoint in your desired location.
4.
End of procedure.
Figure 160 - New waypoint dialog (other than for the 1st point)
To delete a waypoint: Do one of the following actions:
• In the Route Properties dialog box, select one of the line of the table and click
. In
the main view, the selected waypoint is removed if you click OK. A new leg links the
waypoints that used to be positioned before and after the deleted waypoint.
• Select a route and then the waypoint you want to delete in this route right-clicking it.
Click Delete Wpt in the pop-up menu. The waypoint is deleted
198
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To edit a waypoint and change its properties:
Step
1.
Action
Double-click the line of the waypoint you want to change or click it and click
.
The Waypoint Properties dialog box is displayed. This dialog box is divided in one or two
areas: Waypoint and optionally Previous Leg (if you have selected any line but the
first one).
VII.3.3
2.
Modify the properties in the Waypoint Properties dialog box displayed.
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
PLANNING A ROUTE
Planning a route aims at estimating the duration and speed of your journey. To calculate
the ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) for each waypoint you just need to indicate one of the
ETA or the date of departure. You can also decide to fix an ETA or a leg speed so that
this piece of information remains unchanged.
To plan a route:
Step
1.
Action
Right-click the route you want to plan then select Planning… context sensitive button.
Click OK in the message box “You must set at least one ETA” that appears.
The Planning dialog box opens.
2.
Indicate at least one estimated time of arrival (ETA). Check one of the boxes of the ETA
column, click the cell and enter an estimated time or use the up and down arrows to
select a date.
3.
ETA and leg speed for each leg are automatically calculated, according to the ETA you
have indicated in the previous step. If you have entered a date without checking the cell,
the date will not be taken into account by the computation.
4.
You can enable any constraints to your route checking boxes of the ETA or Leg Speed
fields and entering in front of the boxes your desired ETA for the waypoint or leg speed
for the previous leg.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
199
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
5.
VII.3.4
Action
End of procedure.
DUPLICATING A ROUTE
Duplicating a route consists of copying a route you have already created. This second
route must overlap the first route. If you do not modify the location of a waypoint in one of
these routes, you will only see one route.
To duplicate a route:
Step
Action
1.
Select a route you have already created.
2.
In the context-sensitive buttons, on the right of the screen, click the Duplicate button.
The Route Properties dialog box of the new route is displayed, giving you the same
details as those entered for the first route.
3.
Do one of the following:
• Click OK. This route is superimposed upon the first route. You will optionally change
it later on when required.
• Change the parameters as you want for this new route.
4.
VII.3.5
End of procedure.
REPRESENTATION OF A ROUTE
The representation of the route depends on the status of the route. Indeed, a route can
either be planned or alternate, highlighted or not.
200
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.3.5.1 Alternative Route
The route is still displayed with a thin and tight orange dotted line. Each waypoint is
represented with an orange circle whose centre is the waypoint. If you have planned a
route, the planned speed for each leg is displayed in a small square.
Figure 161 - Alternative route
VII.3.5.2 Planned Route
The heading (route) is displayed with a thick dotted red line. Each waypoint is represented
with a circle whose centre is the waypoint. The lane is displayed with a thin broad spaced
out red-dotted line. If you have planned your route, the planned speed for each leg is
displayed in a little square.
Figure 162 - Planned route
VII.3.5.3 Alternative Route that is Highlighted
The alternative route is displayed with a thin and tight orange dotted line. Each waypoint is
represented with a circle around the waypoint. Around each waypoint there is a square. At
the end and beginning of each leg, a line crossing and closing the lane is displayed. The
lane is displayed with a plain and thick red line. The heading (route) of a leg is displayed
in the middle of this leg. If you have planned your route, the planned speed for each leg is
displayed in a little square
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
201
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 163 - Highlighted alternative route
VII.3.5.4 Planned Route that is Highlighted
The planned route is displayed with a thick dotted red line. Each waypoint is represented
with a circle around the waypoint. A square encircles each waypoint.
A plain and thick line represents the lane. The heading (route) of a leg is displayed in the
middle of this leg.
Figure 164 - Highlighted planned route
VII.3.6
SWITCHING IN ROUTE MONITORING
When you launch the route monitoring mode on a planned route, the Pilot window opens,
giving several useful pieces of information about the route. While in route monitoring, you
can still change the properties and planning of the route.
Along the route monitoring, several alarms may occur:
• When you reach a wheel-over, the following message displays in the Alarms window:
Wheel-over Waypoint x reached (where x represents the waypoint number).
• If your ship exceeds the XTE, the following alarm displays: Max. exceeded : x nm
(where x represents the distance from XTE, distance expressed in meters up to 1852
meters and then nautical miles).
• When the last waypoint is reached, the following alarm displays: Waypoint x reached.
202
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To switch in route monitoring mode:
Step
1.
Action
In the Navigation menu, click Start Track Keeping to display the route monitoring
information. To do so, the ship must be inside the lane of the route.
VII.3.7
2.
If you want to stop the route monitoring, click Navigation and then Stop Track Keeping.
3.
When you switch to monitoring mode, the Pilot view is displayed.
4.
End of procedure.
THE PILOT VIEW
This view includes the following items:
• TO name: destination waypoint name.
• TO-NEXT course: next leg course. Corresponds to the Route field of the Route
Properties dialog box. This value is also indicated in red colour in the middle of each
leg (it is corrected to the nearest whole number).
• NEXT name: next destination waypoint name.
• Heading to steer: heading to steer to follow the selected route. This value takes into
account the drift.
• XTE: current cross track error from Own Ship position to the route lane. This value can
be preceded by << if the ship must steer to the left to reach the route or >> if the ship
must steer to the right.
• WOD: wheel over distance from the current Own Ship position to the wheel over line.
• WOTTG: wheel over time to go corresponding to WOD and Own Ship SOG.
• WOT: UTC date and time of arrival to wheel over line (according UTC, SOG and
WOD).
• Final ETA: The estimated time (UTC) of arrival to the last waypoint of the route.
Figure 165 - Pilot View
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
203
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.3.8
AUTOPILOT CONTROL
The autopilot control allows you to select the type of autopilot to use, and the sentences to
transmit.
There are four autopilot modes:
• Manual: this mode, which is selected by default, allows you to start the autopilot
manually or end one of the other modes. This implies that Gecdis sends no command
to the pilot.
• Steering course: allows you to follow a continuous heading. When this mode is
enabled, a route is displayed with the entered heading and the Pilot view is displayed
with COW and Heading to steer information.
• Track Keeping: launches the route monitoring mode. If the Ship is outside the lane of
the planned route, the Pilot view is displayed with the information concerning the first
waypoint of the route. If the Ship is inside the lane, information about the next waypoint
of the route is displayed.
• Pilot to one Waypoint: allows creating a one-legged temporary route between the
Ship and the entered coordinates. It is not possible to save this type of route.
Figure 166 - Autopilot control dialog
To open the autopilot control dialog box: In the Navigation menu, click Autopilot
Control…
To use the steering course mode:
Step
1.
Action
In the Autopilot Control dialog box, select Steering Course option, and then enter a
value in the Heading To Steer field.
2.
Click OK or Apply.
A dotted line is displayed, with the same heading as the one you entered. To follow the
mentioned course, you will have to follow this line.
3.
204
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To use the route monitoring mode:
Step
1.
Action
To start, do one of the following actions:
• In the Autopilot Control dialog box, select the Track keeping option. If your ship is
not in the lane of the route to follow, a message displays warning you that you
cannot start the route monitoring, and the Manual mode is selected.
• In the Navigation menu, click Start Route Monitoring.
2.
To stop the route monitoring mode, do one of the following:
• In the Autopilot Control dialog box, select the Manual radio button.
• Click the Navigation menu and Stop Track Keeping
3.
End of procedure.
To use the autopilot on a waypoint:
Step
Action
1.
In the Autopilot Control dialog box, click the Pilot to one Waypoint radio button.
2.
Do one of the following actions:
• Enter the position of the point to be reached.
• Click
, and then click the desired location into the chart.
3.
Click OK.
4.
End of procedure.
To transmitt sentences to the autopilot:
Step
Action
1.
In the Autopilot Control dialog box, click the Outputs tab.
2.
Select the stream that will transmit the sentences, check the sentences you want to
transmit and click OK.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
205
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.3.9
THE CHANNEL VIEW
The Channel View is a plane representation of the main view. It gives:
• An overview of the route followed by the ship,
• A better understanding on how the Ship is moving. That is why this window is oriented
in leg-up mode, according to the route direction.
Its behaviour is the same as the main view. For example, when you select a mobile in the
main view, it is also selected in the Channel View.
Functions that can be applied to the route monitoring are available in the channel view.
You can modify the scale (from 1/1 200 to 1/45 000) and the grid (each square may
represent 25, 50, 100, 250 or 500 meters) of this view.
Figure 167 - Channel view
Furthermore, an alarm warns you when the distance from your ship to this wheel-over is
equal to 2.5 times the length of a square of the grid. For example, if the grid is configured
to 100 meters, the alarm will be displayed when approaching the wheel-over by 250
meters.
This view includes the following items:
• TO name: destination waypoint name.
• Heading to steer: heading to steer to follow the selected route. This value takes into
account the drift.
• XTE: current cross track error from Own Ship position to the route lane. This value can
be preceded by << if the ship must steer to the left to reach the route or >> if the ship
must steer to the right.
• WOD: wheel over distance from the current Own Ship position to the wheel over line.
• WOTTG: wheel over time to go corresponding to WOD and Own Ship SOG.
• WOT: UTC date and time of arrival to wheel over line (according UTC, SOG and
WOD).
206
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To change the scale or the grid of the view:
Step
Action
1.
In the View menu, click Channel View.
2.
Right click the channel view. A pop-up menu is displayed that allows you to change the
scale or grid.
VII.3.10
3.
Select Scale or Grid, and click your desired value.
4.
End of procedure.
CHANNELLING
Channelling allows you to assign a display context to the route leg. So you can define
specific properties (scale, dedicated windows to display, etc.) for each leg. Channelling is
only active in route monitoring mode.
To assign a channeling to a leg:
Step
Action
1.
Define your desired display context for the leg.
2.
Access the waypoint edition dialog box selecting it, right clicking and clicking Edit
Waypoint…
3.
Select your desired display context in the Display Context scrolling list of the Waypoint
Properties dialog box.
4.
VII.3.11
End of procedure.
IMPORTING/EXPORTING ROUTES
One of Gecdis features consists of importing and exporting, with a hard or removable disk,
all user objects created by the user. Another feature enables to export or import routes
from streams (COM, NET and FILE).
So in case the user stored routes on his/her GPS, he/she should be able to recover them
in the software.
The main benefit of this feature (import/export) is to support communication between
several systems (Gecdis  Gecdis, Gecdis  Turbo, etc.).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
207
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To import a route via a stream:
Step
1.
Action
You must have previously enabled a stream when configuring the mobiles. If this has not
been done yet, click System, Settings, I/O and Mobiles and then Input/Output Mobile
Configuration. In the dialog box, click the Add button, point to Stream and click the
stream you wish to use (COM if you wish to recover data from your GPS).
2.
After configuring the stream, click System, Import…, User objects, and then select
Route from NMEA.
3.
As far as information about routes are not received, the Waiting NMEA sentences
warning message is displayed. The import report is displayed into the Report window. So
if the import process has failed, you can know why. Finally, the main view is centred on
the route you have imported. The import process cannot be carried out towards file
streams.
4.
End of procedure.
To export a route:
Step
1.
Action
Select a route that is not currently used and in the object information window, click
Export.
2.
Select an output stream, i.e. the stream to use to export the route.
3.
Click OK.
4.
You can check transmitted data by clicking the magnifying glass icon of the Stream
Configuration dialog box. Then select Output in the contextual menu of the grey window
that displays.
5.
208
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.4
Tracks
VII.4.1
STARTING/STOPPING A TRACK
It is possible to start/stop a track for any mobile.
To start/stop the Own Ship’s track:
Step
Action
1.
Click Mobile, and then click Start Own Ship Track.
2.
To stop the track, click Stop Own Ship Track.
3.
End of procedure.
To start/stop any mobile’s track:
Step
Action
1.
Starting/stoping the track is done by using the toolbar icon, or via the Mobile list.
2.
Click Mobile and Open the mobile list…
3.
In the dialog box that displays, select the ships or fleets for which you want to start a
track, and then click Start.
The tracks start.
4.
To stop some of the tracks, or all of them, click Mobile, open the list of mobiles, select
the mobiles for which you want to stop a track, and then click Stop.
5.
VII.4.2
End of procedure.
TRACK TEMPLATES
To configure a track template: In the System menu, Settings, Tracks, and then Own
ship Track recording…
Figure 168 - Track parameters dialog
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
209
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.4.3
TRACK COLOR FILTERS
Color filters allow you to assign colors to scale values, for each possible parameter of a
track. The colour of the track changes in the screen with the selected parameter.
TO ASSIGN THE TRACK TO THE COLOUR FILTER OF A PARAMETER, YOU MUST HAVE PREVIOUSLY
SAVED THIS PARAMETER FOR THE TRACK TEMPLATE YOU ARE USING.
To configure a color filter:
Step
Action
1.
In the System menu, click Settings, Tracks and then Tracks Color Filters…
2.
Choose a parameter in the Parameter scrolling list.
3.
For each line:
• In the To field, enter a ending of the end limit of the range.
• Select the color that will represent the defined range.
4.
Once all ranges are configured, repeat the steps for all parameters you want and then
click OK.
5.
End of procedure.
IN ECDIS MODE, ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOR (SEE I.4.2 PAGE 19).
210
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.4.4
DISPLAYING THE TRACK PROFILE
The profile of a track gives you the evolution of this track depending on a range or on the
evolution of a specific parameter.
To see the profile of a track:
Step
Action
1.
Select the track.
2.
In the context-sensitive buttons, right part of the screen, click the Profile button.
The track profile displays in the lower part of the screen. You can now choose to display
a specific range or parameter.
3.
End of procedure.
Title Bar
Status bar showing the name of the tracked mobile, as well as the
creation date of the track.
First Scrolling List
To display only a part of the track.
You can either display a distance that ranges from 1 nm to 1000 nm of
the track or the whole track. If you select a value that is superior to the
length of the track, the whole track is displayed.
Second Scrolling List
This scrolling list allows you to select one of the filters and display the
profile of this filter.
The Graph
This graph gives you the profile of the parameter for your desired
distance.
When you drag the cursor on one of the points represented in this graph,
the location to which this location refers in the main view is displayed.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
211
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VII.4.5
CHANGING THE TRACK PROPERTIES
Whenever you want, you can modify the track’s visual representation.
To change properties of a track:
Step
Action
1.
Select a track and click the Properties... context-sensitive button.
2.
In the Track Properties dialog box, change, if you want, the line and color and the
maximum number of points to display.
3.
When you choose a color, this color is displayed for the half segment of the current track
(the current segment is the line that starts at the last point recorded in the track).
4.
End of procedure.
Name
Name of the tracked mobile, and the date of creation of the track.
Line
Type of line for the track. There are 8 types of lines available.
Color
Color of the track. This color is applied only if no track color filter
has been assigned to it.
In ECDIS mode, all user objects are drawn with the orange
color (see I.4.2 page 19).
Display at most
The maximum number of points for the track. The track stops if this
maximum number is reached.
VII.5
Marks and Events
VII.5.1
CREATING MARKS
In this part you will see how to create a mark and an event. The difference between both
of them is that a mark can be inserted anywhere in the main view whereas an event can
only be inserted in the current ship’s position (events are mainly used when an immediate
decision should be taken).
212
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 169 - Mark properties dialog
To create a mark:
Step
1.
Action
Click User Objects and then Create Mark… in the main view where you want to create
your mark.
2.
A dialog box allowing you to configure the mark is displayed. You can define the different
parameters of the mark:
• Position
• Date
• Name
• Charted depth
• Immersion
• Appearance defined by a symbol and color
Note: To improve the repetitive tasks, the last four colors and symbols used are
selectable directly.
In ECDIS mode, all user objects are drawn with the orange color (see I.4.2
page 19).
• Comment
Note: The contents of the Comment field will be displayed nearby the symbol of the
mark.
3.
Once configured the mark, click OK.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
213
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
4.
Action
If you select the mark you have just created, the Object Information window gives you
the details of the mark and allows you to edit it with context-sensitive buttons.
5.
End of procedure.
If you know that you may use many times a mark with special characteristics, you can
define it so you will not need to create it whenever required.
To define a mark template:
Step
Action
1.
Click User Objects, Marks and then Define Marks...
2.
Click New... button.
3.
In the new dialog box, enter a Name (compulsory), choose a Colour and a Symbol, and
click OK.
The name of the new mark is displayed.
4.
Click Close.
5.
Click User Objects and point to Create Predefined Marks to display the label of the
mark you have just created.
214
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
6.
Action
To insert the mark, click the name of this template and insert it, clicking wherever in the
main view. The mark is automatically selected. You can then use the context-sensitive
buttons to manage it.
7.
VII.5.2
End of procedure.
CONFIGURING MARK DISPLAY OPTIONS
By default, when you insert a mark, only its symbol is displayed. You may want to display
other elements, like its depth.
Figure 170 - Mark display options dialog
To configure the mark display options:
Step
Action
1.
Click Systems, Settings, User Objects and Mark Display Options...
2.
In the Comments area of the Mark Display Options dialog box, do one of the following:
• Check the Display comments box if you want to display comments you may have
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
215
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
entered while creating a mark,
• Check the Outline comments box to highlight the mark comments if displayed in
the main view,
• Check the Hide symbol if a comment is set box if you want to hide the symbol for
which you have indicated a comment.
3.
In the Depths area:
• Check the Display depths box if you want to display depths you may have entered
while creating a mark,
• Check the Outline depths box to highlight the mark depth if displayed in the main
view,
• Check the Hide symbol if a depth is set box if you want to hide the mark symbol for
which you have indicated a depth.
4.
Check the Use large mark symbols box if you want to display symbols with double size
in the cartographic views.
5.
End of procedure.
IN ECDIS MODE, ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOR (SEE SECTION I.4.2
PAGE 19).
VII.6
Areas
An area is a polygon the user can add to symbolise and highlight, on the screen, a part of
the chart that is remarkable or dangerous.
Each area can be associated to several characteristics:
• It can be closed or opened.
• It can have a specific visual representation (line and/or symbol).
• Furthermore, it is possible to configure the area so that an alarm is generated when
one or several mobiles (ARPA targets for example) defined by the user enters or quits
this area.
Figure 171 - Area alarm
These alarms are:
• Mobile is in the area, if the mobile enters the area,
• Mobile is out of the area, if the mobile leaves the area.
216
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To create an area:
Step
1.
Action
Click User Objects, and then Create Area... drag the mouse in the main view clicking
each time you want to define the limits of a side of your area.
2.
Right click to end the area creation process.
3.
In the New Area dialog box, enter a name for this area in the Name field, and a date in
the Date field:
4.
Click the Closed Area radio button if you want your area to be closed or the Open Line
radio button if you want your area to be opened.
5.
In the Appearance section, choose a colour, a pattern and a line for this area.
Note: In ECDIS mode, all user objects are drawn with the orange color (see I.4.2
page 19).
6.
Enter, if you want, a comment for this area. You will be able to consult this comment in
the area’s Object Information window if you select this area.
7.
Click the Alarms tab. This tab must be filled in a logical way. In the Send Alarm when
area, do one of the following:
• Click The Own Ship if you want to send an alarm when the Own Ship crosses the
zone.
• Click A mobile in and select one of the mobile in the scrolling list of this field if you
want to send an alarm when a mobile which is not the Own Ship crosses the area.
• Click Any Mobile if you want to send an alarm whenever a mobile crosses the zone.
8.
Check Enters and/or Is Leaving if you want to send an alarm when the mobile enters
and/or leaves the area.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
217
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
9.
Action
Click the Points List tab. You can insert or delete a point in this tab.
10. When finished, click OK.
11. End of procedure.
VII.7
Circles and Sectors
The circle functionality enables to insert circular-type areas. Alarms can be assigned to a
circle, they are generated whenever a mobile enters or leaves the circle.
The sector (crowns) functionality enables to insert operation areas.
This functionality enables to create four types of objects:
• A crown,
• A sector,
• A circle,
• A sector of circle.
The creation of a sector is performed in 4 steps:
• Step 1: Selecting the centre of the sector,
• Step 2: Defining the exterior radius of the sector,
• Step 3: Defining the first and last angles of the sector,
• Step 4: Defining the radius range.
Figure 172 - Example of a Sector
To create a sector:
Step
1.
Action
Click the User Objects menu, and Create Sector… then click the location in the main
view in which you wish to put the centre of the sector.
2.
Drag the mouse to make a circle. As you drag the mouse, sector’s radius and angle are
displayed.
3.
Click and do one of the following:
• For the angle to represent the first angle of the sector, move the mouse clockwise.
218
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
• For the angle to represent the last angle of the sector, move the mouse counter
clockwise.
4.
Click once again and drag the mouse to define sector’s width.
5.
End of procedure.
To create a circle:
Step
1.
Action
Click the User Object menu, and then Create Circle… then click in the main view where
you want to insert the circle, drag down your mouse to create a circle and then click.
The properties of the circle you have just created are displayed in the New Circle dialog
box.
2.
In the General tab, enter a name for this circle in the Name field, a date in the Date field,
the position of the centre of the circle and the radius.
VII.8
3.
Select a Colour, a Pattern and a Line, and if you want, enter a Comment.
4.
If you want to assign an alarm, click the Alarms tab.
5.
When the circle is defined, click OK.
6.
End of procedure.
Text
To create a text:
Step
1.
Action
Click User Objects menu, and then Create Text… and then click in the main view
where you want to insert a text.
2.
The Text dialog box looks like a typical text editor. In the blank window, enter your text.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
219
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
Action
Format your text with the formatting bar. You can:
• Change your font,
• Change the size of your font,
• Change the general appearance of the font assigning to it the bold, italic, underlined
characteristics or changing its colour,
• Change the alignment of the font,
• Insert bullets.
Note: In ECDIS mode, all user objects are drawn with the orange color (see I.4.2
page 19).
4.
Enter a date in the Date field and If you want, change the position in the Position field.
5.
Click OK. When you have created a text, you can edit it, shift it, hide it or delete it
selecting it and clicking the corresponding right context-sensitive buttons.
6.
220
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VIII
THE RADAR MODULE
VIII.1
Configuring the Radar Source
Radar information can be obtained in several ways:
• Via a digitizer that gives information on a radar overlay,
• Via a file generally used for simulation. This file can be a .snr or a .srd file.
To configure a radar source:
Step
1.
Action
Click the Radar menu, point to Source and then select your desired source (once
selected, the source is checked).
VIII.2
2.
If you have selected NetRadar, your machine looks for the radar image digitizer.
3.
End of procedure.
Turning the Radar On/Off
Once configured your radar source, the first thing you must do is to activate it, to turn it on.
To activate the radar:
Step
Action
1.
Click the Radar menu and then Display Radar Overlay.
2.
The radar is activated and displays information on a layer that overlaps other layers.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
221
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To disable the radar: In the Radar menu, uncheck Display Radar Overlay.
VIII.3
Configuring Information of the Radar Source
To display data provided by a Netradar, you must have previously configured it. This
means you must have selected the type of Netradar you are using and filled in the
configuration fields.
The NetRadar source source must be configured through the menu Radar/Source /
Configure NetRadar…
• Main parameters of the Server tab
Figure 173 – NetRadar settings, Server tab
222
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Server settings
If several NetRadar boxes are present, allows you to select the NetRadar to
configure.
Server IP address
Allows you to configure where to read the radar.
Data Port and Control
Port where the data are read(Data Port and where the commands are sent
Port
(Control Port). The values of both fields mus be equal. If the value of the
Data Port field is false, no radar image is received. If the value of the
Control Port field is false , no command can be achieved.
Ping
With the Ping button, you can validate the connectivity with the radar
antenna.
Important : after an information connection change, you must click on
Apply button to ping with the new values.
Server played
If several NetRadar boxes have been configured, select here the source of
the radar images you want to display.
• Main parameters of the NetRadar tab
Figure 174 – NetRadar settings, NetRadar tab
In the greyed box, the data are those sent by the selected radar.
STC/ Sea Slope (STC
It modifies the slope of theSTC curve. The bigger the value of this field, the
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
223
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
slope)
more attenuation is performed on a long distance.
CFAR (Constant False
The CFAR processor removes sea and rain clutter from the radar screen
Alarm Rate)
for a clear view of targets. The goal of CFAR is to remove the range-related
dependence and local clutter background of the radar image and make the
probability of a detection (typically measured by a target being brighter than
a fixed threshold) equal for all parts of the image.
Range
It gives the distance radar capacities.
Gain
It gives the video gain (signal intensity), which is the amplification given a
signal by the receiver. This control can be compared to the volume control
on an audio amplifier. The bigger this value the more noise will be
displayed. Gain values range from 0 to 127.
STC (Sensitivity Time
This is a technique for reducing radar receiver gain automatically when
Control)
receiving echoes or replies from close range (where maximum sensitivity is
not generally required), allowing more gain to be applied to data from
farther ranges where more sensitivity is desired. This increases the
possibility to detect small targets at longer ranges.
FTC
The “rain filtering”. Removes the echo from far noise.
Attenuation
It changes the level of attenuation of the video signal before it is sampled. If
the radar’s video signal is too strong (the image saturates or it is difficult to
control the gain), you can set it with this option.
Heading offset
If the head-up orientation of the radar image doesn’t correspond to the
head-up orientation of the radar it can be adjusted here. This field ranges
from 0 to 1024. Finding the optimal correction is a matter of trial and error.
Trigger Delay
If the cable linking the radar transmitter and the display unit is long, you can
reduce the waiting period entering a value in this box. Check the radar
image to see if it is necessary to give a correction. If the straight lines are
not straight, you must enter a correction. Make some tries before finding the
best correction.
Option
Auto-set Gain, Rain, Sea, Tune/Auto Tune on range changing : if the
box is selected, the settings of Gain, Rain Sea are automatic.
• Parameters of the Radar antenna position tab
224
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 175 – NetRadar settings, Radar antenna position tab
Own Ship
This radio button indicates that the radar antenna is aboard the own ship
and thus moving with it.
Lp
Longitudinal distance between the conning position and the antenna.
Value must be negative if the antenna is located backwards the conning
position.
Bp
Transverse distance between the conning position and the antenna.
Value must be negative if the antenna is located on the left of the conning
position.
Heading Offset
Correction of the antenna heading.
Value is in degree, from -179° to 180°.
Fixed
This radio button indicates that the radar antenna is at a fixed location that
must be specified in the position field ou using
button. You must also
enter the heading of the radar.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
225
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To configure parameters of the Netradar you are using:
Step
Action
1.
In Radar menu, select Source and click NetRadar to select the data provider.
2.
In the Radar menu, click Source and then Configure NetRadar.
The Configuration dialog box appears.
3.
In the Server tab, select the NetRadar that you want to configure in the Server settings
scrolling list.
4.
In Server area,
• Enter the settings corresponding to the server that you are using (NetRadar type, IP
address/Data Port/Control Port…) then click on the Ping button to validate the
connectivity.
A message displays in the Configuration dialog box.
• If necessary, define the input stream and output streams in the
5.
In Streams with Master/Slave(s) area: if necessary, define the input stream and output
streams in the dedicated fields.
6.
In Server played area, select the netradar (in Server field) source of the radar images
you want to visualize.
226
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
7.
Action
Select the tab corresponding to the NetRadar type that you will visualize and, if
necessary, customize the settings (STC, attenuation, gain, range…see the description of
the fields in the tables above).
The displayed data correspond to those of the radar source selected in the Server field
of the Server tab.
8.
Enter the radar antanna location in the Radar antenna position tab using the
buttons to move along the various tabs.
9.
If several Netradar have to be configured, redo steps 3 to 7 for each NetRadar that you
will enter in the Server settings field.
10. End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
227
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
VIII.4
Customizing Radar Data Display
VIII.4.1
CHOOSING THE COLORS
Tha radar data display can be configured with several color modes:
• ECDIS (
), display with 2 colors
• Gradual ECDIS (
), display a gradation between both
shades of green of ECDIS color scale
• ARPA (
), display of a gradation that you can change as
much as you want.
• HEAT (
),display of a range of colors from dark blue to white.
Non editable.
For each of these color modes, it is possible to define a Threshold, expressed in
percentage defining the display level of the radar data. By increasing the threshold value
you will display less radar information. The Gain allows you to increase the level of the
signal emitted by the radar. The Brightness allows you to configure the brightness of the
radar image.
Figure 176 – Configuration of the colors of radar data
With two of the color modes, you can configure the color numbers displayed in the radar
image: Gradual ECDIS and ARPA. You can choose to display 8 or 256 colors. If you
select 8 colours, 8 different shades willl be displayed in the radar video. If you select 256
colours, 256 different shades willl be displayed in the radar video. With the ARPA color
mode, the Colour buttons are active. With them you can change the colors of the radar
video.
In the the Trail area of the Radar Colors dialog box, you can configure the trail of the
targets of the radar video. The crolling list of the Length field allows you to define the
228
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
length of the trail. Th Threshold moving cursor allows you to favour the trail display with
respect to the video display. The more the percentage is increased and the more you will
see the trail to the detriment of the video.
To configure the display of radar data colors:
Step
1.
Action
Click the Radar menu and then Colours….
The Radar Colors dialog box opens.
VIII.4.2
2.
Configure the Threshold, Gain and Brightness fields.
3.
Select the Video color scale.
4.
If needed, define other settings then close the dialog box.
5.
End of procedure.
ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY IN THE VIEW
Gecdis has an option that you can use each time you modify the radar image range. This
option enables to fit the main view display (zoom in or out) to the radar image.
To adjust the main view display: In the Radar menu, click Link to Scale.
VIII.4.3
CONTROLLING RADAR DATA DISPLAY
You can, at any time, control and change the radar data display.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
229
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To change display settings:
Etape Action
1.
In the Radar menu, click Controls….
The Radar Controls window displays:
2.
Click on Video.
This gives you access to four parameters:
These parameters are explained in section VIII.3.
3.
Click on Advanced.
This gives you access to sixparameters:
These parameters are explained in section VIII.3.
VIII.4.4
4.
If necessary, modify the displayed parameters
5.
Fin de procédure.
buttons.
OPTIMIZING THE RADAR VIDEO DISPLAY
Several ways exist to improve the radar video display.
• Interference rejector: Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another
radar. It is seen on the screen as a number of bright spikes in the form of curved
230
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture. This type
of interference can be reduced by activating the Interference Rejector.
• Scan to scan: This option enables to improve the video display and decrease the
noise by comparing the display of previous scans (up to 5 scans) and to display the
only data that is persistent from a scan to another until the current scan. SC/SC:
Number of scan to take into account for the display.
• Echos average: This option enables to improve the video display and decrease the
noise by averaging the preceding scans (up to 3 scans) and the current scan.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
231
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
IX
REPLAY MODULE
Replay module allows users to play back and thus view mobiles’ tracks. Once these tracks
are stopped and stored in Gecdis user database, you can play back the routes of the
different mobiles in order, for example, to proceed to analyses.
Launching the replay module opens another Gecdis application on the second screen.
Since this occurrence of the application is used by the replay mode, some of the menus
(such as, for example, those that are used to create user objects (Library menu), or
manage the mobiles (Mobiles menu) are greyed. On the other hand, the commands to
adjust the display scale and those to centre the main view remain available. The Replay
menu includes 3 additional commands.
To recover a normal use of Gecdis application, it is highly recommended to quit the replay
mode by closing the second occurrence.
IX.1
Configuring/Launching the Replay Module
The replay module uses the tracks previously created via the User Objects menu.
So, before using the replay module, check that the user database containing the tracks
you want to use is well loaded. However, note that if you have not changed the database
since the tracks record, there is no need to check the database.
When launching the replay mode, you must also enter the period to take into account by
the replay mode. You can’t enter a start date superior to the end date.
232
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To launch the replay mode:
Step
Action
1.
In the View menu, click Replay.
2.
Configure the replay mode speed and start it by clicking
3.
You can, at any time, pause the replay by clicking
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
.
, or interrupt it by clicking
233
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
X
TIDE MODULE
X.1
Consulting Tidal Gauges and Tidal Streams
Gecdis allows you to display tidal gauges and tidal streams. When selecting a tidal gauge
or a tidal stream of the chart, some information is displayed in the Object information
window.
When you select a tidal gauge, you are given the following information:
• The predicted date
• The tide (in meters)
• The next high tide (its date and time plus its height)
• The next low tide (its date and time plus its height)
• The coefficient, for a French harbour
• The next sunset
• The next sunrise
• The next quarter plus its date
When you select a tidal stream, a pop-up window is displayed giving you the speed and
heading of the tidal stream.
Be careful!
Tide data is commercial data not included by default when purchasing Gecdis.
234
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
X.2
Tidal curves
Tidal Curve option allows you to display the evolution of the tidal gauges in a specific time
for a specific place. The Tidal Curve window will allow you to see the evolution of the tide
gauges in many harbours all around the world.
Station: name of the station for which you consult data. More than 10 000 stations are
listed.
Date (UTC): date of consultation of the tidal gauge. The date that is written corresponds
to the beginning of the tidal curve.
Icon bar: The icon bar allows you to change the date and time of the consultation of the
station height of tide.
Graph: The graph is represented with two axes. The horizontal axis represents the time
and the vertical axis represents the height of tide. The dark part represents the night
period and the light part represents the day, which is the period from the sunset to the
sunrise.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
235
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To configure a tidal curve:
Step
Action
1.
Click Tide and Display Tide Gauge to display the tide gauges in the main view.
2.
Display the Tidal Curve window doing one of the following:
• Click Tide and Tidal Curve…
• Select a tide gauge and then click the Tidal Curve context-sensitive button.
3.
In the Station scrolling list of the Tidal Curve window, do one of the following:
• Click inside the field and enter your desired place. As you type the name you will see
the list scrolling.
• Scroll the list to select the place the tide gauges of which you want to see the
evolution.
4.
In the Date (UTC) field, change the date and time field for which you want to see the
tidal gauges doing one of the following:
• With the left and right arrow keys, select information of the field and manually
change the date pressing the up and down arrow keys.
• Click the arrow of the date field, optionally change the forecasting month with the
side arrows of the calendar and click the day of the selected month.
• Enter directly a date with the keyboard.
5.
Click
6.
When you drag the trackball in the tidal curve, the height of the tidal gauge and the time
to centre the main view on the gauge of the station you have selected.
for this height are indicated.
7.
236
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
X.3
Configuring the Tidal Stream Display
To configure the tidal stream display:
Step
Action
1.
Click Tide and then Settings...
2.
Choose Tidal Stream tab:
3.
In the Max field, enter the value you want to be considered as the higher tidal stream for
the tidal stream arrow display. For example, if you enter 3.0, the largest arrow available
will represent 3.0 kn. If there is a tidal stream superior to 3 kn in the main view, this field
is no longer taken into account and the highest value is assigned to the largest arrow.
4.
You can click Auto if you want the arrow width to be calculated according to the streams
visible on the main view. The largest value is assigned to the largest arrow of the main
view.
5.
In the Type scrolling list, select your desired display for your desired display for the tidal
stream and choose a colour in the Colour field.
6.
When finished, click OK (Set Default allows you to go back to the default values).
7.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
237
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
X.4
Control of tidal stream date
The date control allows you to control the date that is taken into account to display the
tidal stream and tide gauge on the screen. So when this date is modified the arrows and
gauges used to define the tidal stream and tidal gauge change accordingly.
date specified for the tidal stream display.
UTC specified for the tidal stream display.
To display information one hour before the current displayed date.
To display information 15 minutes before the current displayed date.
To reset the date and time. When you click this icon, the system date and time are
displayed.
To display information 15 minutes after the current displayed date.
To display information one hour after the current displayed date.
Automatic Refresh.
When checked, the tidal streams and/or tide gauges of the main view are refreshed with
15-minute steps.
238
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To configure the date:
Step
Action
1.
Centre the main view where you want to observe tide gauges or tidal streams.
2.
Click Tide and then Display Tide Gauge to display the tide gauges and/or Display
Tidal Stream to display the tidal streams.
3.
Click Tide and then Date Control…..
4.
In the Date Control dialog box, you can change the date of the forecast doing one of the
following:
• With the left and right arrow keys, move into the date field and change manually the
date pressing the up and down arrow keys.
• Click the arrow of the date field, optionally change the forecasting month with the
side arrow of the calendar displaying and click the date of the selected month.
• Enter directly a date with the keyboard
5.
Change the UTC doing one of the following:
• In the icon bar below the UTC field, click the two far-right and far-left icons to change
the time depending on your desired schedule. You can click the middle icon to enter
the system time.
• Enter with the keyboard a UTC in the UTC field.
• Change the UTC clicking the hour, minutes or seconds and clicking the side arrows
of this field.
6.
Option: check the Automatic Refresh. box if you want the tidal streams to be refreshed
automatically in the main view.
You will no longer be able to change the date.
7.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
239
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
X.5
Reference Station
You can also set a reference station to have a reference
tide displayed on map.
Note: If the tide date is not synchronized with current time,
data will be displayed in colour.
The reference station choosen will be
highlighted in white.
This reference station can then be used to set the “Height of Tide” information on your
ship, if no commercial data are available on your area.
X.6
Ship ‘Height of Tide’ information
“Height of Tide” information can be added on your ship through IO configuration:
[Right Click on your ship \ Add \Information… ]
240
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Choose Software if you want
Height of tide automatically set with
your commercial data.
Important: If no commercial data is
available for your area, tide of
reference station will be used.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
241
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XI
WEATHER MODULE
The weather module is a set of tools required to define weather parameters and display
weather data provided by different data files.
Use this module to select different weather parameters under the form of coloured areas
or vectors.
XI.1
Data Download
The import of weather data generates GRIB files (.grb).
To import a file:
Step
XI.2
Action
1.
Click Weather and then Weather Display…
2.
In the Grib file of the Weather Display dialog box, enter the path to the file to import.
3.
End of procedure.
Pressure
The Grib option enables to display pressure information. This data is available via weather
data files. Once selected, received data is analyzed and displayed in Gecdis.
The visual representation is as follows:
242
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
You can also display the isolines and the legend.
To display pressure data:
Step
Action
1.
Click Weather and then Weather Display…
2.
Select Pressure.
3.
End of procedure.
To display pressure isolines:
Step
Action
1.
Click Weather and then Weather Display…
2.
Click Contour.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
243
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To display the legend:
Step
XI.3
Action
1.
Click Weather and then Weather Display…
2.
Click Color Scheme.
3.
End of procedure.
Wind
The Grib option enables to display wind information. This data is available via weather
data files. Once selected, received data is analyzed and displayed in Gecdis.
The visual representation is as follows:
To display wind information:
Step
244
Action
1.
Click Weather and then Weather Display…
2.
Click Wind.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XII
SEDIMENTS MODULE
The Sediments module has been designed to display or hide sedimentary zones (silt,
sand, rock, gravel etc.) according to data from official maps or data acquired from the
sounder you are using. This data can be displayed in the main 2D view as well as in the
3D view.
XII.1
Display
Sediments are displayed on the map in transparence.
To display sediment data: Click Sediments, and Show official Sediments if you have
sediment charts.
To display data records:
Step
1.
Action
In the Sediments menu, click Show All Available Records. This action enables to
display all your records.
2.
Click Sediments and then Show Current Record Only if you want to display only the
current record.
3.
XII.2
End of procedure.
Configuration
There are two types of sediment data:
• Personnal data
• Official sediments
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
245
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Personnal data includes data provided by a sensor such as WASSP, SeaScan, Roxan,
etc.:
To configure the display of sediment data provided by a sensor:
Step
Action
1.
In Sediments menu, click Settings…
2.
In the Personal Data tab, click Data to display and select your sensor.
3.
According to the selected sensor, the visual representation options may vary
(Sediments, Hardness and Roughness).
4.
Then select the data point extension, the beam angular coverage, the area extension
factor, and the transparency level.
5.
End of procedure.
To configure the acquisition of sediment data when using a sensor:
Step
Action
1.
In the Sediments menu, click Settings…
2.
In the Personal Data tab, click Single Beam Settings… (if your sensor = single beam)
or WASSP Settings (if your sensor = WASSP sensor).
3.
In case of Single Beam:
• Select the ship on which the sensor is installed.
• Then select the flow.
• And then select the type of sentence.
4.
In case of WASSP:
• In the Databases tab, check Real time recording database.
246
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
• In the Data tab, select the WASSP output stream.
• Check the options you want to apply.
5.
End of procedure.
However official sediments are sediment databases. Importing these databases is done
directly from the source folder. The access path to this folder is the following:
…\iXBlue\SeaXpert\IXMSedi
To display the histogram: In the Sediments menu, select one of the histograms.
To display the table of sediments: In the Sediments menu, click Sediments Table.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
247
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XIII
BATHYMETRY MODULE
SeaXpert bathymetry module is used to represent underwater topography on the chart.
Two types of visual representation are available:
• Isolines that are contour lines that join points of equal elevation, given by sounding
lines. The application allows you to configure max and min values of the sounding
lines.
• Colored surface that is used to represent the sensors by a colored texture ranging
from green for less deep depths, to blue for the deepest depths. Display this surface
can appear opaque or transparent to see chart and user data.
On the contrary to isolines, this representation of bathymetry can be used to represent
areas all over the globe if you have the corresponding data files.
248
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XIII.1
Display Configuration
SeaXpert enables to customize the visual representation of bathymetry. Therefore you
can:
• Change the color code.
• Define the area’s boundaries to display by entering the min and max depths.
• Add effects: shadow, light and transparency.
• Configure the value of two isolines.
The window dedicated to display customization is as follows:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
249
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XIII.2
Bathymetry Data to Display
Choosing the bathymetry data to display is done via the Bathy Data dialog box. You
select the modules or the databases that are to be taken into account to generate the
shape of the seabed surface.
5 modules are available to get bathymetry data:
• Chart sounding: seabed shape is defined with information provided by the ship’s
sounding line.
• Marks: seabed shape is defined with information provided by the marks entered by the
user.
• Database bathy: seabed shape is defined with information provided by SeaXpert
bathymetry database.
• Tracks: seabed shape is defined with information provided by SeaXpert tracks
database.
• WASSP: seabed shape is defined with information provided by multibeam sounding
line.
Here is an example of Bathy Data dialog box.
To configure the reception of bathymetry data:
Step
XIII.3
Action
1.
In the Bathy menu, select Bathy Data…
2.
The Bathy Data dialog box displays, so you can choose the provider of bathymetry data.
3.
You can also fix the limit of interpolation and the maximum precision.
4.
End of procedure.
Database
Bathymetry visual representation done with colored surfaces uses information provided by
user databases:
• User databases gather all sounding points acquired by your devices. You can thus
create your own databases. Note that a database requires at least one sounding point
to be created.
250
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Commercial databases are used to display existing bathymetry data, i.e. acquired
sounding points.
Both types of databases can be used as bathymetry data providers for 2D and 3D display.
You can choose to take into account or not the sounding points of each database.
The Database configuration window is the following:
Source: to choose the data source for the recording (in many cases this source will be
your ship).
Recording: to launch the recording of bathymetry data.
Archive Current Record: to record all acquired bathymetry data in one database.
Empty Current Record: to delete all acquired points. Be careful the operation is
irreversible!
Display Points: to display points acquired during a recording operation.
Select Points: to select bathymetry measuring points acquired during the recording
operation.
Delete Selected Points: once selected you can delete these points. This option is very
useful to delete absurd values.
Configuration: to select the data to display. There are two types of data: data acquired in
real time and data saved in a database.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
251
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To start recording bathymetry data:
Step
Action
1.
In the Bathy menu, select Bathy database:
2.
You can select the data provider in the Source menu.
3.
To start recording, click Recording. The recording process starts immediately. To stop
the recording process, check again Recording. This unchecks the option.
• Once your recording is done, save it with the Archive Current Record button.
• If you are not satisfied by the record, you can delete it by clicking the Empty Current
Record button.
4.
End of procedure.
To modify the record (i.e. deleting some of the acquired points):
Step
Action
1.
In the Bathy menu, select Bathy Database and then Display Points.
2.
Once all the points are displayed, click Select Points in order to check those to delete.
3.
Once the points are selected, click Delete Selected Points.
4.
End of procedure.
To configure bathymetry data to display:
Step
1.
Action
In the Bathy menu, select Bathy Database and then Configuration… and check the
options to display.
252
2.
Click OK
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To import bathymetry data:
Step
1.
Action
In TEXT format:
• In the System menu, click Import and then Bathy Data.
• Click Import From Text File…
2.
In Turbo format
• In the System menu, click Import and then Bathy Data.
• Click Import From TurboWin...
3.
End of procedure.
To visualize the bathymetry data you have imported: perform the procedure described
in section XIII.2 to activate the database and then the procedure to configure the
bathymetry data to display (see above).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
253
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XIV
3D VIEW
In SeaXpert, the 3D view is a representation of the screen taking into account depth
values.
3D view representation lies on all available depth spots in the chart given by sensors,
marks and tracks for which a depth sensor must have been defined.
XIV.1
Area
Representation of 3D View
Explanations
A
Toolbar dedicated to the 3D view
B
The elevation gives the viewing angle of the camera compared to the horizontal.
C
The orientation is a compass giving the chart orientation. The blue side of this compass stands for
the geographical north.
254
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Note that when the 3D viewing angle is located under water, orientation changes by 180°, in such a
way that North and South are reversed.
D
Information bar summing up the selected parameters.
You can choose to display information or not. To do so, use the 3D View Configuration dialog box.
Displayed information is:
• Z/X = vertical exageration
• Canvas grid resolution that determines the accuracy of the representation
• Zoom: option dedicated to the 3D view.
• Orientation in °
• Elevation: shows camera angle between its direction and the horizontal axis.
• Z Max: maximum depth displayed in the 3D view. A positive value is a value above 0.
• Z Min: minimum depth displayed in the 3D view
XIV.2
3D Tools
This dedicated 3D toolbar cannot be configured.
Table 2 - 3D toolbar description
Button
Explanation
Canevas grid resolution determines the accuracy of the representation.
• The lower the value is, the less accurate the bathymetry representation is
• The higher the value is, the more accurate the bathymetry representation is
• Automatic mode is a mode that adapts the canevas automatically acconding to the
geographic area covered by the camera’s vision. The more you zoom, the better the canevas
grid is
Vertical exaggeration enables to increase or decrease the vertical scale compared to the
horizontal scale
3D displays the 2D general view
3D is centered on the boat
3D is centered on the trawler
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
255
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Monochrome representation of the bathy surface
Default color of the bathy surface
Color of the surface with the default scheme
3D is positioned towards the north
3D is positioned according to the ship’s heading
Visualization of the 3D from above
Display of water surface (level 0)
Display (or not) of objects layers
Display of the chart layer
Display of the isolines
Display of the sediments
256
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XV
WASSP
XV.1
Introduction
The WASSP module is able to record seabed hardness (as well as bathymetry) and
provides a more accurate resolution of the bathymetry than the one gotten with sensors of
monobeam sounders (grids with sub-metric resolution). SeaXpert WASSP module is
totally dedicated to Wassp data and cannot record any other data (as for example, manual
or chart points).
The WASSP module offers the following functionalities:
• Acquisition and storage of bathymetry and hardness data provided by SMF Wassp.
• Provides bathymetry data for bathymetry and 3D modules.
• Provides hardness data for sediment modules.
• Import/export Wassp database.
• Deletes points from the database by a simple geographical selection.
You can find the module’s tools in the Wassp menu.
The acquisition of data from the Wassp program is carried out using a
TCP stream. Therefore Wassp owner software (server) and SeaXpert
must be properly configured.
XV.2
Configuring and Using WASSP with SeaXpert
XV.2.1
CREATING A STREAM DEDICATED TO WASSP DATA
Step
1.
Action
Under System menu, I/O and Mobiles, click Input/Output Mobile Configuration and
create a TCP nertwork stream
Note: you must have first disable the simplified mode.
2.
In the Comment field, enter a name for the stream: WASSP for example. This will help
you identify the stream.
3.
Enter the port number: 18050.
4.
Enter the address for the Wassp server:
• 127.0.0.1 if the Wassp software is running on the same PC as SeaXpert application,
OR
• The IP address (or name of the network) on which the Wassp software is running
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
257
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
(usually this address is: 192.168.65.10)
5.
End of procedure.
When the Wassp software is launched and is transmitting data, SeaXpert stream
control module (magnifying glass icon) checks that binary data has been received
XV.3
Configuring Wassp module
Step
Action
1.
In the Wassp menu, click Settings.
2.
Open the Data tab:
• Select the stream you have previously created (in our example: TCP4 WASSP). The
Wassp mobile is automatically created once you have validated this step.
• Do not select Acquire the position only during recording; if you do so, the Wassp
mobile will only move if the bathymetry recording has been started.
3.
In Gecdis toolbar, select the Wassp menu, and click Settings. Click the Databases tab:
• Check the Real time recording database option. This enables to view the database
while it is being recorded.
• It is also possible to display a base that has already been stored by checking it
258
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
among the list that displays below the Real time recording database option.
4.
End of procedure.
XV.4
Configuring Bathymetry and Sediment modules
XV.4.1
BATHYMETRY MODULE (WHEN AVAILABLE)
In Gecdis toolbar, select the Bathy menu and click Bathy data…
• Check WASSP as the bathy data source.
• In order to have a realistic display of data in 2D and 3D, we suggest you to choose a
limit of interpolation of 10m (i.e., 0.0054 NM).
The button ‘…’ near each bathy provider is used to open the dialog box related to the
module.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
259
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XV.4.2
SEDIMENT MODULE (WHEN AVAILABLE)
In SeaXpert toolbar, select the Sediments menu and click Settings…:
• Select WASSP as provider of sediment data.
• In order to have a realistic display of the data in 2D and 3D, select an extension zone
based on the depth/opening with an angular opening of a few degrees (between 3 and
5°).
• You can also choose 10m (i.e., 0.0054 NM) as the Data point extension.
• To increase the speed of data display (to the depriment of visual representation),
uncheck Use high quality display for multibeam sounders data.
To get more information of the Sediment module, see the document describing the
SEDI module in details.
XV.5
Using WASSP Mobile
Step
1.
Action
In Gecdis menu, select System menu, Settings, I/O and Mobile and click Input/Output
& Mobile Configuration.
A Wassp mobile must be displayed. Information about the mobile must not be modified;
it is either external or software.
The red exclamation mark indicates that data has not been received yet.
260
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
2.
In Mobile menu, click Open Mobiles List…
3.
To make the Wassp mobile the main mobile, make the modification so that the screen is
centred on the Wassp mobile.
4.
End of procedure.
Recording and displaying data in real time:
Step
1.
Action
In Gecdis menu, select WASSP, and click Recording.
• To display Bathy data, click in the Bathy menu: Surface or Isolines.
• To display sediments data, in the Sediments menu, click Show Official Data.
Important !
The display of sediment data in 3D view implies that you have activated the 2D
chart option in the 3D view parameters (right-click in the 3D view)
2.
To stop recording, click again on Recording.
3.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
261
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Example of Bathy display
Example of Sedi display (hardness)
Wassp data acquired in real time (temporary database) can be archived on a permanent
basis via the command Archive Current Record...
The new database created with the recording in progress is listed in the WASSP Settings
dialog box. You can delete or export a stored database by selecting it and by clicking the
button corresponding to the action you want to carry out.
To delete points of a database displayed on the screen:
• Select Display points, zoom in on the zone until you can see the row sweep points or
grid points at the lowest level.
• Choose Select points, and define the rectangular zone of points to be removed.
262
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Click Delete selected points, the points disappear from the screen.
Important
THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT REVERSIBLE.
Before deleting
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
After deleting
263
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVI
SIMRAD ES70
Gecdis Simrad module has been designed to store and display acoustic data provided by
a Simrad single beam echo sounder (Raw data protocol).
SeaXpert module supports all the range of Simrad Ex60 (ES/EK/EQ60et 70). The module
receives the stream provided by Simrad software via BI500 protocol.
Simrad module enables to:
• Record in continuous the last hours of acoustic data provided by a single-beam or split
beam sounder of the range Ex60/70 (water columns echos/seabed echos,
geographical position, specific timestamp).
• Display the data graphically with echograms.
• Geo-localize each ping and create a mark directly from the echogram.
• Focus and adjust the main view according to a point selected in the echogram.
• Provide a simultaneous and multi-frequency display of echograms provided by several
channels.
• Record and store echogram segments having a specific interest
Hardness data by Simrad is not available with our module. Hardness is managed by
our SEDI module.
XVI.1
Configuring the Input Stream
To configure input data stream:
Step
1.
Action
Click System, Settings, and then I/O and Mobiles and Input/Ouput Mobile
Configuration.
2.
Create a NET stream with the same port as the one defined in Simrad (in our example:
2020…).
3.
264
Assign the new stream to your ship. In the Input/Output&Mobile Configuration dialog
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
box, add the depth parameter provided by the sentence « Simrad BI500 ».
4.
In the Stream field, select the stream you have previously created.
5.
End of procedure.
IMPORTANT!
THE SHIP MUST GET VALID AND ACCURATE GPS POSITIONS TO COMBINE A POSITION TO EACH
PING.
XVI.2
Using the Simrad Module
Step
Action
1.
In the Simrad menu, click Recording.
2.
Select Display Echogram and check the echograms to display.
3.
End of procedure.
The recording is launched for all available transducers. This recording process is carried
out in continuous, with a circular mouvement (oldest data being deleted as new data is
recorded).
Storage capacity: 10 hours with 1ping/second
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
265
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Each window of the module is equipped with 2 modes:
• A scrolling mode: to view each new ping as and it is recorded.
• A pause mode: to go back to a previous event. To start it, click Pause and use the
scrolling bar.
For both modes, a left-click enables to select a point that is simultaneously displayed in
the 2D view.
The Pause mode has two complementary functions: a tooltip (left click) and a pop-up
menu (right click).
The pop-up menu enables to:
• For a selected point:

Centre on the point in the main view (2D view).

Create a mark at this location.
• For the histogram portion that is displayed:

Display all the points of this portion in the main view (2D view).

Store the current portion.
Important
ONCE THE RECORDING PROCESS IS STARTED, IT REMAINS ACTIVATED EVENT IF THE PAUSE MODE
IS USED.
W HEN THE PAUSE MODE IS DISABLED, THE WINDOW SWITCHES AUTOMATICALLY TO THE
SCROLLING MODE AND THE MOST RECENT PINGS ARE DISPLAYED.
266
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Using the mouse wheel enables to:
• Modify the threshold in dB when the mouse points to the echogram.
• Zoom the upper part of the echogram when the mouse points to the depth scale. This
function enables to hide the low part of the echogram, the part dedicated to the
seabed.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
267
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVII
BIOMASS MODULE
XVII.1.1
INTRODUCTION
Biomass optional module allows sounder fish detections to be displayed in 2D map and
3D view. It also provides a useful distribution tool to show fish repartition according to their
acoustic intensity.
Supported sounders are: SEAPIX multibeam sounder, WASSP multibeam sounder and
SIMRAD singlebeam sounder with BI500 output (ES60/ES70 and others…)
Fish detections
in 2D, 3D views
and SONAR views
2D fish detections (cartographic view)
3D fish detections (with trawl display)
268
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVII.1.2
BIOMASS DISPLAY
The sounder(s) used need to be set in menu Biomass under Settings command (either
Simrad, Wassp or Seapix):
To visualize the biomass: In Biomass menu (or toolbar), check Show.
If recent fish detections are available they will be displayed in 2D/3D/Sonar view.
In 3D view options right click, the checkboxes Modules layer and Biomass must be
checked.
Use Biomass Distribution command of the Biomass menu to display echo distribution
(high power to low power echos) and adjust detections colors.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
269
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Right click in the Biomass distribution window to access useful commands:
Min/Max filter
to reject out of range values.
Limit to map area
Geographical restriction to see in distribution only the fishes
contained in the 2D geographic area displayed in GECDIS.
Resettable mode
to reset the distribution when clicking on Reset.
In Biomass Settings dialog box, in Depth tab, you can also select the depth range
(min/max) where biomass have to be displayed:
Example
Here, 25 meters where choosen (second image), leading to mask the detections from 0 to
25 m below the ship.
Min depth = 0 m
Max depth = 0 m
Min depth = 0 m
Max depth = 25 m
Important
IN SONAR VIEW YOU ALWAYS HAVE THE LATEST FISH DETECTIONS. THE OLDEST ONE WILL NOT
BE DISPLAYED!
IN OTHER VIEWS (2D/3D) YOU HAVE THE OLDEST FISH POINTS DISPLAYED, BUT YOU CAN MASK
THEM OR CHANGE THEIR APPEARANCE IN THE SETTINGS BOX.
270
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVIII
SEAPIX MODULE
XVIII.1 Introduction
The SeapiX module offers the following functionalities:
• Provides a User interface for iXBlue SeapiX sounder control.
• Provides bathymetry data for bathymetry and 3D modules.
• Provides hardness data for Sediment module.
• Allows Record and Import/Export of seabed databases (bathymetry/hardness).
• Displays water column content measured from various directions.
• Provides fish detections to Biomass module to be displayed in 2D, 3D and a specific
Sonar View.
Display Overview
Bathymetry
and Hardness
in 2D and 3D views
Bathymetry 2D/3D
Hardness 2D/3D
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
271
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Water column visualization
in STV / STT / SAT / SAV
and Echogram views.
STV / STT / SAT / SAS views
Echogram view (with triple echogram display)
Sonar view with fish detections
272
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVIII.2 Configuration
XVIII.2.1 CREATING A STREAM DEDICATED TO SEAPIX COMMUNICATION
Step
1.
Action
Under System menu, I/O and Mobiles, click Input/Output Mobile Configuration and
create a TCP nertwork stream.
Note: you must have first disable the simplified mode.
2.
In the Comment field, enter a name for the stream: SEAPIX for example. This will help
you identify the stream.
3.
Enter the port number: 27000.
4.
Enter the IP address of SeapiX processing unit [Refer to installator instructions].
5.
End of procedure.
When the SeapiX is connected and is transmitting data, SeaXpert stream control module
(magnifying glass icon) checks that binary data has been received.
XVIII.2.2 CONFIGURING SEAPIX MODULE
XVIII.2.2.1
Step 1: Stream Configuration
Step
Action
1.
In the SeapiX menu, click Adanced Settings.
2.
Select the stream you have previously created (in our example: TCP1 SEAPIX). The
SeapiX mobile is automatically created once you have validated this step.
Refer to installator instructions for other settings.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
273
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
3.
XVIII.2.2.2
Action
End of procedure.
Step 2: Installation Configuration
Because installation parameters will be different according ship, use other settings
provided by your installator (offsets, etc…).
XVIII.2.2.3
Step 3: Database Configuration
Step
Action
1.
In the SeapiX menu, click Settings and select the Databases tab.
2.
Check the Real time recording database option. This enables to view the database
while it is being recorded. Refer to installator instructions for other settings.
Note: It is also possible to display a base that has already been stored by checking it
among the list displayed below the Real time recording database option.
3.
XVIII.2.2.4
End of procedure.
Step 4: Check SeapiX Mobile Availability
Step
1.
Action
In the menu System, select Settings, I/O and Mobile and then click Input/Output &
Mobile Configuration.
A SeapiX mobile must be displayed (mobile was automatically created after Step 1).
Information about the mobile must not be modified; it is either external or software.
The red exclamation mark indicates that data has not been received yet
274
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
2.
In Mobile menu, click Open Mobiles List….
3.
To make the SeapiX mobile the main mobile (so that the screen is centred on the
SeapiX mobile), select the SeapiX mobile and click Own Ship.
Note: To avoid multiple mobiles in cartographic view, you can hide the already defined
mobiles and keep only the SeapiX one. For that, just select the mobile(s) to hide and
press Hide button (i.e. “My Ship” hidden below).
4.
End of procedure.
XVIII.2.3 CONFIGURING BATHYMETRY AND SEDIMENT MODULES
XVIII.2.3.1
Bathymetry Module
In Gecdis toolbar, select the Bathy menu and click Bathy data…
• Check SeapiX as the bathy data source.
• In order to have a realistic display of data in 2D and 3D, we suggest you to choose a
limit of interpolation of 10m.
XVIII.2.3.2
Sediment Module (when available)
Step
1.
Action
In Gecdis toolbar, select the Sediments menu and click Settings…:
• Select SeapiX as provider of sediment data.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
275
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
Action
• In order to have a realistic display of the data in 2D and 3D, select an extension
zone based on the depth/opening with an angular opening of a few degrees
(between 3 and 5°).
• You can also choose 10 m as the Data point extension.
2.
To increase the speed of data display (to the detriment of visual representation),
uncheck Use high quality display for multibeam…
3.
End of procedure.
To get more information about the Sediment module, see chapter XII.
XVIII.3 Using SeapiX
XVIII.3.1 OVERVIEW OF SEAPIX FIRE MODES
Four fire modes are available on SeapiX: STV, STT, SAT, SAV.
Modes can be activated simultaneously, leading to successive interlaced fires.
Each fire mode has its own dedicated acoustic view (swath content).
Important
EACH VIEW IS ALSO USED TO CONTROL THE FIRE WHERE FIRE PARAMETERS CAN BE MODIFIED
THROUGH RIGHT CLICK [SEE BELOW].
STV mode
“Sonar / Transversal / Vertical”
Specificity: Vertical fire (like a classical multibeam sounder)
Used for:
276
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Bathymetry/Hardness recording
• Echogram construction
• Fish detection
User Control: Right Click in STV swath view.
STT mode
“Sonar / Transversal / Tiltable”
Specificity: Fire with Front/Back adjustable angle.
Used for:
• Fish detection
• Obstacle detection
User Control: Right Click in STT swath view.
SAT mode
“Sonar / Axial / Tiltable”
Specificity: Fire with Front/Back adjustable angle.
Used for:
• Fish detection
• Obstacle detection
User Control: Right Click in SAT swath view.
SAV mode
“Sonar / Axial / Volumetric”
Specificity: Fire with Left/Right adjustable scanning.
Used for: Dynamic fish detection
User Control: Right Click in SAV swath view
XVIII.3.2 SEAPIX MENU AND DEDICATED TOOLBARS
Module functionalities are available through SeapiX menu and/or SeapiX dedicated
toolbars if SeaXpert package was installed in “SeapiX Mode” (in SeaXpert setup.)
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
277
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Table 3 - SeapiX toolbars
Seapix toolbars are available when SeaXpert package is installed with “SeapiX mode”.
Keep centered on the ship.
Show Sediment 2D layer.
(available in Display menu)
(available in Sediments menu)
Start 3D view.
Show Swaths 2D layer.
(available in View menu)
(available in SeapiX menu)
Show Bathymetry 2D layer.
“Bearing Range Line”
(available in Bathy menu)
Navigation tools.
(available in Navigation menu)
Show Isobaths 2D layer.
Store temporarily and Archive
(available in Bathy menu)
seabed data:
Bathymetry/Hardness.
(available in SeapiX menu)
Show Hardness histogram to
Create a Mark
adjust sediment colors
(available in User Objects menu)
(available in Sediment menu)
Show Biomass 2D layer.
Show Biomass histogram to adjust fish
(available in Biomass menu)
colors.
(available in Biomass menu)
278
Start SeapiX acquisition.
Show SONAR view
(available in SeapiX menu)
(available in View menu)
Show STV view.
Show SAV view.
(available in SeapiX menu)
(available in SeapiX menu)
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Show STT view.
Show ECHO view.
(available in SeapiX menu)
(available in SeapiX menu)
Show SAT view.
Show settings page.
(available in SeapiX menu)
(available in SeapiX menu)
XVIII.3.3 START SOUNDER ACQUISITION
Step
1.
Action
Start sounder acquisition:
• In cartographic view (bottom left) check that sounder status is “Connected”
• In SeapiX menu (or SeapiX toolbar) click Start Sounder.
Sounder is now waiting for fire activation…
2.
Activate STV main fire mode:
• Display STV view end right click on it to access to fire control parameters.
• Set correct parameters for the fire (Right click to access to fire settings):

Working depth, which means the range depth to be applied to all fires (STV,
STT, SAT, SAV)


Power: Power level of the ping. Use Auto.
Modulation: Signal modulation.
• In same menu, choose STV activation to start pinging.
Data are displayed both in STV view and in echogram view (if activated).
Important
STV fire is main fire. It has to be activated in order to be able to build echogram, to
record seabed data or to know depth below surface.
3.
If needed, activate secondary fires modes: STT, SAT, SAV:
• Display STT, SAT ou SAV view and right click on it to access to fire control
parameters.
• Set correct parameters for the fire [refer to previous step] especially, tilt fire to use!
• In view menu, choose fire activation to start pinging.
Data are displayed in “swaths view”.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
279
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
4.
Action
Stop sounder: In SeapiX menu (or toolbar) click Start Sounder (activated previously)
Sounder signal is now de-activated.
5.
End of procedure.
Table 4 - Information displayed in swath view
T = Tilt angle.
L1 = Min signal level
R = Range
L2 = Max signal level
depth.
Z = Zoom factor
P = Power
Modulation type.
How to use swath view:
Left Click on swath = Switch between L1 and L2 levels.
Use mouse-roll on swath to change L1/L2 values.
Use mouse-roll on right to change Zoom level.
Right Click on swath = Control commands for the fire.
(Tilt / Power / Range / Modulation / Colors …)
XVIII.3.4 USE ECHOGRAM VIEW
XVIII.3.4.1
Echogram Construction Angle
Echogram is built from an angular part of STV fire. This is why in settings, you can choose
to use the 40 central degrees of the STV swath, or 80 degrees, or the whole 120 degrees
(See SeapiX Settings: Echogram tab)
280
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Example:
Echogram settings tab:
Here the yellow 80° angle will be used
to build the echogram.
IMPORTANT:
This sector means that if fishes are
out of this angular area (either on
left or right), they will not appear in
echogram.
XVIII.3.4.2
Echogram Display
Double click to select a position.
Popup (in pause mode) used to know echo exact
position:
Contextual menu [right click]:
• To center 2D view on the echo.
• To create a mark at selected position.
• To keep an optimal zoom based on seafloor
depth.
Enter echogram Pause mode
where last hours of record can be visualized
recorded.
Enter 3-Echo mode
where 40 degrees on left/right can be visualized
besides the main central echogram.
Mouse controls:
• Use mouse-roll on signal to change Display
Gain or Filter (click to change between both)
• Use mouse-roll on depth to change Zoom
level Gain
• Use mouse-roll on top of echogram
to
change Depth start level
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
281
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVIII.3.5 RECORD AND DISPLAY SEABED DATA IN REAL TIME
Step
1.
Action
In SeaXpert menu, select SeapiX, and click Start Record:
• To display Bathy data, click in the Bathy menu: Surface or Isolines.
• To display sediments data, in the Sediments menu, click Show Official Data.
Example of Bathy display (on the left) and Sedi display-hardness (on the right)
Important
The display of sediment data in 3D view implies that you have activated the option
in the 3D view parameters (right-click in the 3D view).
2.
To stop recording, click again on Start Record.
3.
Seabed data acquired in real time (temporary database) can be archived on a
permanent basis via the command Archive Current Record...
The new database created with the recording in progress is listed in the Settings dialog
box.
4.
You can delete or export a stored database by selecting it and by clicking the button
corresponding to the action you want to carry out.
282
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Step
5.
Action
To delete points of a database displayed on the screen:
• Select Display points, zoom in on the zone until you can see the row sweep points
or grid points at the lowest level.
• Choose Select points, and define the rectangular zone of points to be removed.
• Click Delete selected points, the points disappear from the screen.
Important
This procedure is not reversible
Before deleting (on the left) after deleting (on the right)
6.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
283
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XVIII.3.6 RECORDING OPTIONS
XVIII.3.6.1
Overlap Management in Real Time Database
To avoid mixing data when recording on a previously acquired area, you can either
choose to clear the front area before storage, either to suspend the storage to avoid
mixing data until overlap ends.
See SeapiX menu / Settings / Recording tab.
XVIII.3.6.2
Height of Tide Correction
Height of tide can used to correct data during acquisition:
• In Input/Ouput & Mobile Configuration dialog box, add Height of tide auxiliary
information on SeapiX mobile.
• Then,
this
information
can
be
either
manually
entered
(estimation),
either dynamically entered by the Tide module:
Example

Either through Proudman tables (option required).

Either by setting a reference station.
Here tide is estimated to 3 meters.
In this exemple, data stored in SeapiX database will have a 3-meter correction.
Important
THIS CORRECTION IS PERFORMED ON DEPTH DATA BEFORE STORAGE AND IS NOT REVERSIBLE.
284
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XIX
STATISTICS MODULE
If you have Turbo Catch system, it is possible, with Gecdis, to view your fish catches (via
descriptive statistics pie charts).
All information on catches is available by selecting the symbol on screen.
The user can proceed to a filtering in order to view the results for one or a few species.
To add TurboCatch databases in Gecdis:
Step
Action
1.
In the Statistics menu, click Logbook Settings.
2.
If you are using your own customized configuration of Windows, uncheck Default and
enter the folder path containing your TurboCatch database.
3.
Click Apply
4.
End of procedure.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
285
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
To assign a color to a catch:
Step
Action
1.
In the Statistics menu, click Color Settings.
2.
Assign a color to each species.
3.
Click Apply
4.
End of procedure.
To display all pie charts in the main view:
In the Statistics menu, check Show all.
286
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XX
CABLE AND PIPELINE MANAGEMENT MODULE
XX.1
Presentation
Hereunder is a brief summary of the functions that are included and those which are not
included from the original reference (MMS-DOS version 4.11).
XX.1.1
PROVIDED FUNCTIONS
XX.1.1.1 SML Management Database
This management is comparable to the functionalities offered by the MMS-DOS version.
Exploitation
• Selective loading of one or more SMLs (system network).
• Focus on one element of an SML.
• Rules for displaying SML.
• Query, cable cut consultation.
Management
• Creating a SML (data, leg, event and environment).
• Modifying a SML.
• Removing a SML.
• Symbol library management.
• Cable reference library management.
Import-export
• Import SML from the old MMS-DOS format.
• Importing a SML from a Microsoft Excel file (CSV file format).
• Export SML to a Microsoft Excel file (CSV file format).
• Export SML to a RTF file.
• Export SML to a DXF file.
SML editing
• Edition of the general description.
• Edition of the list of positions.
• GSLD edition.
• Edit profile.
XX.1.1.2 Bathymetric Data Management
The software import bathymetric data from DXF files (depth points collection).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
287
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XX.1.2
FUNCTIONS NOT INCLUDED (AS COMPARED TO MMS-DOS VERSION)
The functionalities, not mentioned in section XX.1.1, are not provided in Gecdis. These
are, most notably, the following ones:
• Area management (ban, concession and waste).
• Specific transmission problem event management and crooked.
• The complete management (data and editions) about specific repair event, namely:

The analysis of the defect.

Consumption of repair.

Operational report.

Cost of repair.

The repair status (Journal of Repair or RDL: Repair Data Logbook).
• Cable ship day costs management (CERC: Cableship Estimated Running Costs).
• Inventory management
• Paper trace output management
• Installation management (plow information, cable and touch down, installing and slack
control windows)
• DSLD edition
XX.2
Implementation
A pipeline is identical to a submarine link (cable), apart from the fact that "cable point"
symbols, cable references, transmission properties, cable lengths (i.e. slack) and GSLD
are not available for pipeline.
Bathymetry management is already part of the Gecdis software. This existing functionality
is extended with the ability to import bathymetric data from DXF files.
Regarding UTM coordinates management, this functionality is included in a core library of
Gecdis.
XX.2.1
UTM MANAGEMENT
This function provides the ability to express and operate UTM coordinates in the software.
The software allows the following operations:
• Configure the UTM zone (automatic or between 1 and 60).
• Enter a UTM position.
• Convert a position in UTM coordinates.
The display and data input of coordinates are based on the configuration in the general
configuration window. This window is extended to propose the selection of UTM
coordinates.
288
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XX.2.2
SML DATABASE MANAGEMENT
This is the main function of MMS: view, create and modify underwater lines objects and
pipelines, to view or print reports.
XX.2.2.1 General Overview of Access to Functions
The ergonomics of this module are consistents with the general ergonomics of Gecdis.
Access to functions of the MMS module is via submenus and display menus.
Display menu
The main access is made from the Display menu.
Figure 177 - Display menu
In this menu, a submenu SMLs can control the display of the list of SML and defines the
rules for displaying items of a submarine cable.
System menu /
Import
This menu is used to import external data.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
289
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 178 - System menu/Import
In this menu, a submenu MMS Objects can import various elements used in MMS, mainly
MMS-DOS objects.
XX.2.2.2 Library Management
To function properly, the cable and pipeline management module needs two libraries for
type cable SMLs:
• Symbols library to view geographically or diagrams.
• Cable specifications library used for dressing a cable point to manage the display of a
cable cut when querying.
Symbols
The new library of symbols is managed by an XML file. Its edition can change the content
to define the symbols used by the module.
The symbols used are the existing bitmaps from MMS-DOS and import this old library is
possible via a menu: System/Import/MMS Objects/MMS-DOS Library.
A pipeline has no symbol and should be displayed according to its type and state:
Type
State
Gas
In service
Gas
Planned
Green
Gas
Abandoned
Magenta
Oil
In service
Oil
Planned
Green
Oil
Abandoned
Magenta
Water
In service
Water
Planned
Green
Water
Abandoned
Magenta
Cables
references
290
Drawing
G
O
W
Colour
G
O
W
G
O
W
Red
Red
Blue
The new library reference cable is managed by an XML file associated with multiple image
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
files representing the cable cuts. Editing the file can change the content to define the
reference cable used by the module.
Import the old library of MMS-DOS is possible via a menu: System/Import/MMS
Objects/MMS-DOS Library.
Reference management for pipeline is not provided.
XX.2.2.3 Cable Link and Pipeline Selection
This is the counterpart of the user objects list, but dedicated to the SMLs in order to:
• Define SMLs to load into memory for display,
• Manage the creation, deletion, export and properties of a SML.
• Then from SML properties, manage:
Memory
loading

Consultation

Modification

SML list of components

Refocusing on the geographical part of the SML

Graphs and profile edition
Any SML loaded in memory is displayed in the geographic and in the 3D view (if modules
layers and SMLs layer are checked in the 3D view configuration).
List of SMLs
The list is managed with a display window; this window is non-blocking, it may be floating
or docked to an edge. By default it is docked on the lower left edge.
It consists of several parts:
• A title bar including the number of SMLs loaded
• A control bar to manage actions of the current selection
• A header list organized in columns and used for sorting
• Content of the list
Figure 179 - SMLs list
The color of a line depends of its current load:
• In black, SML displayed
• In gray, SML hidden
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
291
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
The selection of lines is standard (multiple lines can be selected at once with Shift or Ctrl
key) or may also be made selectively with the proximity control or all the lines with the “All”
command.
Here are the details of the orders compatibility according to selection:
No selection
One single line selected
Multiple selection
Select proximity
Display
Display
Select all
Hide
Hide
Create
Select proximity
Select proximity
Select all
Select all
Create
Create
Edit
Remove
Remove
Export
Export
Centre on
Select proximity
This command via a drop down list selects lines near the centre of the main geographical
view.
Ranges are taken from MMS-DOS, namely: 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 and 500 NM.
XX.2.2.4 Displaying Items Rules
The software distinguishes two views of SML elements:
• Automatic default mode, the display is achieved by the parameters of scale associated
with each symbol.
• Manual, the user selects the display manually.
The view can be chosen globally, by items type or finely, element by element.
292
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 180 - Display rules definition window
Upper and lower texts as well as mileage points can be displayed or hidden.
Regardless of symbols, the colour used to draw SML depends of its state, i.e.:
• Blue, SML planned (Green in MMS-DOS)
• Dark gray, SML in service,
• Red, SML Abandoned.
XX.2.2.5 Querying
Like nearly all objects in Gecdis and as in MMS-DOS, SMLs are available in overlay.
The consultation is carried out either by a tooltip displayed closest to the cursor or by a
remote window in a fixed area on the screen (docked or floating).
Here is the information set if they exist:
• Name of the SML
• Name of the questioned item
• Symbol
• Comment
• Modification date of the element
• Geographical position
• Geographical cumulative length
• Cumulated cable length (not for pipeline)
• Slack compared to the previous point (not for pipeline)
• Depth of the element
• Item level
• Item note
Here are the possible actions about an item being asked:
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
293
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• View the cable cut (not for pipeline)
• Display the image associated with the item
• Centre on/refocus the screen on:

Geographically cumulative distance

Cable cumulative distance (not for pipeline)

A beginning or an end of segment (linear case event or environment)
• Display / hide all identical elements to those being asked
• Hide SML (unload memory)
• Remove SML (see § XX.2.2.8)
• Shift SML (see § XX.2.2.9)
• Export SML (see § XX.2.2.10)
• Edit SML (window properties)
Figure 181 - SML querying samples
XX.2.2.6 SML Properties Window
This resizable window is displayed when the operator edits a SML. This is a direct access
for viewing and printing the general description, the list of issues, profile and diagram of
SMLs.
Consultation is possible in each dedicated page.
Printing depends of the general configuration of Windows.
294
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 182 - SML properties window, general description
General
description
The general description of the SML is divided into 3 parts grouping properties by
categories: main, general and transmission.
The properties of the general description can be edited directly in the window.
Key properties
These properties are located in the upper area of the window to be shown when viewing
other tabs in the SML (list of issues, profile and diagrams):
• Filename: SML filename, must be defined and unique for system.
• Type: depending of SML type:

For cable: Coaxial or Optical

For pipeline: Gas, Oil or Water
• System Name: system official name
• Segment name: system segment name
General Properties
These properties are located in the left part of the general description page:
• Landing country n°1: the country's initial landing or tip # 1
• Landing country n°2: the country's initial landing or the tip # 2
• Cable ship: name of the cable ship which did the link
• Laying date: The date of the link installation. Also used to determine the SML status.
• Starting date: The date of the connection
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
295
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Withdrawal date: withdrawal date of the bond also used to determine the SML status
• Initial length between stations: initial cable length between stations
• Initial length between extremities: initial cable length between ends or up-link points
ranges
• Repeater count
• Equalizer count
• Specific gear count
• Recovery operation: end indent marker of cables
• Armoured length: armoured initial length cable
• Buried length: buried initial cable length
Transmission properties
These properties only useful for cable type SML are located on the right side of the
general description page:
• Power feeding current: remote power supply current
• Power feeding voltage n°1: remote power supply voltage at the end n°1
• Power feeding voltage n°2: remote power supply voltage at the end n°2
• PFE redundancy level: number of redundancy to ensure the remote supply
• Transmission band system: system maximum frequency
• Capacity: number of simultaneous calls on the link
• Signal specific treatment: compression processing and concentration (DCMS)
• Number of circuits: number of lanes (minimum allocable unit owner ship)
At the end of the topic, an unalterable indicator transmits the system state. This condition
is automatically deducted based on installation and removal dates. Here are the possible
states:
• Planned (no set date)
• In service (installation date entered, date of withdrawal empty)
• Abandoned (date of withdrawal entered)
The condition affects the default display colours near diving line in the geographical view.
296
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
List of
positions
Figure 183 - List of positions window
This page shows the list of the “old” MMS-DOS positions, by presenting SML elements as
a list.
Consulting the list offers the possibilities:
• To focus the geographic view on an item
• To filter the content (because of the focus control; to be consistent with the old version)
• Access to the modification elements course of the underwater line with another control
window
Only one item is selected in the list.
The header of the list shows the main properties of the SML (see key properties above)
with some extra indications:
• The edition number
• The revision number of the edition
• Geodesy for an expressed list with geographic coordinates with an indication of
calculation on a sphere or ellipsoid
• Correction date corresponding to the most recent date among all elements
The list consists of several columns:
• N: is the point number of the line. A point with note/picture is indicate with ‘n’/’p’
character.
• S: section number; equivalent to the calculated one with repeaters
• Comment: the point corresponds to the commentary
• Position: corresponds to the geographic or UTM point
• Depth: corresponds to the depth point
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
297
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
• Burial: a negative value data shows a suspension height, while a positive value data
shows a deep burying. The unit is the same as for the depth.
• PGL: corresponds to the partial geographic lengths for the point
• CGL: corresponds to the cumulative geographic lengths for the point
• Slack: corresponds to the slack between two points calculated from cable and
geographic partial lengths (not for pipeline)
• PCL: corresponding to partial cable length set for the point. (not for pipeline)
• CCL: corresponding to cumulative cable length set for the point. (not for pipeline)
• Cable reference: corresponds to the cable reference. (not for pipeline)
Context menu
Figure 184 - Context menu list
A right click on an item opens a context menu to perform actions:
• Centre on/Refocus on the geographical point (see Center on one element)
• See details about the point
• Edit the item (see Editing an element)
• Edit SML (see Modification of the course and elements)
List filtering
The list of positions is built from all SML elements by default. By pressing the filter list
button, a dialog box lets the user define the components of this list.
Filtering:
• All elements
• All elements with the same type
• An element of one type by selecting its symbol
298
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 185 - List filtering
It is also possible to define both ends of the list by entering either a cumulative cable
length, or a cumulative geographical length. This may also be determined after capturing
a point with the cursor or from a cable point selection in a summary list.
Notes displaying
See notes button controls the notes of all the elements constituting the list. They may be
printed.
Centre on one element
When an item is selected in the list, pressing the button Centre on refocuses the
geographical view on the element.
Double clicking on an element also refocuses.
Editing an
element
Editing an element is available:
• From the list of positions after selecting the item by pressing the Edit button.
• After inserting a new element in the change of the route (see Inserting a point).
• After capturing the point to edit from the SML edit window (see Editing a point).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
299
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 186 - SML element properties
Positioning an element
Figure 187 - SML element position
The positioning of an element is accessed from the window property but also when
inserting a new point (see Inserting a point).
This positioning is managed by a window that defines its geographical position, from:
• A keyboard input or mouse cursor
• A geographic cumulative distance
• A cable cumulative distance (not for pipeline)
As in MMS-DOS, only the cable points are used to define the underwater link. Event
points and environment are projected on the cable route.
This rule has direct consequences when a change occurs on the course cable when
inserting, deleting or moving a cable point. In such cases, the software automatically
recalculates the moving EvenEnvi points whose position is evaluated by the rule of three
from intermediate geographic distances.
Upon validation of the window the software is refocusing on the geographical position
view of the new point and returns to the editing window.
300
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Note and picture
Figure 188 - Note and picture input window
A window is used to enter:
• A note
• A path to a picture
Modification of
the course and
elements
Modification, course, elements edition are managed by a window called from the position
list page of the SML or after a query (see § XX.2.2.5).
The editing window may insert a SML, edit and delete items.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
301
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 189 - SML edit window
Inserting a point
The insertion of a point depends on its type. It is possible to finish a segment by selecting
the relevant segment in a list.
The placement button designates a point where the cable segment needs to be inserted.
The Insert button opens the position described in Positioning an element, and then opens
the element edition described in Editing an element.
When the edition is finished, the software returns to the SML element position window to
insert another point if necessary.
Editing a point
After clicking on the point edition button, the point to edit must be selected. For this, the
user should use the mouse in the geographical view of the relevant SML.
After the point being validated, the sequence is the one described in Editing an element.
Deleting a point
After clicking on the delete point button, point to delete must be selected. For this, the
user should use the mouse in the geographical view of the relevant SML.
The command is validate with delete validation window.
302
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 190 - Delete point validation window
After this validation, another point can be deleting.
To exit and return to the SML Edit window, press [Esc] key or the right button mouse.
Deleting a section/leg
To delete a section, the user should select the extreme points of the section by using the
mouse in the geographical view of the relevant SML.
After two points selected, the command is validate with delete validation window.
Figure 191 - Delete section validation window
After this validation, another section can be deleting.
To exit and return to the SML Edit window, press [Esc] key or the right button mouse.
Profile
At the top of the page, the button bound defines the extreme points of the profile using the
same filtering window described in List filtering (when the filtering is disabled). The bounds
are then shown at the top of the window.
The profile format is identical between screen edition and printer. However, the screen
edition has the advantage of providing information simply by moving the mouse cursor in
the area of the profile. The cursor is then redrawn on the line curve. Geographic
distances, cable and upstream and downstream slack are shown. In this case, the slack is
calculated with remote points three times the depth.
It is also possible to query the slack between any two points by using the left mouse
button.
The profile is built from probe values of SML points and it is possible to use the
interpolated values provided by the bathymetry module by checking the checkbox
“Bathymetric datas used”.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
303
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 192 - SML/PL profile
GSLD
The GSLD is a SML horizontal general diagram where only cable elements are shown
(with the exception of geographical points).
GSLD size varies depending on the number of cable points, knowing that it is always
edited on the entire SML.
A GSLD does not exist for a pipeline.
Heading
These properties are from fields already in MMS-DOS.
The header of the diagram shows the SML main properties (see Key properties) with extra
information:
• The edition number
• The revision number of the edition
• The correction date which corresponds to the most recent date among all the elements
Contents
Its format is independent of the scale. The line cable points are shown linearly in
geographical length sequence and adjusted according to defined sections of repeaters.
304
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 193 - GSLD of a SML
Information is the same as in the MMS-DOS version. It also has a cable lengths table with
references.
Figure 194 - GSLD cable lengths summary
Display notes
The Display notes button controls the notes of all elements of the diagram. They are
printable.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
305
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XX.2.2.7 SML creation
Figure 195 - SML create window
From the SMLs list (see List of SMLs), the create button opens a window to select type of
SML: Cable or Pipeline. After validation, the software displays the properties window, and
you can then enter general settings and edit the SML route/leg.
The principle is the same as for a modification (see Modification of the course and
elements)
Important
AFTER VALIDATION OF SML TYPE, THIS TYPE CANNOT BE CHANGED.
XX.2.2.8 SML removing
From the SMLs list (see List of SMLs),) or a query (see XX.2.2.5), the Delete button
removes the SMLs selected.
A confirmation window is used to prevent unwanted deletion.
Figure 196 - SML removing validation window
XX.2.2.9 SML shifting
From a query (see XX.2.2.5), the Shift button shifts the selected SML.
Offset parameters are entered in a separate window.
Figure 197 - SML/PL shifting window
306
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
XX.2.2.10 SML export
From the SMLs list (see List of SMLs), or a query (see XX.2.2.5) the Export button exports
SMLs in different formats.
The exported files contain informations regarding cable bodies (i.e. repeaters, bus, joints).
SML export in
Microsoft Excel
file
RTF files
Each SML is a file exportable in Microsoft Excel.
To avoid any risk of inconsistency, the text/csv (Character Separated Value) is used.
Each exported SML corresponds to a RTF file.
The RTF file is composed of the same data than the previously mentioned CSV file,
meaning that the data is arranged in character separated columns inside the document.
DXF file
Each exported SML corresponds to a DXF file representing the geometry of the SML.
XX.2.2.11 SML import
The SML import is accessible via a menu: System/Import/MMS Objects (see System
menu/Import).
Two SMLs import choices are possible: the old MMS-DOS format and the Microsoft Excel
format.
The information regarding cable bodies (i.e., repeaters, bus, joints) are imported for both
file formats.
Old MMS-DOS
format
Figure 198 - SML MMS-DOS import window
After selecting the root folder of MMS-DOS, all SMLs or just selected SML in the list can
be imported.
The imported SMLs are directly loading and displaying on the screen.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
307
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
SML import
with Microsoft
Excel file
This is used to select a text/csv (Character Separated Value) file corresponding to a SML
to import. The format of this file (most notably number and designation of columns) is the
same as for the export of SML in CSV file
XX.2.3
BATHYMETRIC DATA MANAGEMENT
This is the use of a DXF (AutoCAD) file as a data provider for the bathymetric module.
The importation consists in reading depth points (in forms of X, Y, Z coordinates)
collections from a DXF file and making them available as a standard Gecdis bathymetric
source. The sounding coordinates are identified from DXF TEXT objects in which Z
coordinate is interpreted as a depth in meter (negative value).
XX.3
308
Definitions
Terms
Definition
CMS
Cable Management System
DSLD
Detail Submarine on Line Diagram
DXF
Drawing exchange Format
EvenEnvi
General type involving event and environment
GSLD
General Submarine on Line Diagram
MMS-DOS
MMS DOS Technology
SML
Submarine Link (cable or pipeline)
MMS
Marine cable Management System
PL
Pipeline
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
iXBlue CONTACT - SUPPORT
24/7 CUSTOMER SUPPORT HELPLINE
FOR NON-EMERGENCY SUPPORT:
[email protected]
FOR GENUINE EMERGENCIES ONLY:
North America / NORAM
+1 888 600 7573 Extension 2
Europe Middle-East Africa Latin-America / EMEA-LATAM
+33 1 30 08 98 98
Asia Pacific / APAC
+65 6747 7027
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
309
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
iXBlue CONTACT - SALES
North America / NORAM
+1 888 600 7573
iXBlue Inc Boston area US
11 Erie Drive, Natick, MA 01760, US
Office: Houston, US
Europe Middle-East Africa Latin-America / EMEA-LATAM
+33 1 30 08 88 88
iXBlue SAS Marly France
52 avenue de l’Europe Marly le Roi, 78160, France
Offices: Dubai, Germany, Netherlands, Norway, UK, Italy
Asia Pacific / APAC
+65 6747 4912
iXBlue Pte Limited Singapore
15A Changi Business Park Central 1#04-02 Eightrium Singapore 486035
Offices: Australia, China, India
310
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Appendices
A
GLOSSARY
Term
Definition
Accuracy of Data
An area within which the best estimate of the overall accuracy of the data is
uniform. The overall accuracy takes into account for example the source
accuracy, chart scale, digitising accuracy, etc.
An area with a uniform estimated degree of general data accuracy. General
accuracy takes into account source accuracy, chart scale and digitization
accuracy for example.
Acquisition Timeout
Delay since last acquisition after which the piece of information is considered
as invalid.
Alarm
Mechanism that announces with a sound and visually a condition that requires
attention.
Altitude
The vertical distance above or below a datum..
Apparent Wind
Wind value that results from two movements: the speed of the ship and the
true wind. The apparent wind is the wind that a person feels on a moving ship,
i.e. the wind that is acquired by and anemometer and a weather vane.
Area
Polygon that is inserted by the user and can be associated with a radar alarm.
Barometric Pressure
The measure of atmospheric pressure that is given by way of a barometer and
is expressed in kilopascal.
Basic display
The information level at which no data can be eliminated from the display. This
information is required in all geographical areas and in all circumstances. It is
not enough however to guarantee completely safe navigation.
Bearing Line
Azimuth in which a seamark is located.
Bearing Range Lines
Navigational-aid that allows to display the relative heading and the distance
between two objects on the screen.
Bridge Height
The difference between bridge height and draught.
Calculation rate
The rhythm sentences are transmitted.
Cell
A geographical area containing cartographic data. Each cell has a separate
unique name. Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area into the
cells, which they publish.
CCRP
Consistent Common Reference Point, see Conning position.
Channelling
Assignation of a display context to the leg of a route..
Chart area
Part of the screen that displays navigation chart data. Gecdis screen is made
up of a number of sections that may or may not be displayed.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
311
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
Chart type
A cell may be compiled to six different scales according to navigation purpose.
The different chart types are as follows:
and Settings\All Users  1:2,500
Harbour  1:75,000
Approach  1:260,000
Coastal  1:700,000
General  1:3,000,000
Overview  1:15,000,000
Charted Depth
Altitude, above or below a level of reference, of a point in Earth that is
constantly or periodically submerged.
Checksum
Numeric value that allows to check the validity of a received or transmitted
sentence.
Clearing Line
Half line made from seamarks that allow to avoid dangers.
COG
Course make good of the ship.
Compilation Scale
The scale to which the data were initially compiled. For example, this may
define the scale of the paper chart used for the digitization of the data. This
scale is determined by the hydrographic agency and coded in the navigation
chart.
Conning position
The reference position of the ship. If the positioning system is not located on
the bridge, the value of this position is the result of the correction that is
specified by the user.
Control
State of dependence of an object related to another object.
Coordinates
Geographical co-ordinates of a spot that is numerically represented on two
axes.
Corrupted Data
Data altered or modified since production, issuance or retrieval.
Coverage
A geographical area that describes the coverage and extent of special objects.
COW
Leeway track of the ship that is the result of true heading and leeway angle.
CPA
Maximum closing point, i.e. point of closest distance between two mobiles.
Database
Entity in which user objects are stored in a structured way.
Datum
A set of parameters defining a coordinate system, and a set of control points
whose geometric relationships are known, either through measurement or
calculation.
312
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
Deep Contour
Isobath that marks the boundaries of a water plane in which depth is deeper.
A part of the seabed in which depth is deep compared with the surrounding
points. With Gecdis, deep contour is represented in grey and waters whose
depth is superior to it are in white. Equals to deep waters.
An isobath connecting points of equal water depth, which is sometimes
significantly displaced outside of soundings, symbols and other chart detail for
clarity as well as generalization. Depth contours, therefore, often represent an
approximate location of the line of equal depth as related to the surveyed line
delineated on the source.
Deep Soundings
Soundings whose values are superior to the safety depth.
Deeper water contour
The area of the sea bottom that is deeper than the surrounding parts. The
deeper water contour area is shown in grey and deeper water in white. The
latter are particularly deep waters.
Depth
Vertical distance between the surface of the sea and the seabed, counted with
positive figures to the bottom. Depth is the sum between charted depth and
height of tide.
Depth contour
A line linking points that are at the same depth in the water column.
Depth soundings
Soundings deeper than the safety depth.
Display Base
The level of SENC information that cannot be removed from the display,
consisting of information that is required at all times in all geographic areas
and all circumstances. It is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.
Display Context
Specific properties of software’s configuration.
Display Scale
The ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the ground,
normalized and expressed as, for example, 1:10 000.
Distance to waypoint
The distance between the Own Ship and the next waypoint.
Distance to wheel-over
The distance between the Own Ship and the next wheel-over.
DPT
Sentence that allows to acquire depth – i.e. the depth that relates to the
transducer and the offset of the transducer. A positive offset indicates the
distance between the transducer and the waterline. A negative offset indicates
the distance between the transducer and the keel.
DR
Dead Reckonning abbreviation.
Draught
Vertical distance measured between the waterline and the lower part of the
keel, in the section of the ship that is considered about.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
313
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
ECDIS (Electronic Chart
Electronic Chart Display and Information System. When provided with
Display and Information
adequate backup devices, this system is considered as the equivalent of an
System)
updated maritime chart in accordance with the V/20 regulation of the 1974’s
SOLAS Convention. It allows to display the selected information from a
navigation electronic chart (SENC) and the positional information provided
from navigation sensors, to help navigators to plan routes and monitor them. If
desired, the system also allows to display additional information that is related
to the navigation.
The navigation information system which with adequate backup arrangements
can be accepted as complying with the up-to-date chart required by regulation
V/20 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention, by displaying selected information from
a system electronic navigational chart (SENC) with positional information from
navigation sensors to assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring
and by displaying additional navigation-related information.
Economic Speed
Default speed assigned to a leg if no other speed has been assigned to it.
ECS
Generic term to designate a device that displays chart data but is not intended
to meet OMI’s ECDIS operating standards requirements and check the need
to import maritime charts.
ENC
A database standardized as to content, structure and format, issued for use
with ECDIS on the authority of government authorized Hydrographic Offices.
The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and
may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the
paper chart (e.g. sailing directions), which may be considered necessary for
safe navigation.
ETA
Estimated time that is necessary to reach a destination.
State of a target
Situation of an ARPA target (Lost, To be Tracked or Tracked).
Event
Isolated object that is inserted by the user to show an event in the location of
the Own Ship.
EW Size
Indication that gives the distance between the more eastern and western
points of an area.
Extreme Draught
Draught that cannot be exceeded by the Own Ship.
FILE
Stream that uses a file to receive information.
Final ETA
Estimated time of arrival to the last wheel over of the route.
Folder
Element of a data classification system that allows to arrange files,
documents, softwares in a coherent way.
GGA
NMEA sentence that defines data of a positioning system.
GLL
NMEA sentence that defines the geographical position.
Great Circle
Route of a ship that consists in following, in the Earth, an arc of a Great Circle
– i.e. the shorter distance line to go from one point to another.
314
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
HASP Key
Key that is connected on the parallel or USB port of the computer and allows
to use the software. Also, it makes it possible to use a specific configuration on
another computer without any enabling. In such a case, it acts as a mobile
licence/configuration.
HDT (HeaDing True)
Sentence that defines heading information.
Heading to Steer
Heading that should be followed by the ship to reach the next wheel-over or
waypoint. This value refers to the geographical north and moves in the same
way as the Own Ship’s heading.
Head-up
Chart orientation that depends on the Own Ship’s heading, and is always
turned to the top of the screen.
Heaving
Vertical movement of the ship on water surface.
Height of Tide
The vertical distance at any moment between the water level and chart datum.
Horizontal Datum
An area of uniform horizontal datum.
IHO (International
Organization created in 1948 by the United Nations. This is the first
Hydrographic Office)
international organism only devoted to maritime issues. OMI mainly tries to
improve maritime security and prevent from maritime pollution provoked by
ships.
Isobath
A line on a map joining points on the bed of the sea or other body or water,
situated at an equal vertical distance beneath the surface.
Latitude
Scale of distance from Ecuador to north or south graduated from 0 to 90
degrees
Leeway angle
Difference between heading and the leeway track.
Leg
Section of a route that links two points. A route can be made of several
sections.
Licence
Proof of the lawful use of the software.
Log
Device allowing to measure ship’s speed from run distance during a certain
time.
Long Time Tags
Time interval between each time mark that is associated to the ship’s track.
Longitude
Angular distance measured in degrees from a point of the Earth to the original
meridian.
Main view
A part of Gecdis screen that displays ENC data. Gecdis screen is composed
with several parts that you can display or not.
Mark
Object that is inserted by the user and allows to indicate the location of a point
in the chart.
Maximum XTE
Maximum allowed difference to a route. This difference is materialized by a
line on each side of the route. When the Own Ship exceeds the maximum XTE
(and the route is enabled), an alarm is generated.
MMSI
The Marine Mobile Service identification.
Navigation status
Situation of the ship that is defined with outdoor conditions.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
315
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
NET
UDP network stream (see UDP).
NMEA
National Maritime Electronics Association ; Official association that has
defined a standard organizing interfaces on electrical signals and data
transmission protocols, with the serial port of RS232 type devices.
North-up
Type of orientation that allows to orient the chart view to the geographical
north.
NS Size
Indication that indicates the distance between the more northern and southern
points, of an area.
OSD (Own Ship Data)
The sentence that gives Own Ship data (heading, route, speed, current, drift).
Overscale
The display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the
compilation scale. Over scaling may arise from deliberate over scaling by the
mariner, or from automatic over scaling by ECDIS in compiling a display when
the data included is at various scales.
Information displayed at a display scale greater than the compilation scale.
This may be done deliberately by the user or it may occur automatically during
display compilation, if the data relate to different scales.
Own Ship – Cursor Bearing
Bearing relative to the geographical north between the Own Ship and the
cursor.
Pitching
Rocking movement of a mobile, in length direction.
Pivoting Position
Location of the ship from which it pivots.
Position – bow
The frontal position of the ship that can be defined in the Sizes tab of Own
Ship characteristics.
Position.stern
The back position of the ship.
Presentation Library
The library of symbols defined in the display specifications in S-52, appendix 2
Colour and Symbol Specifications for ECDIS. It contains the following pages:
Information about the chart display
Shore features, ports
Depth, currents
Seabed, obstructions, pipelines
Routes
Special areas
Buoys, beacons, lights, radar
Paper charts buoys and beacons
Mariner’s symbols
The presentation library is available in hard-copy or in digital form. The
symbols shall be replicated in size and shape, using any convenient format.
The colour tables shall be reproduces within the tolerances given in S-52,
appendix 2/5.2.3. The remaining items may be implemented in any convenient
form, which produces the same results as the presentation library.
316
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
Quality of Data
An area within which a uniform assessment of the quality of the data exists.
Rate of Rotation
The velocity to rotate for a mobile.
Recommended Speed
The speed that is recommended to reach the next wheel-over, according to
the ETA. Information is computed according to ship’s position and ETA.
Reference position
The last real position value that is updated when the position changes, except
if changed by a position control.
Reference Speed
The speed that is taken as a reference to define the way a mobile appears in
the main view. If it is inferior to the mobile speed, the mobile will be in « early »
mode and will be located below the main view. Otherwise, it will be centred
and controlled on the main view..
Registration
Identification marks, that any ship should bear externally and visibly.
RENC
The regional ENC Coordinating Centre as defined by IHO (ENC distributor).
Most ENC information will not be supplied directly from a Hydrographic Office
to an ECDIS. Regional ENC Coordinating Centres (RENCs) will operate as
central distribution nodes compliant with the IHO WEND model, receiving data
from HOs and supplying distributors, agents and ECDIS users.
A RENC must be able to authenticate ENC data sets provided by HOs using
the digital signature files, decrypt the cell permit supplied with the data and
then decrypt the data set (so that data validation can be performed), sign the
data and then append its own signature. It must also be able to create/decrypt
user permits and produce cell permits.
Rhumb-line
A line which crosses successive Meridians at a constant angle. This route is
represented by a straight line in the chart, with the Mercator projection.
RM
Relative Motion abbreviation.
RMC
The sentence that defines the recommended GNSS minimum data (time,
latitude, longitude, ground speed, heading to steer and date). This sentence is
transmitted at most every two seconds.
Rolling
The rotation of a ship about its fore-and-aft axis.
ROT
The sentence that defines the rate of turn.
Route (1)
The itinerary followed by a ship, and relates two remote points, possibly
separated with intermediary waypoints.
Route (2)
The heading of the leg of a route.
Route Monitoring
The process that allows to follow a route.
Safety Contour
The contour related to the own ship selected by the mariner to be used by
ECDIS to distinguish the display between the safe and the unsafe water and
for generating anti grounding alarms.
The depth contour associated with the vessel, enabling a distinction to be
made between the two-colour display mode and the four-colour mode and also
allowing anti-grounding warnings to be generated.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
317
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
Safety Depth
The isobath above which the ship cannot navigate safely.
SCAMIN (scale minimum)
The minimum scale after which an object (mobile, fleet, etc.) is not displayed.
Sector
The object that is inserted by the user to which it is not possible to assign an
alarm.
SENC (System Electronic
A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for
Navigational Chart)
appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data
added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by ECDIS
for the display generation and other navigational functions, and is the
equivalent to an up-to-date paper chart. The SENC may also contain
information from other sources.
Shallow Contour
The isobath that gives the limits of the areas that are not as deep as the other
ones.
A part of the seabed in which depth is shallow compared with the surrounding
points. As this contour is shallow, it is considered as dangerous for navigation.
Equal to Shallow waters.
SOG (Speed Over Ground)
The speed of the ship over the ground.
Standard display
The information that must be indicated when a chart is displayed for the first
time. The level of information provided by this display for route planning and
verification can be modified by the navigator to match his or her needs.
SOW
The speed over water. This speed is relative to the surface of the sea.
Submersion
The depth at which a submarine is located.
Swaying course
The COG projected by the perpendicular line of the mobile and computed from
the gyro.
Swaying Speed
The SOG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile. In other words,
this is the speed the ship moves on a virtual line that would be perpendicular
to the ship. This piece of information is useful when docking.
TCP Stream
The protocol that allows to connect a transmitter to a receiver.
TCPA (Time to closest point
The time to the closest approaching point between two objects. This time
of approach)
defines the moment when two objects will be the closest the one from the
other.
Tidal Amplitude
The vertical distance, indicated with positive values, between the sea surface
and charted depth.
Tidal Curve
A graph that represents variations of sea level depending on time at a specific
location. In normal conditions, the curve should look like a sinusoid.
Tidal Stream
In a tidal wave, the horizontal motion (the speed of the particles of water).
Tide Gauge
The device that allows to notice at any time the tidal amplitude.
Time Lag
The difference between the current time onboard and the UTC time.
TLL (Target latitude and
The sentence that acquires latitude and longitude of a target (target number,
longitude)
name, position and the time marker that is used in target tracking systems).
318
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Term
Definition
TM
True Motion abbreviation.
True Heading
The heading relative to geographical north, which is the angle resulting from
the crossing of the geographical north axis and the ship’s headline.
True Wind
The wind vector in relation to the earth's surface. For a moving object it is the
vector sum of the apparent wind and the velocity of the object.
TTG (Time To Go)
The time value, used to reach either a waypoint or a wheel over.
TTG to wapiti
The time estimated to reach the next waypoint.
TTG au wheel-over
The time estimated to reach the next wheel-over.
TTM (Tracked target
The sentence that allows to acquire data associated to a tracked target,
message)
relative to the Own Ship.
Turn radius starboard
The radius of the circle of a ship when turning starboard (e.g. to reach the new
leg of a route).
Update
Update enabling management of the display of cartographic objects. This
option lets the user:
create new point objects,
create new chart areas,
annotate cartographic objects,
delete cartographic objects,
relocate point objects,
cancel updates by erasing them.
User Object Filter
The operation that consists in selecting user objects, with specific criteria.
UPS
Universal Polar Stereographic: defines a conformal azimuthal projection and
grid coordinates system used for both the northern and southern polar regions.
VBW
The sentence that indicates the speed on ground and on water.
Vertical Datum
Geodesics applied at water level. 30 different types of vertical datum.
VDR
The sentence that indicates stream’s speed and heading.
VHW
The sentence that indicates the over water speed and true heading.
VTG
The sentence that indicates the on ground speed and heading.
Waypoint
Waypoints are used to define the points through which a route goes.
Waypoint ETA
Estimated time of arrival to a waypoint.
Wheel-over
Geographical position of the wheel-over to reach the new leg. A wheel-over is
computed in relation to the turning radius.
Wheel-over ETA
Estimated time of arrival to a wheel-over.
XTE (Cross Track Error)
Alarm that is enabled when the mobile is outside the lane. A sound signal is
associated to this alarm to inform the user of the danger.
ZDA
The sentence that allows to acquire date and time (UTC, day, month, year and
local time lag).
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
319
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
B
ECDIS INFORMATION MANDATORY
This appendix lists the various particulars required by the standards to find them easily.
B.1
Links Table
References
Subjects
Links
CCRP
CCRP configuration, page 114
LOP
Piloting fix, page 179
Information on the application
Version, page ii
Applied standards, page 320
Installation, page 2
Readability
Requested screen, page 2
Screen size, page 30
61174 - 5.8.5, 6.7.3.2b
Visibility at night
Visibility at night, page 55
61174 - 6.9.4b
Twelve-hour log
Configuring the display of the
events, page 65
Terms, abbreviations, symbols
Glossary, page 311,
Presentation library, page 321
Mobile representation, page 87
Vector representation, page 72
Route representation, page 200
61174 - 4.6.1, 6.8.12g, G.17.5.6g
61174 - 4.10.6, 6.9.7k
61174 - 4.16, 6.10, F.7.1
61174 - 5.3.2,
62288 - 4.3.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.5.1
62288 - 4.10, 4.5.1a
B.2
Applied Standards
Publications
Edition
Date
IEC 61174
3.0
2008-09
IEC 62288
1.0
2008-07
IHO S-52
6.0
2010-03
IHO S-57
3.1.1
IHO S-63
1.1.1
2012-04
3.4
2008-01
IHO- Presentation Library
320
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
C
THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY, CHART 1
C.1
Information about the Chart Display (A, B)
Figure 199 - Chart 1, screen 1
Figure 200 - Chart 1, screen 2
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
321
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
C.2
Natural and Man-Made Features (C, D, E)
Figure 201 - Chart 1, screen 3
C.3
Port Features (F)
Figure 202 - Chart 1, screen 4
322
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
C.4
Depths, Currents, etc.(H, I)
Figure 203 - Chart 1, screen 5
C.5
Seabed, Obstructions, Pipelines, etc. (J, K, L)
Figure 204 - Chart 1, screen 6
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
323
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
C.6
Traffic Routes (M)
Figure 205 - Chart 1, screen 7
C.7
Special Areas (N)
Figure 206 - Chart 1, screen 8
324
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
C.8
Aids and Services (P, R, S, T, U)
Figure 207 - Chart 1, screen 9
C.9
Buoys and Beacons (Q)
Figure 208 - Chart 1, screen 10
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
325
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
C.10
Topmarks (Q)
Figure 209 - Chart 1, screen 11
C.11
Color Test Diagram
Figure 210 - Chart 1, screen 12
326
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
D
EQUIPMENT THAT CAN BE INTERFACED WITH GECDIS
In general, all equipment conforming to the NMEA standard is compatible with Gecdis.
This appendix indicates all NMEA sentences managed by the software, the specific AIS
compatibility, as well as various cases of NMEA extension and specific messages from
different devices.
D.1
List of NMEA Sentences Used
NMEA
Description
ABK
AIS addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement
ABM
AIS addressed binary and safety related message
APA
Heading/track controller (autopilot) sentence A
IXMRoutes
x
APB
Heading/track controller (autopilot) sentence B
IXMRoutes
x
BBM
AIS broadcast binary message
BWC
Bearing and distance to waypoint – Great circle
IXMRoutes
x
BWR
Bearing and distance to waypoint – Rhumb line
IXMRoutes
x
DBT
Depth below transducer
x
DBK
Depth below keel
x
DBS
Depth below surface
x
DPT
Depth
x
DTM
Datum reference
x
HDG
Heading, deviation and variation
x
HDM
Heading, magnetic
x
HDT
Heading, true
x
HSC
Heading steering command
IXMRoutes
x
HTC
Heading/track control command
IXMRoutes
x
GGA
Global positioning system (GPS) fix data
x
x
GLL
Geographic position – Latitude/longitude
x
x
GNS
GNSS fix data
x
GSA
GNSS DOP and active satellites
x
GST
GNSS pseudorange noise statistics
x
MDA
Meteorological composite
x
MHU
Humidity
x
MMB
Barometer
x
MTA
Air temperature
x
MTW
Water temperature
x
MWD
Wind direction and speed
x
MWV
Wind speed and angle
x
PWP
Past waypoint information (iXBlue private sentence)
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Module*
Input
Output
x
x
x
IXMRoutes
x
x
x
327
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
NMEA
Description
Module*
Input
Output
x
x
OSD
Own ship data
RMB
Recommended minimum navigation information
RMC
Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
x
x
ROT
Rate of turn
x
x
RPM
Revolutions
x
RSA
Rudder sensor angle
x
RSD
Radar system data
x
RTE
Routes
SSD
AIS ship static data
THS
True heading and status
x
TLL
Target latitude and longitude
x
x
TTM
Tracked target message
x
x
VBW
Dual ground/water speed
x
x
VDM
AIS VHF data-link message (see D.2)
x
VDO
AIS VHF data-link own-vessel report (see D.2)
x
VDR
Set and drift
x
x
VHW
Water speed and heading
x
x
VLW
Dual ground/water distance
x
VSD
AIS voyage static data
VTG
Course over ground and ground speed
x
VWR
Relative (apparent) wind speed and angle
x
VWT
True wind speed and angle
x
WCV
Waypoint closure velocity
IXMRoutes
WPL
Waypoint location
IXMRoutes
XTE
Cross-track error, measured
IXMRoutes
ZDA
Time and date
x
ZLZ
Time of day
x
ZZU
Time, UTC
x
IXMRoutes
IXMRoutes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
* Other than IXMIoMobile.
D.2
List of binary AIS Messages Used
Here is the list of binary AIS messages encapsulated in the sentence NMEA VDM/VDO
used in Gecdis.
ITU-R M1371
message number
1, 2, 3
328
Description
Position reports
4
Base station report
5
Ship static and voyage related data
6
Addressed binary message
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
ITU-R M1371
message number
D.3
Description
8
Binary broadcast message
9
Standard SAR aircraft position report
11
UTC and date response
12
Addressed safety related message
14
Safety related broadcast message
18
Standard Class B equipment position report
19
Extended Class B equipment position report
21
Aids-to-navigation (AtoN) report
24
Static data report
Fleet: Mobile, Buoy, Target
This chapter presents the different equipments for managing mobile fleets.
D.3.1
Summary Table
Format / Manufacturer
Sentence type
Module
Mobile type
Buoy
Target
Mobile
Timeout*
ARGOS
BAP
IXMIoFormatEx
x
-
ARGOS
DR
IXMIoFormatEx
x
15 min
AUSSAGUEL
Position report
IXMIoFormatEx
x
-
DSNP
Syletrack N2
IXMIoFormatEx
x
5 min
FURUNO
FAR2800 serie
IXMIoFormatEx
LHG
Position report
IXMIoFormatEx
NMEA
$--TLL
IXMIoMobile
x
30 s
NMEA
$--TTM
IXMIoMobile
x
30 s
NMEA
!--VDM
IXMIoMobile
NMEA++
$PKHUN
IXMIoMobile
NMEA++ / IESM
$--BSC
IXMIoMobile
NMEA++ / iXSea
$PTSAG
IXMIoMobile
NMEA++ / Kelvin Hughes
$PRTGT
IXMIoMobile
NMEA++ / Ryokuseisha
$PRBY
IXMIoMobile
x
-
SATLINK
BAP
IXMIoFormatEx
x
-
IXMIoMobile
x
XML
Mobile
x
5 min
x
x
x
-
15 min
5 min
x
x
x
x
5 min
5 min
x
15 min
* The timeout value is the default delay from which in case of non-receipt of a new
sentence for a mobile previously acquired, it is automatically deleted.
Important
NMEA++ PTSAG: PLEASE NOTE THAT THIS OWNER SENTENCE CAN EITHER BE USED FOR
DECODING IXSEA GAPS MOBILE OR EITHER OF THE GEONET TRAWL NET (SEE D.4.4 AND
D.4.5)
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
329
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
D.3.2
NMEA Information Table
Unlike XML-Mobile format that is open, the data acquired through the NMEA frames are
etched in stone.
Here is a summary of the various informations and settings managed on a mobile based
NMEA formats and derivatives.
Informations
TLL
TTM
VDM
PKHUN
x
x
x
x
Name
Sizes (length,
beam, conning
offsets)
PTSAG
PRTGT
PRBY
num
num
num
target
buoy
x
Symbol & color
ID type
BSC
x
num
num
MMSI
num
num
target
target
x
target
buoy
State
x
x
x
Geo. position
x
c
x
x or c
x
x
c
x
Mobile type
Geo. accuracy
x
Sensor type
x
SOG, COG
c
c
x
x
c
c
x
c
Bearing,
distance
c
x
c
x
c
c
x
c
CPA, TCPA
c
x
c
x
c
c
x
c
Water temp.
x
x
Battery voltage
x
x
Submersion
x
Altitude
x
• x, acquired value
• c, computed value
• num, numeric value
D.3.3
AIS-VDM Complementary Information Table
Here is a summary of the different information from only the sentence AIS-VDM.
Navigation
Property
Track keeping
True heading
IMO number
Final destination
Rate of turn
Call sign
Final ETA
Draught
RAIM
Navigation status
AIS version
AIS mobile class
D.3.4
IXMIoFormatEx Module Information Table
Here is a summary of information from different formats supported by IXMIoFormatEx
module.
330
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Informations
ID type
Mobile type
ARGOS
BAP
ARGOS
DR
AUSSAGUEL
Pos. report
DSNP
Syletrack
FURUNO
FAR2000
LHG
Pos. rep.
SATLINK
BAP
num
num
num
num
num
call sign
num
mobile
mobile
target
mobile
buoy
mobile
State
x
Geo. position
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
SOG, COG
c
x
x
x
x
c
c
Bearing,
distance
c
c
c
x
c
c
CPA, TCPA
c
c
c
x
c
c
Water temp.
x
Battery voltage
x
True heading
x
SOW
x
• x, acquired value
• c, computed value
• num, numeric value
D.4
System, Own Ship and Trawl Net
This chapter presents the different equipments for managing system, own ship and trawl
net informations.
The tables summarize the different possible sources of information. The ranking of
sentences indicates the priority if multiple automatic reception.
For software column, here are the abbreviations:
• c, calculated value
• e, estimated value
• m, maintained value at a regular rate
• s, software value
The software-only informations are not presented here.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
331
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
D.4.1
System Information
This information is related to the overall system.
Informations
Soft.
Stream datum
NMEA
IXMIoFormatEx
iXSea: $PIXSE,TIME__
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSPOS_
MARELEC: # MA DD
DTM
UTC
s
m
ZDA
ZLZ
ZZU
GGA
GNS
RMC
GLL
VDM
VDO
Time lag
e
s
ZDA
Radar cursor
D.4.2
NMEA++
RSD
Own Ship System Information
This information which the sensors are usually only can be inherited across all own ships.
Informations
Soft.
NMEA
Rudder (centre, starboard
and port)
e
RSA
Propeller pitch (centre,
starboard and port)
e
RPM
Propeller speed (centre,
starboard and port)
e
RPM
Wind speed (true)
Wind bearing (true)
e
s
MWD
MWV
VWT
MDA
Wind speed (apparent)
Wind bearing (apparent)
e
s
MWV
VWR
Water temperature
e
MTW
MDA
CHAUVIN ARNOUX:
Thermometer
Air temperature
e
MTA
MDA
CHAUVIN ARNOUX:
Thermometer
Barometric pressure
e
MDA
MMB
Absolute humidity
e
MDA
MHU
Registration
e
Picture
e
Draught
e
VDO
MMSI
e
VDO
332
NMEA++
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
IXMIoFormatEx
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Informations
Soft.
NMEA
Call sign
e
VDO
IMO number
e
VDO
Mobile type
e
VDO
Navigation status
e
VDO
AIS version
IXMIoFormatEx
IXMIoFormatEx
VDO
Off-Position
e
VDO
Position sensor
e
VDO
Final ETA
VDO
Final destination
VDO
D.4.3
NMEA++
Own Ship Information
Informations
Soft.
NMEA
NMEA++
Position
e
m
GGA
GNS
RMC
GLL
VDO
iXSea: $PIXSE,POSITI
iXSea: $PIXSE,GPSIN_
iXSea: $PIXSE,GP2IN_
iXSea: $PIXSE,USBIN_
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSPOS_
THALES: $PRPS,POSL,001
THALES: $PRPS,POSL,002
THALES: $PRPS,POSL,003
THALES: $PRPS,POSL,004
SOG
COG
s
RMC
VTG
VBW
OSD
VDO
iXSea: $PIXSE,SPEED_
SOW
e
VBW
OSD
VHW
True heading
e
s
THS
HDT
HDG
OSD
VHW
HDM
VDO
Leeway angle
e
VBW
OSD
Drift speed & course
e
s
VDR
OSD
Depth
e
s
DPT
DBS
DBK
DBT
JRC: $PJRCD
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSATIT
GEM: Microtecnica gryo
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSPOS_
SEASCAN: $PSAP
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
333
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Informations
Soft.
NMEA
NMEA++
Height of tide
e
s
Submersion
e
GGA
GNS
iXSea: $PIXSE,POSITI
iXSea: $PIXSE,GPSIN_
iXSea: $PIXSE,GP2IN_
iXSea: $PIXSE,USBIN_
Altitude
e
GGA
GNS
VDO
iXSea: $PIXSE,POSITI
iXSea: $PIXSE,GPSIN_
iXSea: $PIXSE,GP2IN_
iXSea: $PIXSE,USBIN_
Swaying speed & course
e
s
ROT
m
Rolling
Pitching
e
ROT
VDO
PHOTONETICS: $PHTRO
JRC: $PJRCD
iXSea: $PIXSE,ATITUD
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSATIT
Heaving
iXSea: $PHLIN
iXSea: $PIXSE,HEAVE_
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSATIT
Log (distance on water)
m
VLW
Log (daily)
e
m
VLW
Run distance
m
VLW
Run distance (daily)
e
m
VLW
Roughness
e
SEASCAN: $PSAP
Hardness
e
SEASCAN: $PSAP
JRC: $PJRCS
Status (target)
e
Battery voltage
e
Horizontal accuracy
e
GST
GSA
GGA
GNS
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSPOS_
iXSea: $PIXSE,STDPOS
Vertical accuracy
e
GST
GSA
iXSea: $PIXSE,HSPOS_
iXSea: $PIXSE,STDPOS
334
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
IXMIoFormatEx
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
D.4.4
Trawl Net Information
Informations
Soft.
NMEA
NMEA++
Position
s
GEONET: $PTSAG
GEONET: $PTSAL
SIMRAD ITI: TPT
SIMRAD ITI: TPR
Warp length
e
MARELEC: $MA
SIMRAD ITI: WWL
Submersion
e
s
Horizontal spread
e
GEONET: $PTSAG
GEONET: $PTSAN
SCANMAR: TDS
SIMRAD: $PSIMP
SIMRAD ITI: TDS
Vertical spread
e
SCANMAR: HBF
SIMRAD ITI: HFB
Rolling
e
GEONET: $PTSAG
Water temperature
e
D.4.5
DBS
MTW
IXMIoFormatEx
MARELEC: # MA DD
GEONET: $PTSAG
GEONET: $PTSAL
SIMRAD: $PSIMP
SIMRAD ITI: TPT
SIMRAD ITI: TPR
SIMRAD ITI: DBS
GEONET: $PTSAN
SIMRAD: $PSIMP
CHAUVIN ARNOUX:
Thermometer
GEONET Trawl Net
For the implementation, select the NMEA++ - $PTSAG (iXSea) source in the properties of
the trawl net relevant informations previously added, namely:
• Position, corresponding to the central position of the mouth of the trawl net, this value
is calculated from the ground cable length, port and starboard positions decoded
frames, and its previous value (which gives the impression that it takes above and
improves its stability). Note: a shift set to the position reproduces the three values of
the net positions (center, port and starboard).
• Submersion, corresponding to the average of port and starboard submersions.
• Horizontal spread, corresponding to the distance between the projected onto the
perpendicular to the direction of the otter boards.
• Rolling, calculated from the port and starboard submersions.
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
335
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 211 - GEONET Trawl position configuration
In addition, certain information must be present or recommended:
• Position (port side), necessarily software and required for proper operation.
• Position (starboard), necessarily software and required for proper operation.
• Eccentricity, necessarily software, this information corresponds to the deviation from
the ship's route.
• SOG, necessarily software.
• COG, necessarily software.
• Vertical spread, estimated for a representation in the 3D view.
Normally, the time stamp in the sentence is not present, the information is then stamped
with the UTC time Gecdis when decoding.
Do not forget to configure the trawl, particularly ground cable length.
Figure 212 - Trawl net sizes configuration
On the other hand, if the jumps are recorded on certain information must activate their
filtering, such as the geographical position (in this case, we must think also filter the
horizontal spread).
336
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Figure 213 - Trawl net filtering
Note: To highlight the filtering on the following examples, a GAPS fleet has been added in
addition to the trawl net which allows you to view the trail on the panels (green).
Before filtering, we note two jumps, one on the starboard panel (mobile one), and the
center position (orange):
Figure 214 - Before filtering
After filtering, there is only one jump, the mobile fleet one of the GAPS (unfiltered).
Orange center trace was not deflected.
Figure 215 - After filtering
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
337
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
E
SHIP OUTLINE
The file describing the ship’s outline includes the key words used to identify the different
ship’s parameters followed by their values. The parameters are delimited with square
brackets ‘[’ and ‘]’. It is highly important to respect the parameters orders.
The ship is always represented with the stem (bow) on top. X axis is incremented to the
right, Y axis to the top.
The couple of points (0,0) is used as marker reference and is located in order to get the
most perfect symmetry of the ship’s outline and make the shipbuilding easier.
It is not necessary to take the Sensor one point (GPS antenna) as the marker origin.
Make sure that the lines are well closed to get a nice shape: the first and the last couple of
points are identical. Be careful when defining XY values, since too small values can stop
the ship’s outline display (since the display depends on the scale).
• REM: comments or notes indicating the source file. This line is then ignored by the
compiler. You can add comments/notes or empty lines (to space out the document)
anywhere in the file.
• Unit: reference unit for the values. Three possibilities: meter, fathom and foot.
Repect the syntax.
• Sensor one: position of the conning. This position is expressed according to the
marker’s couple of points (0,0).
• Stern (rear track): not used but must be present.
• Depth sensor position: not used but must be present.
• Point for event mark: not used but must be present.
• HULL: defines the different vectors of the ship’s hull. Be sure the shape is closed by
repeating the first point into the last point.
• DECK: different vectors defining the ship’s deck. Be sure the shape is closed by
repeating the first point into the last point. You don’t need to define the points for the
deck, but the key word “DECK” must be written.
• END: end of the source file. Be sure you have not forgotten this key word since it is
used to delimit the DECK.
See below an example of the file. The drawing is the representation of the values given in
the file:
338
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
REM Nom du navire.
Unit(metre,fathom,foot)
[metre]
REM
Sensor one
Stern (rear track)
Depth sensor position
Point for event mark
X
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
Y
[
0.0]
[-121.6]
[
0.0]
[
0.0]
[
[
[
[
HULL (100 pts maxi)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
[ 0.0]
[ 3.7]
[ 5.6]
[ 9.3]
[ 11.6]
[ 13.0]
[ 13.0]
[ 13.0]
[ 11.8]
[ 10.5]
[ 5.9]
[ 5.0]
[ 0.0]
[ -5.0]
[ -5.9]
[-10.5]
[-11.8]
[-13.0]
[-13.0]
[-13.0]
[-11.6]
[ -9.3]
[ -5.6]
[ -3.7]
[ 0.0]
[ 40.2]
[ 39.0]
[ 37.7]
[ 31.4]
[ 25.1]
[ 18.8]
[
0.0]
[-113.1]
[-118.7]
[-120.6]
[-120.6]
[-121.6]
[-121.6]
[-121.6]
[-120.6]
[-120.6]
[-118.7]
[-113.1]
[
0.0]
[ 18.9]
[ 25.1]
[ 31.4]
[ 37.7]
[ 39.0]
[ 40.2]
DECK (50 pts maxi)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
[ 0.0]
[ 3.1]
[ 6.2]
[ 14.9]
[ 14.9]
[ 8.7]
[ 3.9]
[ 3.9]
[ 4.3]
[ 0.0]
[ -4.3]
[ -3.9]
[ -3.9]
[ -8.7]
[-14.9]
[-14.9]
[ -6.2]
[ -3.1]
[ 0.0]
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
17.3]
17.3]
14.5]
14.5]
10.4]
10.4]
2.5]
-18.2]
-20.1]
-20.1]
-20.1]
-18.2]
2.5]
10.4]
10.4]
14.4]
14.4]
17.3]
17.3]
END
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
339
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Index
Bearing line ........................................................................ 174
Bearing range line .............................................................. 174
Black box .............................................................................. 64
bridge height ....................................................................... 99
rotating .......................................................................... 177
COG ................................................................................ 73, 97
Colour mode
change ............................................................................. 55
configuration ................................................................... 30
COM port ........................................................................... 100
adding and configuring .................................................. 101
compilation scale ............................................................... 312
Configuration
miscellaneous tab ............................................................ 43
users’ rights ..................................................................... 39
configuring
UDP stream ................................................................... 103
Configuring a COM port ..................................................... 101
configuring information ..................................................... 112
configuring system information ........................................... 94
Conning position ........................................................ 114, 312
CONTACT ........................................................................... 310
Control port ....................................................................... 223
corrupted data ................................................................... 312
Course make good ............................................................... 72
coverage ............................................................................ 312
COW ............................................................................... 72, 97
CPA....................................................................................... 78
creating a fleet ................................................................... 111
creating a mobile ............................................................... 110
Current drift ......................................................................... 72
Cursor .................................................................................. 17
cusor
information...................................................................... 95
C
D
calculation rate .................................................................. 113
centring
mobile ............................................................................. 78
Centring
adding a place .................................................................. 58
editing a place ................................................................. 58
on a place ........................................................................ 57
on any mobile .................................................................. 59
on Own Ship .................................................................... 59
removing a place ............................................................. 58
CFAR ................................................................................... 224
Channel view ........................................................................ 69
Chart 2 view ......................................................................... 68
chart area ........................................................................... 315
chart database ................................................................... 128
chart loading modes .......................................................... 136
Chart overview ..................................................................... 68
charted depth ...................................................................... 98
checking sentences ............................................................ 109
Checking tab....................................................................... 113
ckecksum ........................................................................... 107
Clearing line ....................................................................... 175
deleting ......................................................................... 177
editing ............................................................................ 176
moving ........................................................................... 177
no more ......................................................................... 176
Datum
configuration ................................................................... 34
horizontal ...................................................................... 315
vertical ........................................................................... 319
Dead reckoning .................................................................. 120
deep contour ..................................................................... 313
deep soundings .................................................................. 313
DENC
default configuration ..................................................... 127
depth ................................................................................... 98
depth below keel ................................................................ 98
display base ....................................................................... 313
Display context .................................................................... 69
creating............................................................................ 70
deleting............................................................................ 71
selecting .......................................................................... 70
display scale ....................................................................... 313
draught ................................................................................ 98
drift course .......................................................................... 98
drift speed ........................................................................... 97
Dynamic fleet .................................................................... 110
A
acquisition timeout ................................................... 113, 114
Active window...................................................................... 47
adding
piece of information ..................................................... 112
UDP stream .................................................................... 103
Adding a COM port ............................................................ 101
adding a user ........................................................................ 38
Adding information to a mobile ......................................... 111
air draught ........................................................................... 98
AIS mobiles........................................................................... 88
AIS pilot ............................................................................. 110
Alarm window ...................................................................... 63
Alarms
configuration ................................................................... 37
Allowed CPA ......................................................................... 78
altitude ................................................................................ 98
apparent wind ..................................................................... 99
Apparent wind ..................................................................... 73
ARPA mobiles ....................................................................... 88
atténuation vidéo .............................................................. 224
B
340
E
EBL ..................................................................................... 175
ECDIS .................................................................................. 314
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
elapsed time from acq........................................................ 114
elapsed time from refresh ................................................. 114
ENC ..................................................................................... 314
database content ........................................................... 128
F
filtering
applying ......................................................................... 116
percentage ..................................................................... 116
threshold ........................................................................ 116
Filtering tab ........................................................................ 115
fixing the position of a ship ................................................ 121
fleet
creating .......................................................................... 111
specific appearance ......................................................... 90
Fleet ................................................................................... 110
dynamic ......................................................................... 110
static .............................................................................. 111
FTC...................................................................................... 224
G
Gecdis
launch ................................................................................ 5
Gecdis
installation ......................................................................... 2
uninstallation .................................................................... 4
Gecdis ..................................................................................... 1
Gecdis
close ................................................................................... 5
Geographic calculations ..................................................... 177
Glossary .............................................................................. 311
M
Man over board ................................................................... 20
manual autopilot ................................................................ 204
Mark template ................................................................... 215
Menu bar ............................................................................. 11
Minimum TCPA .................................................................... 78
MOB ..................................................................................... 20
mobile ................................................................................ 109
acquired ......................................................................... 110
centring ........................................................................... 78
creating .......................................................................... 110
dead reckoned ............................................................... 110
hiding ............................................................................... 77
label ................................................................................. 85
past track ......................................................................... 86
specific appearance ......................................................... 90
symbol ............................................................................. 85
symbols ............................................................................ 92
vectors ............................................................................. 86
Mobile
dead reckoning .............................................................. 120
mobile and sensor synthesis .............................................. 117
Mobile appearance .............................................................. 84
Mobile list ............................................................................ 76
mobiles
kind of ............................................................................ 109
Mobiles
AIS .................................................................................... 88
ARPA ................................................................................ 88
Mobiles alarms ..................................................................... 78
N
Navigation tasks ................................................................... 25
NMEA ................................................................................... 94
H
height of tide ....................................................................... 98
I
information
Checking tab .................................................................. 113
configuring ..................................................................... 112
correction tab ................................................................ 114
filtering tab .................................................................... 115
Source tab ...................................................................... 112
Information
adding ............................................................................ 111
Information windows ..................................................... 14, 51
access to modify .............................................................. 51
adding information .......................................................... 53
isobath................................................................................ 315
L
leeway angle ........................................................................ 97
Leeway angle ........................................................................ 72
Leeway track ........................................................................ 72
list of mobiles
opening ............................................................................ 77
List of mobiles ...................................................................... 76
log ........................................................................................ 99
O
objet cartographique
suppression.................................................................... 142
objet ponctuel cartographique .......................................... 142
opening a session ................................................................. 40
outline filename .................................................................. 74
overscale ............................................................................ 316
Overview .............................................................................. 10
Own Ship
alarms .............................................................................. 78
Own Ship ........................................................................ 19, 74
assign ............................................................................... 74
sizes ................................................................................. 74
Own Ship alarms
anti-collision .................................................................... 78
inconsistent depths ......................................................... 80
inconsistent positions ...................................................... 79
Own Ship characteristics ...................................................... 74
P
past track ............................................................................. 86
piece of information
adding ............................................................................ 112
pilot to one waypoint ......................................................... 204
Pilot view.............................................................................. 69
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
341
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
Piloting fix .......................................................................... 179
pitching ................................................................................ 98
Planning a route ................................................................... 25
position
bow .................................................................................. 97
conning ............................................................................ 97
mobile .............................................................................. 97
reference ......................................................................... 97
stern................................................................................. 97
positioning adjustment ...................................................... 115
presentation library ........................................................... 316
Presentation Library ........................................................... 148
profile
track ............................................................................... 211
Q
STC ..................................................................................... 224
steering course autopilot ................................................... 204
stream
UDP................................................................................ 103
Stream
file.................................................................................. 105
TCP................................................................................. 103
Streams .............................................................................. 100
spying ............................................................................ 106
submersion .......................................................................... 98
swaying course .................................................................... 98
swaying speed ..................................................................... 98
symbols ................................................................................ 92
system (information) ........................................................... 94
system information
configuration ................................................................... 94
quality of data .................................................................... 317
T
R
talker .................................................................................. 108
TCP ..................................................................................... 103
TCPA..................................................................................... 78
time zone ............................................................................. 94
Toolbar................................................................................. 35
inserting a button ........................................................... 35
Tooltips
configuration ................................................................... 46
track
profile ............................................................................ 211
Trackball................................................................................. 9
true heading ........................................................................ 97
true wind ............................................................................. 99
True wind ............................................................................. 73
TurboWin mode ................................................................... 48
Tx Delay ............................................................................. 224
range .................................................................................. 224
rate of turn .......................................................................... 98
recalage .............................................................................. 180
Relative wind........................................................................ 73
RENC .................................................................................. 317
rolling ................................................................................... 98
Route
calculation ....................................................................... 26
planning ........................................................................... 25
S
safety contour .................................................................... 317
SAR
parallel route ................................................................. 185
sector route ................................................................... 184
square spiral route......................................................... 183
SAR diagrams ..................................................................... 182
Scale ..................................................................................... 54
SCAMIN ................................................................................ 85
Screen
details .............................................................................. 10
size ................................................................................... 30
sea slope ............................................................................ 223
security............................................................................... 149
SENC ................................................................................... 318
Sensitivity Time Control .................................................... 224
sentences
checking ......................................................................... 109
Sentences
transmission .................................................................. 107
Server IP............................................................................. 223
Session
opening ............................................................................ 40
shallow contour ................................................................. 318
Shortcut keys ......................................................................... 6
Sizes of the Own Ship ........................................................... 74
SOG ................................................................................ 73, 97
Source tab .......................................................................... 112
SOW ............................................................................... 72, 97
specific appearance ............................................................. 90
specific header................................................................... 113
Static fleet.......................................................................... 111
342
U
UDP .................................................................................... 101
UDP stream ........................................................................ 101
User
adding .............................................................................. 38
User interface
configuration ................................................................... 45
Users .................................................................................... 38
Users’ rights ......................................................................... 39
UTC ...................................................................................... 94
UTC of reference position .................................................... 97
V
vectors ................................................................................. 86
View menu ........................................................................... 67
Voyage planning .................................................................. 25
VRM ................................................................................... 175
W
Warranty ................................................................................ v
Z
zone
création (S57) ................................................................ 144
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
Gecdis v8 – User’s Manual
ISD M 038G EN - September 2014
343
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement